Idu Hardware Description: Optix RTN 910 Radio Transmission System V100R002C00

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System
V100R002C00
IDU Hardware Description

Issue
03
Date
2010-01-30
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address:
Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
support@huawei.com
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX RTN 910

About This Document
About This Document

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name
Version
OptiX RTN 910
V100R002C00
iManager U2000
V100R001C00
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l
Network planning engineer
Hardware installation engineer
Installation and commissioning engineer
Field maintenance engineer
Data configuration engineer
System maintenance engineer
Before reading this document, you need to be familiar with the following:
l
Basics of digital microwave communication
Basics of the OptiX RTN 910
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol
Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk,
which if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

iii
OptiX RTN 910

GUI Conventions
Symbol
Description
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level
of risk, which if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation,
which if not avoided, could result in
equipment damage, data loss, performance
degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a
problem or save time.
Provides additional information to emphasize
or supplement important points of the main
text.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Thus, the latest document issue contains all
updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Based on Product Version V100R002C00

This document is the third release of the V100R002C00 version.
The updated contents are as follows.
iv
Section
Description
3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card
Modifies the sequence of high-order bits and

lower-order bits of DIP switches.
3.5.2 Functions and Features
Deletes specifications for VC-4 loopbacks on

the IF1 board.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Update History
Section
Description
5.6.1 E1 Cable to the External Equipment
Adds descriptions of requirements for the

diameter of a 75-ohm E1 cable, types of
coaxial connectors, and crimp pliers.
Fixes known bugs.

This document is the second release of the V100R002C00 version.
The updated contents are as follows.
Section
Description
D Glossary
Adds certain terms.
E Acronyms and Abbreviations
Adds certain abbreviations and acronyms.

This document is the first release of the V100R002C00 version.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

OptiX RTN 910

Contents
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii
1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Network Application.......................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Components.....................................................................................................................................................1-3
1.3 Configuration Modes.......................................................................................................................................1-6
2 Chassis..........................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Chassis Structure.............................................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Installation Mode.............................................................................................................................................2-2
2.3 IDU Labels......................................................................................................................................................2-2
3 Boards...........................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Board Appearance...........................................................................................................................................3-3
3.2 Board List........................................................................................................................................................3-4
3.3 CSTA...............................................................................................................................................................3-8
3.3.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................3-9
3.3.2 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................3-9
3.3.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................3-11
3.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-13
3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card...................................................................................................................3-22
3.3.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-25
3.3.7 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................3-25
3.3.8 Board Parameter Settings.....................................................................................................................3-26
3.3.9 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-26
3.4 CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.....................................................................................................................................3-30
3.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-30
3.4.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-30
3.4.3 Working Principle................................................................................................................................3-33
3.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-37
3.4.5 DIP Switches and CF Card...................................................................................................................3-50
3.4.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-53
3.4.7 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................3-54
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

vii
OptiX RTN 910

Contents
3.5 IF1.................................................................................................................................................................3-59
3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-61
3.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-66
3.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-68
3.6 IFU2..............................................................................................................................................................3-70
3.6.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-76
3.6.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-78
3.6.6 Parameter Settings................................................................................................................................3-79
3.7 IFX2..............................................................................................................................................................3-80
3.7.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-87
3.7.5 Valid Slot..............................................................................................................................................3-89
3.7.6 Parameter Settings................................................................................................................................3-90
3.8 EM6T/EM6F.................................................................................................................................................3-91
3.8.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-97
3.8.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-101
3.8.6 Board Feature Code............................................................................................................................3-102
3.8.7 Board Parameter Settings...................................................................................................................3-102
3.8.8 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................3-102
3.9 SL1D...........................................................................................................................................................3-104
3.9.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-105
3.9.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-105
3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-106
3.9.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................3-109
3.9.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-111
3.9.6 Board Feature Code............................................................................................................................3-111
3.9.7 Parameter Settings..............................................................................................................................3-112
3.9.8 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................3-112
viii

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Contents
3.10 SP3S/SP3D................................................................................................................................................3-113
3.10.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-114
3.10.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-114
3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-115
3.10.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-117
3.10.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-121
3.10.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................3-122
3.10.7 Board Parameter Settings.................................................................................................................3-122
3.10.8 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-122
3.11 PIU............................................................................................................................................................3-123
3.11.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-124
3.11.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-125
3.11.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-126
3.12 FAN...........................................................................................................................................................3-127
3.12.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-128
3.12.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-129
3.12.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-130
4 Accessories...................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 E1 Panel...........................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.2 PDU.................................................................................................................................................................4-4
4.2.1 Front Panel............................................................................................................................................. 4-4
4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle...........................................................................................................4-5
4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode.......................................................................................................................4-6
5 Cables...........................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Power Cable.................................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2 PGND Cable....................................................................................................................................................5-3
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable...................................................................................................................................5-4
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable........................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3 IF Jumper.........................................................................................................................................................5-5
5.4 XPIC Cable..................................................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.5 Fiber Jumper....................................................................................................................................................5-7
5.6 E1 Cables.........................................................................................................................................................5-9
5.6.1 E1 Cable to the External Equipment .....................................................................................................5-9
5.6.2 E1 Cable to the E1 Panel......................................................................................................................5-13
5.6.3 E1 Transit Cable...................................................................................................................................5-14
5.7 Orderwire Cable............................................................................................................................................5-16
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

ix
OptiX RTN 910

Contents
5.8 Network Cable...............................................................................................................................................5-17
A Parameters Description...........................................................................................................A-1
A.1 Parameters for NE Management....................................................................................................................A-3
A.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching..................................................................................................A-3
A.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation....................................................................................................A-7
A.1.3 Parameter Description: Object Attribute_Changing NE IDs.............................................................A-10
A.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization............................................................................A-11
A.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time..................................................A-13
A.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management..................................................................A-14
A.1.7 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs..............................................A-16
A.2 Parameters for Cable Management..............................................................................................................A-17
A.2.1 Parameter Description: Fiber Search..................................................................................................A-17
A.2.2 Parameter Description: Fiber Creation...............................................................................................A-19
A.2.3 Parameter Description: Radio Link Creation.....................................................................................A-20
A.3 Parameters for Communications Management............................................................................................A-22
A.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting.........................................................A-23
A.3.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration..............................................A-24
A.3.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management.............A-25
A.3.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC........................................A-27
A.3.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management..........................................................................A-28
A.3.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management..............................A-30
A.3.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation................A-31
A.3.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings..........................A-32
A.3.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP......................................................................A-34
A.3.10 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter............................................A-35
A.3.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table...............................................................A-36
A.3.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel...................................................................A-37
A.3.13 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management............................................A-41
A.3.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting.................................................................A-42
A.3.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting..........................................................A-43
A.3.16 Parameter Description: Access Control............................................................................................A-44
A.3.17 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control...................................................................................A-45
A.4 Radio Link Parameters................................................................................................................................A-46
A.4.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation.........................................A-47
A.4.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC............................................................................A-51
A.4.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create.................................................................................A-58
A.4.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection..............................................................................................A-59
A.4.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create.................................................................................................A-60
A.4.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection..........................................................................................A-62
A.4.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration....................................................................A-65
A.5 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters....................................................................................................A-76
A.5.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation...................................................................................A-76
x

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Contents
A.5.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP...................................................................................................A-79

A.6 SDH/PDH Service Parameters....................................................................................................................A-82
A.6.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation..........................................................A-83
A.6.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation..................................A-85
A.6.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services
......................................................................................................................................................................A-88
A.6.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration..........................................................................A-91
A.6.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control..................................................................................A-93
A.7 Clock Parameters.........................................................................................................................................A-96
A.7.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table.........................................................................A-97
A.7.2 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet............................................................A-99
A.7.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality..........................................................A-102
A.7.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control...............................................A-105
A.7.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status........................................A-106
A.7.6 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters...............A-107
A.7.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching....................................A-109
A.7.8 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source......................A-110
A.7.9 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status.....................................................................A-113
A.8 Parameters for Ethernet Services...............................................................................................................A-114
A.8.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation............................................................................A-115
A.8.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service............................................................................................A-121
A.8.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_Creation...................................................A-126
A.8.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation...........................................................................A-126
A.8.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service...........................................................................................A-132
A.8.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation...................................................................................A-144
A.9 Ethernet Protocol Parameters....................................................................................................................A-144
A.9.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation.....................................................................A-145
A.9.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management.....................................................................................A-147
A.9.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation................................................A-153
A.9.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration.......................................A-155
A.9.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters..................................................A-155
A.9.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters.....................................................A-161
A.9.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST....................A-163
A.9.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Protocol Configuration...........................A-171
A.9.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Adding Port to Be Quickly Deleted........A-174
A.9.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Management...............................A-175
A.9.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuraiton_Static Router Port Creation...................A-176
A.9.12 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Member Port Management.........A-176
A.9.13 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Static Multicast Group Member Creation
....................................................................................................................................................................A-178
A.9.14 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Data Statistics.......................................A-178
A.9.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation........................A-180
A.9.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Port Priority.................................................A-185
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

xi
OptiX RTN 910

Contents
A.9.17 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation.....................................................................A-186

A.9.18 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation...........................................................................A-187
A.10 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM...........................................................................................................A-188
A.10.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain Creation....A-188
A.10.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association Creation
....................................................................................................................................................................A-189
A.10.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation..............................A-190
A.10.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation.................A-191
A.10.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation................................A-192
A.10.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling.................................A-193
A.10.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling.................................A-194
A.10.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter................................A-196
A.10.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring..........A-199
A.11 QoS Parameters.......................................................................................................................................A-200
A.11.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management.................................................................A-201
A.11.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create....................................................A-206
A.11.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification..........................................A-211
A.11.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management..................................................................................A-213
A.11.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy................................................................................................A-218
A.11.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration.....................................A-223
A.11.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation........................................................A-232
A.12 RMON Parameters..................................................................................................................................A-233
A.12.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group.....................................................A-234
A.12.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group........................................................A-235
A.12.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group..........................................A-236
A.12.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting......................................................A-237
A.13 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces...........................................................................A-239
A.13.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General...................................................................................A-239
A.13.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced................................................................................A-241
A.13.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port...........................................................................A-242
A.13.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port................................................................A-242
A.13.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface...........................................................A-243
A.14 Parameters for Board Interfaces..............................................................................................................A-246
A.14.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute..........................................................................A-247
A.14.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute....................................................................A-249
A.14.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid/AM Configuration........................................................................A-251
A.14.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records......................................................................A-253
A.14.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test................................................................................................A-254
A.14.6 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute.............................................A-255
A.14.7 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes.............................................................A-256
A.14.8 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information...................................................A-261
A.14.9 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes.......................................................A-262
A.14.10 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces.......................................................................................A-263
xii

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Contents
A.14.11 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown....................................................................A-265

A.14.12 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces.......................................................................................A-266
A.14.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes........................................................A-268
A.14.14 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control............................................................A-271
A.14.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes....................................................A-272
A.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes................................................A-276
A.14.17 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes...................................................A-278
A.14.18 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes...............................................A-279
A.14.19 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes............................................A-281
A.15 Parameters for Overhead.........................................................................................................................A-283
A.15.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead.................................................................A-284
A.15.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs...............................................................................................A-284
A.15.3 Parameter Description: VC-12 POHs.............................................................................................A-286
B Board Loopback Types............................................................................................................B-1

C Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of Boards..................................................C-1
D Glossary.....................................................................................................................................D-1
E Acronyms and Abbreviations.................................................................................................E-1
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

xiii
OptiX RTN 910

Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1 TDM microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910........................................1-2
Figure 1-2 Hybrid microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910......................................1-3
Figure 1-3 IDU 910..............................................................................................................................................1-4
Figure 1-4 Direct mounting..................................................................................................................................1-6
Figure 1-5 Separate mounting..............................................................................................................................1-6
Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 910........................................................................................................2-2
Figure 2-2 Positions of the IDU 910 labels..........................................................................................................2-4
Figure 3-1 Board appearance (IFU2)...................................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-2 Bar code..............................................................................................................................................3-3
Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout...................................................................................................................................3-4
Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CSTA............................................................................................3-11
Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.........................................................................3-12
Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CSTA..................................................................................................................3-14
Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ-45 connector...................................................................................................3-16
Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface............................3-17
Figure 3-9 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface..........................................................................................3-20
Figure 3-10 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card ....................................................................................3-23
Figure 3-11 Slot for the CSTA in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-25
Figure 3-12 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSTA...........................................................................3-25
Figure 3-13 Functional block diagram ..............................................................................................................3-34
Figure 3-14 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit.......................................................................3-36
Figure 3-15 Front panel of the CSHA................................................................................................................3-37
Figure 3-16 Front panel of the CSHB................................................................................................................3-38
Figure 3-17 Front panel of the CSHC................................................................................................................3-38
Figure 3-18 Front view of the RJ-45 connector.................................................................................................3-42
Figure 3-19 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface..........................3-43
Figure 3-20 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface........................................................................................3-48
Figure 3-21 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card ....................................................................................3-51
Figure 3-22 Slot for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC in the IDU chassis.....................................................................3-53
Figure 3-23 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHA...........................................................................3-53
Figure 3-24 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHB...........................................................................3-53
Figure 3-25 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHC...........................................................................3-54
Figure 3-26 Functional block diagram of the IF1..............................................................................................3-62
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

xv
OptiX RTN 910

Figures
Figure 3-27 Front panel of the IF1.....................................................................................................................3-66

Figure 3-28 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis................................................................................................3-68
Figure 3-29 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IF1................................................................................3-68
Figure 3-30 Functional block diagram of the IFU2........................................................................................... 3-73
Figure 3-31 Front panel of the IFU2..................................................................................................................3-76
Figure 3-32 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-78
Figure 3-33 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFU2.............................................................................3-79
Figure 3-34 Functional block diagram of the IFX2........................................................................................... 3-83
Figure 3-35 Front panel of the IFX2..................................................................................................................3-87
Figure 3-36 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-89
Figure 3-37 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2.............................................................................3-90
Figure 3-38 Functional block diagram...............................................................................................................3-95
Figure 3-39 Front panel of the EM6T................................................................................................................3-97
Figure 3-40 Front panel of the EM6F................................................................................................................ 3-97
Figure 3-41 Front view of the RJ-45 connector.................................................................................................3-99
Figure 3-42 Slots for the EM6T/EM6F in the IDU chassis.............................................................................3-101
Figure 3-43 Logical slots for the logical boards of the EM6T/EM6F..............................................................3-101
Figure 3-44 Functional block diagram of the SL1D........................................................................................3-107
Figure 3-45 Front panel of the SL1D...............................................................................................................3-109
Figure 3-46 Slots for the SL1D in the IDU chassis..........................................................................................3-111
Figure 3-47 Logical slots for the logical boards of the SL1D..........................................................................3-111
Figure 3-48 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D...............................................................................3-115
Figure 3-49 Front panel of the SP3S................................................................................................................3-117
Figure 3-50 Front panel of the SP3D...............................................................................................................3-117
Figure 3-51 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface......................................................................................3-119
Figure 3-52 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU 910 chassis.........................................................................3-121
Figure 3-53 Logical slots for the logical boards of the 910.............................................................................3-121
Figure 3-54 Functional block diagram of the PIU...........................................................................................3-124
Figure 3-55 Front panel of the PIU..................................................................................................................3-125
Figure 3-56 Slot for the PIU in the IDU chassis..............................................................................................3-126
Figure 3-57 Logical slot for the logical board of the PIU................................................................................3-126
Figure 3-58 Functional block diagram of the FAN..........................................................................................3-128
Figure 3-59 Front panel of the FAN.................................................................................................................3-129
Figure 3-60 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis.............................................................................................3-130
Figure 3-61 Logical slot for the logical board of the FAN...............................................................................3-130
Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel..................................................................................................................4-2
Figure 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)...........................................................................................4-3
Figure 4-3 Front panel of the PDU.......................................................................................................................4-4
Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the PDU................................................................................................4-6
Figure 4-5 Internal structure of the PDU in DC-C mode ....................................................................................4-7
Figure 4-6 Internal structure of the PDU in DC-I mode .....................................................................................4-7
Figure 5-1 Power cable.........................................................................................................................................5-3
xvi

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Figures
Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable................................................................................................................................5-4

Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable.........................................................................................................................5-5
Figure 5-4 IF jumper............................................................................................................................................5-6
Figure 5-5 View of the XPIC cable......................................................................................................................5-7
Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector................................................................................................................................5-8
Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector.................................................................................................................................5-8
Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector.................................................................................................................................5-9
Figure 5-9 E1 cable............................................................................................................................................5-10
Figure 5-10 E1 cable that connects the IDU to an E1 panel..............................................................................5-13
Figure 5-11 E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44 connectors.............................................5-15
Figure 5-12 Orderwire cable..............................................................................................................................5-17
Figure 5-13 Network cable.................................................................................................................................5-19
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

xvii
OptiX RTN 910

Tables
Tables
Table 1-1 Introduction of the IDU 910.................................................................................................................1-3
Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 910.............................................................................1-4
Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 910..........................................................................1-5
Table 1-4 Configuration Type of the OptiX RTN 910.........................................................................................1-7
Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels..............................................................................................................2-3
Table 3-1 List of IDUs..........................................................................................................................................3-4
Table 3-2 Description of the indicators on the CSTA........................................................................................3-14
Table 3-3 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces.................................................. 3-15
Table 3-4 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface...................................................................................... 3-16
Table 3-5 Pin assignment of the EXT interface................................................................................................. 3-16
Table 3-6 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector..................................................................3-17
Table 3-7 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface........................................................................................3-18
Table 3-8 Pin assignment of the F1/S1 interface................................................................................................3-19
Table 3-9 Pin assignment of the ALMI/ALMO interface..................................................................................3-19
Table 3-10 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface..........................................................................................3-19
Table 3-11 Description of the service interfaces on the CSTA..........................................................................3-20
Table 3-12 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface..........................................................................................3-21
Table 3-13 Setting the DIP switches.................................................................................................................. 3-23
Table 3-14 Board feature code of the CSTA......................................................................................................3-26
Table 3-15 STM-1 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-26
Table 3-16 E1 interface performance.................................................................................................................3-27
Table 3-17 Orderwire interface performance.....................................................................................................3-27
Table 3-18 Synchronous data interface performance.........................................................................................3-28
Table 3-19 Asynchronous data interface performance.......................................................................................3-28
Table 3-20 Clock timing and synchronization performance.............................................................................. 3-29
Table 3-21 Wayside service interface performance........................................................................................... 3-29
Table 3-22 Mechanical behavior .......................................................................................................................3-29
Table 3-23 Description of the indicators on the CSHA/CSHB..........................................................................3-38
Table 3-24 Description of the indicators on the CSHC......................................................................................3-39
Table 3-25 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces................................................ 3-41
Table 3-26 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface.................................................................................... 3-42
Table 3-27 Pin assignment of the EXT interface............................................................................................... 3-42
Table 3-28 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector................................................................3-43
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

xix
OptiX RTN 910

Tables
Table 3-29 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface......................................................................................3-44

Table 3-30 Pin assignment of the F1/S1 interface..............................................................................................3-45
Table 3-31 Pin assignment of the ALMI/ALMO interface................................................................................3-45
Table 3-32 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface..........................................................................................3-45
Table 3-33 Description of the service interfaces on the CSHA/CSHB..............................................................3-46
Table 3-34 Description of the service interfaces on the CSHC..........................................................................3-46
Table 3-35 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI mode.....................................................................3-47
Table 3-36 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI-X mode.................................................................3-47
Table 3-37 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface..........................................................................................3-48
Table 3-38 Setting the DIP switches..................................................................................................................3-51
Table 3-39 Board feature code of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC..............................................................................3-54
Table 3-40 Performance of the GE optical interface .........................................................................................3-55
Table 3-41 GE electric interface performance....................................................................................................3-55
Table 3-42 FE electric interface performance....................................................................................................3-56
Table 3-43 STM-1 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-56
Table 3-44 E1 interface performance.................................................................................................................3-57
Table 3-45 Orderwire interface performance.....................................................................................................3-57
Table 3-46 Synchronous data interface performance.........................................................................................3-57
Table 3-47 Asynchronous data interface performance.......................................................................................3-58
Table 3-48 Clock timing and synchronization performance..............................................................................3-58
Table 3-49 Wayside service interface performance...........................................................................................3-58
Table 3-50 Mechanical behavior .......................................................................................................................3-59
Table 3-51 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF1...............................................................3-62
Table 3-52 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF1.............................................................3-65
Table 3-53 Description of the indicators on the IF1...........................................................................................3-66
Table 3-54 Description of the Interfaces ...........................................................................................................3-67
Table 3-55 Slot allocation ..................................................................................................................................3-69
Table 3-56 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-69
Table 3-57 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.................................................................3-70
Table 3-58 Mechanical behavior........................................................................................................................3-70
Table 3-59 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFU2............................................................3-73
Table 3-60 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFU2..........................................................3-75
Table 3-61 Description of the indicators on the IFU2........................................................................................3-76
Table 3-62 Description of the Interfaces ...........................................................................................................3-78
Table 3-67 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFX2............................................................3-84
Table 3-68 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFX2..........................................................3-86
Table 3-69 Description of the indicators on the IFX2........................................................................................3-87
Table 3-70 Description of the interfaces............................................................................................................3-89
xx

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Tables

Table 3-75 Signal processing flow in the receive direction............................................................................... 3-95
Table 3-76 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction..............................................................................3-96
Table 3-77 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F.......................................................................... 3-97
Table 3-78 Description of the interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F...........................................................................3-99
Table 3-79 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI mode.....................................................................3-99
Table 3-80 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI-X mode...............................................................3-100
Table 3-81 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector..............................................................3-101
Table 3-82 Slot configuration for the EM6T/EM6F........................................................................................3-101
Table 3-83 Board feature code of the EM6F....................................................................................................3-102
Table 3-84 Performance of the GE optical interface .......................................................................................3-102
Table 3-85 GE electric interface performance..................................................................................................3-103
Table 3-86 FE electric interface performance..................................................................................................3-103
Table 3-87 Mechanical behavior .....................................................................................................................3-104
Table 3-88 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL1D.........................................................3-107
Table 3-89 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL1D.......................................................3-108
Table 3-90 Description of the indicators on the SL1D.....................................................................................3-109
Table 3-91 Description of the interfaces .........................................................................................................3-110
Table 3-92 Slot allocation for the SL1D..........................................................................................................3-111
Table 3-93 Board feature code of the SL1D.....................................................................................................3-112
Table 3-94 STM-1 optical interface performance............................................................................................3-112
Table 3-95 Mechanical behavior......................................................................................................................3-113
Table 3-96 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D...............................................3-115
Table 3-97 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D.............................................3-116
Table 3-98 Description of the indicators on the SP3S/SP3D...........................................................................3-118
Table 3-99 Description of the interface on the SP3S.......................................................................................3-118
Table 3-100 Description of the interfaces on the SP3D...................................................................................3-118
Table 3-101 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface......................................................................................3-119
Table 3-102 Slot configuration for the SP3S/SP3D.........................................................................................3-121
Table 3-103 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D.........................................................................................3-122
Table 3-104 E1 interface performance.............................................................................................................3-122
Table 3-105 Mechanical behavior ...................................................................................................................3-123
Table 3-106 Description of the power status indicators ..................................................................................3-125
Table 3-107 Description of the interfaces on the PIU......................................................................................3-126
Table 3-108 Technical specifications...............................................................................................................3-127
Table 3-109 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed...........................................................................................3-129
Table 3-110 Description of the fan status indicators........................................................................................3-130
Table 3-111 Technical specifications for the FAN...........................................................................................3-131
Table 4-1 Interface description of an E1 panel.....................................................................................................4-2
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

xxi
OptiX RTN 910

Tables
Table 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)............................................................................................4-3

Table 4-3 Interfaces on the PDU..........................................................................................................................4-5
Table 5-1 Specifications of the power cable.........................................................................................................5-3
Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers.........................................................................................................................5-7
Table 5-3 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 cable.............................................................................................5-10
Table 5-4 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 cable...........................................................................................5-12
Table 5-5 Connection table of the E1 cable that connects a PO1/PH1 board to an E1 panel............................5-14
Table 5-6 Connection table of the E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44 connectors..........5-15
Table 5-7 Pin assignment of the orderwire cable...............................................................................................5-17
Table 5-8 Pin assignment of the MDI interface.................................................................................................5-17
Table 5-9 Pin assignment of the MDI-X interface.............................................................................................5-18
Table 5-10 Pin assignment of the straight through cable...................................................................................5-19
Table 5-11 Pin assignment of the crossover cable.............................................................................................5-19
Table A-1 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames.........................................................A-275
Table A-2 Data frame processing....................................................................................................................A-280
Table B-1 Loopback types supported by different service interface boards........................................................B-1
Table C-1 Description of the indicators on the CSTA........................................................................................C-1
Table C-2 Description of the indicators on the CSHA/CSHB............................................................................C-2
Table C-3 Description of the indicators on the CSHC........................................................................................C-3
Table C-4 Description of the indicators on the IF1.............................................................................................C-5
Table C-5 Description of the indicators on the IFU2..........................................................................................C-6
Table C-6 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F.............................................................................C-7
Table C-7 Description of the indicators on the SL1D.........................................................................................C-9
Table C-8 Description of the indicators on the SP3S/SP3D................................................................................C-9
Table C-9 Description of the indicators on the AUX........................................................................................C-10
Table C-10 Description of the power status indicators ....................................................................................C-10
Table C-11 Description of the fan status indicators..........................................................................................C-11
Table C-12 Weight and power consumption of boards.....................................................................................C-11
xxii

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

1 Introduction
Introduction
About This Chapter

The OptiX RTN 910 is one of the series products of the OptiX RTN 900 radio transmission
system.
1.1 Network Application
The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation split microwave transmission system developed by
Huawei. It can provide a seamless microwave transmission solution for a mobile communication
network or private network.
1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 910 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 910, the ODU, and
the antenna system. An ODU is connected to an IDU through an IF cable.
1.3 Configuration Modes
The OptiX RTN 910 forms different configuration modes by flexibly configuring different
control, switching, and timing boards, IF boards, and ODUs to meet the requirements of different
microwave application scenarios.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

1-1
OptiX RTN 910

1 Introduction
1.1 Network Application

The OptiX RTN 900 is a new generation split microwave transmission system developed by
Huawei. It can provide a seamless microwave transmission solution for a mobile communication
network or private network.
The OptiX RTN 900 products are available in two types: OptiX RTN 910 and OptiX RTN 950.
The IDU of the OptiX RTN 910 is 1U high and supports one or two IF boards. The IDU of the
OptiX RTN 950 is 2U high and supports one to six IF boards. The users can choose an appropriate
type based on the actual requirements.
The OptiX RTN 910 provides several types of service interfaces and facilitates installation and
flexible configuration. It can provide a solution that is integrated with the TDM microwave,
Hybrid microwave, and Packet microwave based on the network requirements. It supports the
smooth upgrade from the TDM microwave to the Hybrid microwave, and from the Hybrid
microwave to the Packet microwave. The solution can evolve based on the service changes that
occur due to radio mobile network evolution. Thus, this solution can meet the transmission
requirements of not only 2G and 3G networks, but also future LTE and 4G networks.
Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2 show the TDM microwave transmission solution and the Hybrid
microwave transmission solution respectively that are provided by the OptiX RTN 910 for the
mobile communication network.
Figure 1-1 TDM microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910
E1
E1
E1
E1
STM-1/E1 Regional Backhaul
Network
E1
E1
E1
E1
E1
OptiX RTN 910
1-2
E1
BTS
BSC

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

1 Introduction
Figure 1-2 Hybrid microwave transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 910
FE
E1
E1
FE
E1
STM-1/
E1
E1
E1
Regional backhaul
network
FE/GE
GE
E1
FE
FE
OptiX RTN 910
E1
NodeB
BTS
RNC
BSC
NOTE
In the solutions, the local backhaul network is optional. The OptiX RTN 910 can be connected to the RNC
or the BSC directly.
When the OptiX RTN 910 supports the microwaves in three directions or more, you can adopt the NE
cascading mode or use the OptiX RTN 950, which is more powerful.
1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 910 adopts a split structure. The system consists of the IDU 910, the ODU, and
the antenna system. An ODU is connected to an IDU through an IF cable.
IDU 910
The IDU 910 is the indoor unit of an OptiX RTN 910 system. It accesses services, performs
multiplexing/demultiplexing and IF processing of the services, and provides system control and
communication function.
Table 1-1 lists the basic features of the IDU 910.
Table 1-1 Introduction of the IDU 910
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Item
Performance
Chassis height
1U
Pluggable
Supported
Number of microwave
directions
1-2

1-3
OptiX RTN 910

1 Introduction
Item
Performance
RF configuration mode
1+0 non-protection configuration

2+0 non-protection configuration
1+1 protection configuration
N+1 protection configuration (N = 1)
XPIC configuration
Figure 1-3 IDU 910
ODU
The ODU is the outdoor unit of the OptiX RTN 900. It performs frequency conversion and
amplification of signals.
The OptiX RTN 900 series products can uses the RTN 600 ODU and RTN XMC ODU, covering
6 GHz to 38 GHz entire frequency band.
Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 910
Item
Description
Standard Power
ODU
High Power ODU
Low Capacity for

PDH ODU
ODU type
SP, SPA
HP
LP
Frequency band
7/8/11/13/15/18/23/
26/38 GHz (SP
ODU)
7/8/11/13/15/18/23/
26/32/38 GHz
7/8/11/13/15/18/23
GHz
6/7/8/11/13/15/18/2
3 GHz (SPA ODU)
1-4

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

1 Introduction
Item
Description
Microwave
modulation mode
Standard Power
ODU
High Power ODU
Low Capacity for

PDH ODU
QPSK/16QAM/
32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM/256QAM
(SP)
QPSK/16QAM/
32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM/256QAM
QPSK/16QAM
7/14/28/56 MHz
3.5/7/14/28 MHz
QPSK/16QAM/
32QAM/64QAM/
128QAM (SPA)
Channel spacing
3.5/7/14/28 MHz
Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 910
Item
Description
High Power ODU
ODU type
XMC-2
Frequency band
15/23 GHz
Microwave modulation mode
QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/64QAM/128QAM/
256QAM
Channel spacing
7/14/28/56 MHz
Antenna
The OptiX RTN 910 provides an entire frequency band antenna solution, and supports the singlepolarized antenna and dual-polarized antenna with a diameter of 0.3 m to 3.7 m and the
corresponding feeder system.
There are two methods of mounting the ODU and the antenna: direct mounting and separate
mounting.
l
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
The direct mounting method is normally adopted when a small-diameter and singlepolarized antenna is used. In this situation, if one ODU is configured for one antenna, the
ODU is directly mounted at the back of the antenna. If two ODUs are configured for one
antenna, an RF signal combiner/splitter (hereinafter referred to as a hybrid coupler) must
be mounted to connect the ODUs to the antenna. Figure 1-4 shows the direct mounting
method.

1-5
OptiX RTN 910

1 Introduction
Figure 1-4 Direct mounting
The separate mounting method is adopted when a double-polarized antenna or big-diameter

and single-polarized antenna is used. Figure 1-5 shows the separate method. In this
situation, a hybrid coupler can be mounted. That is, two ODUs share one feed boom.
Figure 1-5 Separate mounting
1.3 Configuration Modes

The OptiX RTN 910 forms different configuration modes by flexibly configuring different
control, switching, and timing boards, IF boards, and ODUs to meet the requirements of different
microwave application scenarios.
1-6

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

1 Introduction
Table 1-4 Configuration Type of the OptiX RTN 910
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Configuration
Modes
Type of the
Control,
Switching,
and Timing
Board
Type of the IF
Board
Type of the
ODU
Main
Application
PDH
microwave
equipment
CSTA
IF1
Low capacity
for PDH ODU
Providing a
radio link whose
capacity is not
higher than
16xE1
SDH
microwave
equipment
CSTA
IF1
Standard power
ODU or high
power ODU
Providing an
STM-1 radio
link or a highcapacity PDH
radio link
Hybrid
microwave
equipment
CSHA/CSHB/
CSHC
IFU2
Standard power
ODU or high
power ODU
Providing a
Hybrid radio
link
XPIC Hybrid
microwave
equipment
CSHA/CSHB/
CSHC
IFX2
Standard power
ODU or high
power ODU
Providing a
Hybrid radio
link of the super
capacity

1-7
OptiX RTN 910

2 Chassis
Chassis
About This Chapter

The IDU of OptiX RTN 910 is a 1U chassis. It supports various installation modes and therefore
can be deployed flexibly.
2.1 Chassis Structure
The dimensions of the IDU 910 are 442 mm (width) x 220 mm (depth) x 44 mm (height). The
IDU 910 has a two-layered structure and supports wind cooling.
2.2 Installation Mode
The IDU 910 chassis supports various installation modes and can be deployed flexibly.
2.3 IDU Labels
There are labels such as the product nameplate label, qualification card label, ESD protection
label, grounding label, laser safety class label, high temperature warning label, and operation
warning label on the IDU chassis and the boards in the IDU chassis. You need to be familiar
with the meanings of the labels and perform operations based on the indications of the labels,
thus preventing personal injury and damage to the equipment.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

2-1
OptiX RTN 910

2 Chassis
2.1 Chassis Structure

The dimensions of the IDU 910 are 442 mm (width) x 220 mm (depth) x 44 mm (height). The
IDU 910 has a two-layered structure and supports wind cooling.
Figure 2-1 shows the chassis structure of the IDU 910.
Figure 2-1 Chassis structure of the IDU 910
2.2 Installation Mode

The IDU 910 chassis supports various installation modes and can be deployed flexibly.
The IDU 910 can be installed:
l
In a 300 mm ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute) cabinet
In a 600 mm ETSI cabinet
In a 450 mm 19-inch cabinet
In a 600 mm 19-inch cabinet
In an open rack
On a wall
On a table
2.3 IDU Labels

There are labels such as the product nameplate label, qualification card label, ESD protection
label, grounding label, laser safety class label, high temperature warning label, and operation
warning label on the IDU chassis and the boards in the IDU chassis. You need to be familiar
with the meanings of the labels and perform operations based on the indications of the labels,
thus preventing personal injury and damage to the equipment.
2-2

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

2 Chassis
Label Description
Table 2-1 provides the description of the labels on the IDU chassis and the boards in the IDU
chassis. The actual labels may be different depending on the configurations of the chassis and
boards.
Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels
Label
/QUALIFICATION CARD
Label Name
Description
ESD protection
label
Indicates that the

equipment is
sensitive to static
electricity.
Grounding label
Indicates the
grounding position
of the IDU chassis.
Fan warning
label
warns you not to

touch the fan leaves
when the fan is
rotating.
High
temperature
warning label
The board surface

temperature may
exceed 70C when
the ambient
temperature is
higher than 55C. In
this case, you need
to wear protective
gloves before
handling the board.
Qualification
card label
Indicates that the

equipment is
qualified.
RoHS label
Indicates that the

equipment
complies with the
related
requirements
specified in the
RoHS directive.
HUAWEI
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
MADE IN CHINA

2-3
OptiX RTN 910

2 Chassis
Label
Label Name
Description
Product
nameplate label
Indicates the
product name and
certification.
Operation
guidance label
The switch lever

must be pulled
outwards slightly
before setting the
switch to the "I" or
"O" position.
PULL
Label Position
Figure 2-2 shows the positions of the labels on the chassis of the IDU 910.
Figure 2-2 Positions of the IDU 910 labels
OptiX RTN 910
/QUALIFICATION CARD
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
MA DE IN CHINA
-48-60V;5A
N 14036
HUAWEI
Class 1 Laser Product
POWER RATING:
This device complies with Part15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
HUAWEI TECHNOLGIES CO ., LTD.
MADE IN CHINA
! WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE
DISCONNECTING IF CABLE
2-4

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Boards
About This Chapter

The IDU 910 supports the following types of boards: system control, switching, and timing
board, IF board, Ethernet board, SDH board, PDH board, power supply board, and fan board.
3.1 Board Appearance
The dimensions of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 910 chassis are 19.82 mm (height)
x 196.70 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width). The dimensions of the system control, cross-connect
unit, and timing board in the IDU 910 are 19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 388.40 mm
(width).
3.2 Board List
The boards are inserted in the IDU 910. The IDU 910 realizes different functions when housing
different types of boards.
3.3 CSTA
The CSTA is an TDM system control, switching, and timing board.
3.4 CSHA/CSHB/CSHC
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is the integrated Hybrid system control and communication,
switching, and clock board. The differences between the CSHA, CSHB, and CSHC are with
regard to the types and number of service interfaces.
3.5 IF1
The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board and is available in two types, namely, IF1A and
IF1B. In this document, the IF1 is used to stand for both the IF1A and IF1B. The only difference
from the IF1B is that the IF1A is more reliable. The IF1 supports the DC-C power distribution
modes.
3.6 IFU2
The IFU2 is a general IF board, which can support the Hybrid microwave transmission and
Packet microwave transmission at the same time. The IFU2 board supports the DC-I power
distribution mode.
3.7 IFX2
The IFX2 is a general IF board, which can support the XPIC function of the Hybrid microwave
and Packet microwave. The IFX2 board supports the DC-I power distribution mode.
3.8 EM6T/EM6F
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-1
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical interfaces and
two GE interfaces. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is as
follows: the GE interfaces on the EM6T always function as electrical interfaces whereas the GE
interfaces on the EM6F use the SFP modules and therefore can function as two optical or
electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces on the EM6F and the EM6T are compatible
with the FE electrical interfaces.
3.9 SL1D
The SL1D is an SDH dual-port STM-1 board.
3.10 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm
tributary board.
3.11 PIU
The PIU is the power supply board and can access two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies.
3.12 FAN
The FAN is the fan board that dissipates the heat from the chassis through wind cooling.
3-2

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
3.1 Board Appearance

The dimensions of the board in the extended slot of the IDU 910 chassis are 19.82 mm (height)
x 196.70 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width). The dimensions of the system control, cross-connect
unit, and timing board in the IDU 910 are 19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 388.40 mm
(width).
NOTE
The depth of the board refers to the distance between the front panel and the end of the PCB.
Figure 3-1 shows the appearance of the boards in the IDU 910 chassis.
Figure 3-1 Board appearance (IFU2)
The appearance of the IFU2 is provided as an example. The front panel of the IFU2 has two
ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejector levers are used when the IFU2 is inserted or
removed. The captive screws are used to fasten the IFU2. The bar code of the IFU2 is attached
to one of the two ejector levers. Figure 3-2 shows the bar code of the IFU2.
Figure 3-2 Bar code
Bar code
0514721055000015-SL91SL1D01
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Internal code
Board version
Board name
Board feature code

3-3
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
NOTE
The indication of the board feature code is related to the board type. The feature code of an optical interface
board indicates the type of the optical interface on the board. The feature code of an E1 interface board
indicates the impedance of the E1 interface on the board. For details about the board feature code, see the
description of each board in this document.
3.2 Board List

The boards are inserted in the IDU 910. The IDU 910 realizes different functions when housing
different types of boards.
Figure 3-3 IDU slot layout
Slot
Slot
5
6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 1 (CSTA/CSHA/CSHB/CSHC)
NOTE
The EXT represents an extended slot, which can be inserted with various IF boards and interface boards.
Table 3-1 List of IDUs
3-4
Board
Name
Full
Spelling
CSTA
TDM
control,
switching,
and timing
board
Valid Slot
Description
Slot 1
Provides full timeslot cross-connections

for VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services equivalent
to 8x8 VC-4s.
Performs system communication and

control.
Provides the clock processing function and

supports one external clock input/output
function.
Provides sixteen 75-ohm or 120-ohm E1

interfaces.
Uses the SFP module to provide two

STM-1 optical interfaces.
Provides one Ethernet NM interface, one

NM serial interface, and one NE cascading
interface.
Provides one orderwire interface, one

asynchronous data interface, and threeinput and one-output external alarm
interfaces.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Board
Name
Full
Spelling
CSHA
Hybrid
control,
switching,
and timing
board
Valid Slot
Description
Slot 1

to 8x8 VC-4s.
Provides the 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching

capability.

control.

function.

interfaces.
Provides two FE electrical interfaces.
Provides two GE electrical interfaces that

are compatible with the FE electrical
interface.

interface.

interfaces.

3-5
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
3-6
Board
Name
Full
Spelling
CSHB
Hybrid
control,
switching,
and timing
board
Valid Slot
Description
Slot 1

to 8x8 VC-4s.

capability.

control.

function.
Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm

E1 interfaces.

interface.

interface.

interfaces.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Board
Name
Full
Spelling
CSHC
Hybrid
control,
switching,
and timing
board
IF1
IFU2
IFX2
SL1D
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Valid Slot
Description
Slot 1

to 8x8 VC-4s.

capability.

control.

function.

interfaces.
Uses the SFP module to provide two

STM-1 optical interfaces.
Uses the SFP module to provide two GE

optical or electrical interfaces. The GE
electrical interfaces are compatible with
the FE electrical interfaces.

interface.

interfaces.
SDH IF
board
Slot 3 or slot
4
Provides one IF interface.
Supports the TU-based PDH microwave

solution and the STM-1-based SDH
microwave solution.
Universal IF
board
Slot 3 or slot
4
Supports the Hybrid microwave solution.
Supports AM.
Supports the XPIC function of the Hybrid

microwave.
Supports the AM of the Hybrid

microwave.
Universal
XPIC IF
board
2xSTM-1
interface
board
Slot 3 or slot
4
Slot 3 or slot
4
Uses the SFP module to provide two STM-1

optical interfaces.

3-7
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Board
Name
Full
Spelling
EM6T
6 Port RJ45
Ethernet/
Gigabit
Ethernet
Interface
Board
EM6F
Valid Slot
Description
Slot 3 or slot
4
Provides four FE electrical interfaces.

interface.
Provides four FE electrical interfaces.
Uses the SFP module to provide two GE

optical or electrical interfaces. The GE
electrical interfaces are compatible with
the FE electrical interfaces.
4 Port RJ45 +
2 Port SFP
Fast
Ethernet/
Gigabit
Ethernet
Interface
Board
SP3S
16xE1
tributary
board
Slot 3 or slot
4

interfaces.
SP3D
32xE1
tributary
board
Slot 3 or slot
4
Provides thirty-two 75-ohm or 120-ohm E1

interfaces.
TNC1PIU
Power board
Slot 5
Provides two -48 V/-60 V DC power inputs.
TNC1FAN
Fan board
Slot 6
Cools and ventilates the IDU.
3.3 CSTA
The CSTA is an TDM system control, switching, and timing board.
3.3.1 Version Description
The functional version of the CSTA is SLA1.
The CSTA provides the full time division cross-connection, system control and communication,
and clock processing functions. In addition, the CSTA provides PDH/SDH service interfaces,
auxiliary interfaces, and management interfaces.
3.3.3 Working Principle
The CSTA comprises the system control and communication unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit,
service processing unit, auxiliary interface unit, and power supply unit.
3.3.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, service interfaces, management interfaces, auxiliary interfaces, buttons,
and labels on the front panel.
This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF card.
3-8

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
3.3.6 Valid Slots

The CSTA is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of two ordinary
slots. The CSTA is mapped into four logical boards and the corresponding logical slots are also
allocated for the logical boards on the NMS so that the NMS can manage each functional unit
on the CSTA.
3.3.7 Board Feature Code
The E1 interface impedance of the CSTA can be identified by the board feature code of the bar
code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name.
3.3.8 Board Parameter Settings
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSTA.
3.3.9 Technical Specifications
This topic describes the board specifications, including cross-connection performance, SDH
optical interface performance, E1 interface performance, clock performance, auxiliary interface
performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

The functional version of the CSTA is SLA1.

The CSTA provides the full time division cross-connection, system control and communication,
and clock processing functions. In addition, the CSTA provides PDH/SDH service interfaces,
auxiliary interfaces, and management interfaces.
Time Division Cross-Connection

l
Grooms service signals between boards.
Supports full time division cross-connections at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level, which
are equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s.
System Control and Communication

l
Provides the system control and communication function to manage the other boards and
the ODUs by using the NE software.
Controls the other boards by using the board software that runs on the system control and
communication unit.
Monitors and collects performance events and alarms of all the boards.
Communicates with the NMS and the other NEs and processes a maximum of seven DCCs.
Cross-connects and processes overheads.
Clock Processing
l
Traces the clock source and provides the system clock and the frame headers of service
signals and overhead signals for the other boards.
Supports one input and one output of the external clock.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-9
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
l
Supports the selection of the external clock source or the service clock source to be the
system clock source. The service clock source can be the SDH line clock, microwave
interface line clock, or tributary clock.
Supports clock protection based on the clock priority, synchronization status message
(SSM) protocol, or extended SSM protocol.
Supports the detection of the states of the system clock source and the phase-locked loop.
Supports the locked, holdover, and free-run modes.
Service Interfaces
l
Provides sixteen 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 service interfaces.
Adopts the SFP optical modules and can provide two STM-1 optical interfaces.
Auxiliary Interfaces and Management Interfaces

l
Provides one Ethernet NM interface.
Provides one NM serial interface.
Provides one NE cascade interface.
Provides one Orderwire interface.
Provides one asynchronous data interface.
Provides one synchronous data interface.
Provides one three-input and one-output external alarm interface.
Protection Processing
l
Performs the 1+1 protection switching.
Performs the linear MSP switching.
Performs the SNCP switching.
Performs the clock protection switching.
Alarms and Performance Events

l
Reports various alarms and performance events.
Supports the alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and
setting the BER threshold.
Supports the performance event management functions such as setting the performance
thresholds and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.
NOTE
For details about the alarm management and performance event management functions, see the OptiX RTN
910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.
Maintenance Features
3-10
Supports the inloop and outloop over optical interfaces.
Supports the outloop in VC-4 paths.
Supports the board reset.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Detects the board temperature, alarm inputs/outputs, and overvoltage/undervoltage of the

-48 V power supply.
Checks the indicators on all the boards.
Supports the hot swapping and mis-insertion prevention functions.
Supports the query of the board manufacturing information.
Supports the local and remote loading of the FPGA and supports the misloading prevention
function.
Supports the insertion and removal of the CF card and backs up the configuration data. The
backup configuration data can be used for quick service restoration in the case of an onsite board replacement.

The CSTA comprises the system control and communication unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit,
service processing unit, auxiliary interface unit, and power supply unit.
Functional Block Diagram

Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CSTA
SDH signal
E1 signal
STM-1
signal
processing
unit
E1 signal
processing
unit
Backplane
VC-4
signal
VC-4
signal
VC-4 signal
Cross-connect
unit
TDM service board
Control bus
NM interface
NM serial interface
NE cascade
interface
External alarm
interface
Orderwire
interface
Clock interface
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Auxiliary interface
unit
Asynchronous
data interface
Synchronous
data interface
System control
and
communicatio
n unit
Clock unit
Clock source
received from
the service unit
on the board
Clock signal
received from
other boards
Clock signal
provided to other
boards
Clock signal
provided to the
other units on
the board
External clock signal

Supplies power to
the other units on
the board
Power
supply
unit

-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V power supplied
to other boards
+12 V power
supplied to the fans
3-11
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
System Control and Communication Unit

The system control and communication unit comprises the CPU unit and logic control unit. The
system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
l
Controls and manages the other units on the CSTA, and also collects alarms and
performance events through the control bus.
Controls and manages the other boards in the IDU, and also collects alarms and performance
events through the control bus.
Controls and manages the ODU by using the ODU control signal transmitted through the
control bus in the backplane and the SMODEM on the IF board.
Processes the network management messages in the DCCs through the logic control unit.
The CPU unit communicates with the NMS through the Ethernet NM interface and NE
cascade interface.
The CPU unit reads the information from the CF card through the bus and loads the
software.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and loads
the FPGA software.
The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads of the auxiliary interface unit, the CPU
unit, and other boards, thus realizing the following functions:
Adds or drops the DCC information processed by the CPU unit.
Adds or drops the orderwire and asynchronous data services.
Realizes the interchange of the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between
different lines.
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system through the higher order crossconnect unit and the lower order cross-connect unit. Figure 3-5 shows the functional block
diagram of the cross-connect unit.
Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Sink TDM
service unit
Source TDM
service unit
HOXC
LOXC
3-12

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
The source TDM service unit transmits the VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect unit
through the VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals are all VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect
unit processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit. If
the VC-4 signals include any VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect unit
grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect unit. The lower order crossconnect unit processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services back to the
higher order cross-connect unit. The higher order cross-connect unit processes the services and
then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
E1 Signal Processing Unit

The E1 signal processing unit provides access to, codes/decodes, and maps/demaps E1 electrical
signals, and also processes overheads. The signal processing flow on this unit is the same as the
signal processing flow on the SP3S/SP3D. For details, see 3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal
Flow of the SP3S/SP3D.
STM-1 Signal Processing Unit

The STM-1 signal processing unit provides access to STM-1 optical signals, extracts the clock
signal, restores the data, scrambles/descrambles the data, processes overheads, and processes
pointers. The signal processing flow on the STM-1 signal processing unit is the same as the
signal processing flow on the SL1D. For details, see 3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal
Flow of the SL1D.
Clock Unit
The clock unit selects the external clock source or the service clock source from a service
interface according to the clock priority. Through the phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides
the system clock and the frame headers of service signals and overhead signals to other units on
the system control and communication board and the other boards.
Auxiliary Interface Unit

The auxiliary interface unit processes the input and output of the Orderwire interface,
asynchronous data interface, synchronous data interface, and external alarm interface.
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by
the chips of the other units on the system control and communication board.
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power required
by the other boards in the IDU.
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power required by
the fan.
3.3.4 Front Panel

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-13
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Front Panel Diagram
1
LOS1
LOS2
STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
CSTA
Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CSTA
STM-1
CF RCV RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD
F1/S1
E1
1~16
ALMI/ALMO PHONE
1. Indicators
2. Buttons
4. STM-1 optical interfaces
5. E1 (1-16) interface
3. Auxiliary interfaces and

management interfaces
Indicators
Table 3-2 Description of the indicators on the CSTA
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working normally.
On (red)
The board hardware is faulty.
Off
The board is not working.
The board is not created.
There is no power supplied to the

board.
PROG
On for 100 ms (green) and

off for 100 ms repeatedly
When the board is being powered on or

being reset, the software is being loaded
to the flash memory.


being reset, the board software is in
BIOS boot state.
On (green)
The upper layer software is being

initialized.
On for 100 ms (red) and off

for 100 ms repeatedly

being reset, the BOOTROM self-check
fails.
On (red)
When the board is being powered or

being reset, the memory self-check fails
or loading upper layer software fails.
When the board is running, the logic file
or upper layer software is lost.
The pluggable storage card is faulty.
3-14

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Indicator
SYNC
SRV
LOS1
LOS2
3 Boards
State
Meaning
Off
The software is running normally.
On (green)
The clock is normal.
On (red)
The clock source is lost or is switched.
On (green)
The system is working normally.
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs on the

board.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm occurs in the

system.
Off
There is no power supplied to the system.
On (red)
The first optical interface on the line

reports the R_LOS alarm.
Off
The first optical interface on the line does

not report the R_LOS alarm.
On (red)
The second optical interface on the line

Off

does not report the R_LOS alarm.

Table 3-3 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces
Interface
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Description
NMS/COM
NM interface/NM serial interface
EXT
NE cascade interface
CLK/TOD
External clock/time interface (2048 kbit/s or

2048 kHz)/The wayside E1 interface
Connector Type
RJ-45
F1/S1
Synchronous/Asynchronous data interface
ALMI/ALMO
Alarm input/output interface
PHONE
Orderwire interface
CF RCV
CF configuration reset button
RST
Board warm reset button

3-15
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
NOTE
The external clock interface and wayside E1 interface are combined into one interface. This interface can
transparently transmit the DCC byte, orderwire overhead byte, and synchronous/asynchronous data service
overhead byte. One interface, however, can implement only one of the three functions: external clock
interface, wayside E1 service, and transparent transmission of the overhead byte.
The 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface can transparently transmit the orderwire byte. One interface,
however, can implement only one of the two functions: 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface and transparent
transmission of the orderwire byte.
The auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces use RJ-45 connectors. The pin assignments
of the interfaces, however, are different. Figure 3-7 shows the front view of the RJ-45 connector.
Figure 3-7 Front view of the RJ-45 connector
87654321
Table 3-4 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface

Interface
NMS/COM
Pin
Signal
Transmitting data (+)
Transmitting data (-)
Receiving data (+)
Grounding end of the NM serial

interface
Receive end of the NM serial interface
Receiving data (-)
Not defined
Transmit end of the NM serial

interface
Table 3-5 Pin assignment of the EXT interface

Interface
EXT
3-16
Pin
Signal
Receiving data (+)

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Interface
Pin
Signal
Receiving data (-)
4, 5, 7, 8
Not defined
NOTE
The EXT interface supports the MDI/MDI-X auto-negotiation. That is, the EXT interface can transmit data
through pins 3 and 6 and can receive data through pins 1 and 2.
The RJ-45 connector has two indicators. For the meanings of the states of the indicators, see
Table 3-6.
Table 3-6 Description of the two indicators of the RJ-45 connector
Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On
The link is normal.
Off
The link fails.
On or blinking
The interface is transmitting or

receiving data.
Off
The interface is not transmitting or

receiving data.
ACT (yellow)
NOTE
The NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface are equivalent to two ports on a hub. Thus, ensure that no
external Ethernet link is configured between the two interfaces during the networking process. Otherwise,
an Ethernet loop is formed. As a result, a network storm is generated, wherein repeated resets are performed
on the NEs.
Figure 3-8 shows the two common incorrect connections.
MAJ
LOS1
LOS2
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
CSTA
STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
Figure 3-8 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface
CF RCV RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD
F1/S1
ALMI/ALMO PHONE
E1
1~16
CLK/TOD
F1/S1
ALMI/ALMO PHONE
E1
1~16
MAJ
LOS1
LOS2
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
CSTA
STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
LAN
CF RCV RST
NMS/COM
EXT
The clock interface (CLK) and the high-precision time interface (TOD) use different pins of the
same RJ-4 connector. The pin assignment information of the CLK/TOD interface is provided
in Table 3-7.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-17
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
NOTE
Pins 3 and 6-8 are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588 protocol) and are not
used in this product version.
Table 3-7 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface

Pin
Working Mode
Externa
l Clock
External Time
Output
External
Time Input
External Time
Output
(1 PPS +
Time
Informatio
n)
(1 PPS + Time
Information)
(DCLS)
(DCLS)
CLK
receivin
g (-)
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
CLK
receivin
g (+)
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not
defined
1 PPS signal
input (-)
1 PPS signal
output (-)
DCLS time
signal input (-)
DCLS time
signal output (-)
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
CLK
transmit
ting (-)
Grounding
end
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
CLK
transmit
ting (+)
Grounding
end
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
Not
defined
1 PPS signal
input (+)
1 PPS signal
output (+)
DCLS time
signal input (+)
DCLS time
signal output (+)
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
Time
information
input (-)
Time
information
output (-)
Not defined
Not defined
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422 level)
Time
information
input (+)
Time
information
output (+)
Not defined
Not defined
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422 level)
3-18
External
Time Input
Not
defined
Not
defined

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
The pin assignment information of the F1/S1 interface is provided in Table 3-8.
Table 3-8 Pin assignment of the F1/S1 interface
Interface
Pin
Signal
F1/S1
Transmitting asynchronous data signals
Grounding end
Receiving asynchronous data signals
Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP)
Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING)
Grounding end
Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP)
Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)
The pin assignment information of the ALMI/ALMO interface is provided in Table 3-9.
Table 3-9 Pin assignment of the ALMI/ALMO interface
Interface
Pin
Signal
ALMI/
ALMO
The first external alarm input signal
Grounding end for the first alarm input signal
The second external alarm input signal
The third external alarm input signal
Grounding end for the third alarm input signal
Grounding end for the second alarm input signal
The first external alarm output signal (+)
The first external alarm output signal (-)
The pin assignment information of the PHONE interface is provided in Table 3-10.
Table 3-10 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface
Interface
Pin
Signal
PHONE
Not defined
2
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-19
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Interface
Pin
Signal
3
4
RING
TIP
Not defined
7
8
Service Interfaces
Table 3-11 Description of the service interfaces on the CSTA
Interface
Description
TX1
Transmit port of the first

STM-1 optical interface
RX1
Receive port of the first

TX2
Transmit port of the second

RX2
Receive port of the second

E1 (1-16)
The first to sixteenth E1

signals
Connector Type
LC (the SFP optical module)
Anea 96
The E1 interface uses the Anea 96 socket. The pin assignment information of the Anea 96
interface is provided in Figure 3-9 and Table 3-12.
Figure 3-9 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface
POS.1
POS.96
3-20

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Table 3-12 Pin assignment of the Anea 96 interface

Pin
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Signal
Pin
Signal
The first received E1

differential signal (+)
25
The first transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)

differential signal (-)
26

signal (-)
The second received E1

27
The second transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)

28

signal (-)
The third received E1

29
The third transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)

30

signal (-)
The fourth received E1

31
The fourth transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)

32

signal (-)
The fifth received E1

33
The fifth transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)
10

34

signal (-)
11
The sixth received E1

35
The sixth transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)
12

36

signal (-)
13
The seventh received E1

37
The seventh transmitted E1

14

38

15
The eighth received E1

39
The eighth transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)
16

40

signal (-)
17
The ninth received E1

41
The ninth transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)
18

42

signal (-)

3-21
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
19
The tenth received E1

43
The tenth transmitted E1 differential

signal (+)
20

44

signal (-)
21
The eleventh received E1

45
The eleventh transmitted E1

22

46

23
The twelfth received E1

47
The twelfth transmitted E1

24

48

49
The thirteenth received E1

73
The thirteenth transmitted E1

50

74

51
The fourteenth received E1

75
The fourteenth transmitted E1

52

76

53
The fifteenth received E1

77
The fifteenth transmitted E1

54

78

55
The sixteenth received E1

79
The sixteenth transmitted E1

56

80


The CF card stores the following information:
3-22
All the data of the NE, including the NE ID, NE IP address, and service data
NE software and all the board software programs
All the FPGA files
License file for microwave link capability

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Figure 3-10 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card
1 2 3 4
ON DIP
1. DIP switches
2. CF card
Table 3-13 Setting the DIP switches

Function
Setting the DIP Switchesa
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Normal
operating state
when the
watchdog is
enabled.
Reserved.
Memory selfcheck state.
Commissioning
state.
Operating state
when the
watchdog is
disabled and the
full memory
check is
performed.

3-23
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Function
3-24
BIOS holdover
state.
BIOS exhibition
state.
Reserved (by
default,
operating state
when the
watchdog is
started).
Reserved (by
default,
operating state
when the
watchdog is
started).
To recover the
data of the CF
card.
To erase the data

in the system
parameter area.
To erase the
databases.
To erase the NE
software,
including the
patches.
To erase the
databases and
NE software
(including the
patches).
To format the
file system, that
is, to erase all
the data in the
file system.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Function

1
To format the
file system so
that all the data
is erased (file
system +
extended BIOS
+ system
parameter area).
NOTE
a: When a DIP switch is turned to the numeral side, it represents the binary digit 1. When a DIP switch is
turned to the letter side, it represents the binary digit 0.
3.3.6 Valid Slots

The CSTA is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of two ordinary
slots. The CSTA is mapped into four logical boards and the corresponding logical slots are also
allocated for the logical boards on the NMS so that the NMS can manage each functional unit
on the CSTA.
Figure 3-11 Slot for the CSTA in the IDU chassis
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 1 (CSTA)
According to the functional units, the CSTA is mapped into the logical system control and
communication board (CSTA), logical auxiliary and management board (AUX), and logical
service boards (SL1D and SP3S) on the NMS.
Figure 3-12 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSTA
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 1 (CSTA)
Slot 10 (AUX)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 8 (SL1D)
Slot 9 (SP3S)

The E1 interface impedance of the CSTA can be identified by the board feature code of the bar
code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-25
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Table 3-14 Board feature code of the CSTA

Board Feature Code
Interface Impedance (Ohm)
120
75

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSTA.
Related References
A.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter Setting
A.7.1 Parameter Description: Clock Source Priority Table
A.7.9 Parameter Description: Clock Synchronization Status
A.13.1 Parameter Description: Orderwire_General
A.13.3 Parameter Description: Orderwire_F1 Data Port
A.13.4 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Broadcast Data Port
A.13.5 Parameter Description: Environment Monitoring Interface

This topic describes the board specifications, including cross-connection performance, SDH
optical interface performance, E1 interface performance, clock performance, auxiliary interface
performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Cross-Connection Performance
Supports full time division cross-connections at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level, which are
equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s.
STM-1 Optical Interface Performance

The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957/G.825. The
following table provides the primary performance.
Table 3-15 STM-1 optical interface performance
3-26
Item
Performance
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s)
155520
Classification code
Ie-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Fiber type
Multi-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Item
Performance
Transmission distance
(km)
15
40
80
Operating wavelength
(nm)
1270 to 1380
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
Mean launched power

(dBm)
-19 to -14
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-30
-28
-34
-34
Minimum overload (dBm)
-14
-8
-10
-10
Minimum extinction ratio

(dB)
10
8.2
10
10
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP
modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
E1 Interface Performance
Table 3-16 E1 interface performance
Item
Performance
2048
Code pattern
HDB3
Wire pair in each

transmission direction
One coaxial wire pair
One symmetrical wire pair
Impedance (ohm)
75
120
Orderwire Interface Performance

Table 3-17 Orderwire interface performance
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Item
Performance
Transmission path
Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huaweidefined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Orderwire type
Addressing call
Wire pair in each


3-27
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Item
Performance
Impedance (ohm)
600
NOTE
The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when an OptiX RTN
equipment calls the number of 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire
phones in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is
established.
Synchronous Data Interface Performance

Table 3-18 Synchronous data interface performance
Item
Performance
Transmission path
Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined

byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
64
Interface type
Codirectional
Interface characteristics
Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.
Asynchronous Data Interface

Table 3-19 Asynchronous data interface performance
Item
Performance
Transmission path
Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or the

Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
19.2
Meets the RS-232 standard.
Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance

The clock timing and synchronization performance meets the relevant standards specified in the
ITU-T Recommendations.
3-28

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Table 3-20 Clock timing and synchronization performance

Item
Performance
External synchronization
source
2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 9), or 2048 kHz

(compliant with ITU-T G.703 13)
Frequency accuracy
Compliant with ITU-T G.813
Pull-in, hold-in, and pull-out

ranges
Noise generation
Noise tolerance
Noise transfer
Transient response and
holdover performance
Wayside Service Interface Performance

Table 3-21 Wayside service interface performance
Item
Performance
Transmission path
Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of the

microwave frame.
2048
Impedance (ohm)
120
Mechanical Behavior
Table 3-22 Mechanical behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions
19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 388.40 mm

(width)
Weight
1.08 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 13.6W
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-29
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
3.4 CSHA/CSHB/CSHC
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is the integrated Hybrid system control and communication,
switching, and clock board. The differences between the CSHA, CSHB, and CSHC are with
regard to the types and number of service interfaces.
The functional version of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is SLA1.
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides the 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division crossconnection, system control and communication, and clock processing functions. In addition, the
CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides FE/GE interfaces, PDH/SDH interfaces, auxiliary interfaces, and
management interfaces.
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC comprises the system control and communication unit, packet
switching unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, service interface unit, and auxiliary interface unit.
3.4.4 Front Panel
3.4.6 Valid Slots
The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of
two ordinary slots. The functional units on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC are mapped into the logical
boards and the corresponding logical slots are also allocated for the logical boards on the NMS
so that the NMS can manage each functional units on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.
The E1 interface impedance of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC can be identified by the board feature
code of the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board
name.
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.
This topic describes the board specifications, including the packet switching performance, crossconnection performance, Ethernet interface performance, SDH optical interface performance,
E1 interface performance, clock performance, auxiliary interface performance, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.

The functional version of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is SLA1.

The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides the 4.2 Gbit/s packet switching, full time division crossconnection, system control and communication, and clock processing functions. In addition, the
3-30

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
CSHA/CSHB/CSHC provides FE/GE interfaces, PDH/SDH interfaces, auxiliary interfaces, and

management interfaces.
Packet Switching
l
Supports the E-Line and E-LAN services.
Supports the addition, deletion, and switching of IEEE 802.1q/p-compliant VLAN tags and
forwards packets based on the VLAN tags.
Supports the MAC address learning function.
Supports the MSTP protocol that adopts only the common and internal spanning tree
(CIST).
Supports the IGMP Snooping protocol.
Supports the QoS function.
Supports the ITU-T G.8032-compliant ERPS Ethernet ring protection.
Supports the disabling of the Ethernet interface connecting to the user equipment when a
fault occurs on the transmission network.
Supports two aggregation modes (namely, manual aggregation and static aggregation) and
two load sharing types (namely, sharing and non-sharing). The load sharing algorithm is
based on the hash algorithm of the MAC address or the IP address.
Supports the Ethernet OAM functions that are compliant with IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE
802.3ah.
Supports the synchronous Ethernet that is compliant with ITU-T G.8261 and ITU-T G.
8262.
Time Division Cross-Connection

l
Grooms service signals between boards.
Supports full time division cross-connections at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level, which
are equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s.
System Control and Communication

l
Provides the system control and communication function to manage the other boards and
the ODUs by using the NE software.
Controls the other boards by using the board software that runs on the system control and
communication unit.
Monitors and collects performance events and alarms of all the boards.
Realizes the communication with the NMS and other NEs. The CSHC can process a
maximum of seven DCCs. The CSHA and CSHB can provide up to 5 DCC channels.
Cross-connects and processes overheads.
Clock Processing
l
Traces the clock source and provides the system clock and the frame headers of service
signals and overhead signals for the other boards.
Supports one input and one output of the external clock.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-31
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
l
Supports the selection of the external clock source or the service clock source to be the
system clock source. The service clock source can be the SDH line clock, microwave
interface line clock, Ethernet interface line clock, or tributary clock.
Supports clock protection based on the clock priority, synchronization status message
(SSM) protocol, or extended SSM protocol.
Supports the detection of the state of the system clock source and the phase-locked loop.
Supports the trace, holdover, and free-run modes.
TDM Service Processing Interfaces

l
The CSHA provides sixteen 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 data interfaces.
The CSHB provides thirty-two 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 data interfaces.
The CSHC supports sixteen 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 data interfaces and two STM-1 optical
interfaces. The two STM-1 optical interfaces use the SFP optical modules.
Ethernet Service Interfaces

l
The CSHA provides two FE electrical interfaces and two GE electrical interfaces. The two
GE electrical interfaces can also transmit FE electrical signals.
The CSHB provides two FE electrical interfaces and two GE electrical interfaces. The two
GE electrical interfaces can also transmit FE electrical signals.
The CSHC provides two FE electrical interfaces and two GE optical interfaces. The two
GE optical interfaces use the SFP optical modules.
The Ethernet interfaces support the auto-negotiation and self-loop diagnosis functions.
Supports the setting and query of the tag attributes of the Ethernet interfaces. The following
three TAG attributes are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid. The tag attributes of an
Ethernet interface can be set only when the network attributes of the Ethernet interface is
set to UNI.
Supports the IEEE 802.3x-compliant flow control function.

l
Provides one Ethernet NM interface.
Provides one NM serial interface.
Provides one NE cascade interface.
Provides one Orderwire interface.
Provides one asynchronous data interface.
Provides one synchronous data interface.
Provides one three-input and one-output external alarm interface.
3-32
Performs the 1+1 protection switching.
Performs the linear MSP switching.
Performs the SNCP switching.
Performs the clock protection switching.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards

l
setting the alarm thresholds.
Supports RMON performance events.

NOTE
For details on the alarm management and performance event management functions, see the OptiX RTN
l
Supports the inloop at the PHY layer over Ethernet interfaces.
Supports the inloop at the MAC layer over Ethernet interfaces.
Supports the outloop on VC-4 paths.
Supports the board reset.
Detects the board temperature, alarm inputs/outputs, and overvoltage/undervoltage of the

-48 V power supply.
Checks the indicators on all the boards.
Supports the hot swapping and mis-insertion prevention functions.
Supports the local and remote loading of the FPGA and supports the misloading prevention
function.
Supports the insertion and removal of the CF card and backs up the configuration data. The
backup configuration data can be used for quick service restoration in the case of an onsite board replacement.

The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC comprises the system control and communication unit, packet
switching unit, cross-connect unit, clock unit, service interface unit, and auxiliary interface unit.
NOTE
This topic considers the CSHC as an example to describe the working principle of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-33
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards

Figure 3-13 Functional block diagram
Backplane
FE signal
GE signal
E1 signal
FE signal
access unit
GE signal
access unit
STM-1
signal
processing
unit
E1 signal
processing
unit
FE signal
GE signal
Packet
switching unit
GE bus
Ethernet service
board
VC-4
signal
VC-4
signal
Cross-connect
unit
VC-4 signal
TDM service board
Control bus
NM interface
NM serial interface
NE cascade
interface
External alarm
interface
Orderwire
interface
Clock
interface
Auxiliary interface
unit
Asynchronous data
interface
Synchronous data
interface
System control
and
communication
unit
Clock unit
Clock signal
received from
the service unit
on the board
Clock signal received

from other boards
Clock signal provided
to the other boards
Clock signal
provided to
the other units
on the board
External clock signal

Power supplied to
the other units on
the board
Power
supply
unit
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V power supplied
to other boards
+12 V power supplied
to the fans
System Control and Communication Unit

The system control and communication unit comprises the CPU unit and logic control unit. The
system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
3-34
Controls and manages the other units on the board, and also collects alarms and performance
Controls and manages the other boards in the IDU, and also collects alarms and performance
Controls and manages the ODU by using the ODU control signal transmitted through the
control bus in the backplane and the SMODEM in the IF board.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
The CPU unit drives the packet switching unit to groom Ethernet service packets, through
the control bus.
The CPU unit processes the Ethernet protocol packets from the packet switching unit,
through the control bus.
Processes the network management messages in the DCCs through the logic control unit.
The CPU unit communicates with the NMS through the Ethernet NM interface and NE
cascade interface.
The CPU unit reads the information from the CF card through the bus and loads the
software.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and loads
the FPGA software.
The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads of the auxiliary interface unit, the CPU
unit, and other boards, thus realizing the following functions:
Adds or drops the DCC information processed by the CPU unit.
Adds or drops the orderwire and asynchronous data services.
Realizes the interchange of the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between
different lines.
Packet Switching Unit

The main functional unit of the packet switching unit is the Layer 2 switching unit. The Layer
2 switching unit performs the operations related to the Layer 2 switching and Layer 2 protocol.
l
After receiving Ethernet services from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or from
other Ethernet boards, the packet switching unit grooms the Ethernet services based on the
configurations that are delivered by the system control and communication unit.
After receiving protocol packets from the Ethernet interface unit on the board or from other
Ethernet boards, the packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the system
control and communication unit for processing. The system control and communication
unit processes the protocol packets and then sends the protocol packets back to the packet
switching unit. The packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the Ethernet
interface unit on the board or to the other Ethernet boards.
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system through the higher order crossconnect unit and the lower order cross-connect unit. Figure 3-14 shows the functional block
diagram of the cross-connect unit.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-35
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Figure 3-14 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit

Sink TDM
service unit
Source TDM
service unit
HOXC
LOXC
The source TDM service unit transmits the VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect unit
through the VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals are all VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect
unit processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit. If
the VC-4 signals include any VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect unit
grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect unit. The lower order crossconnect unit processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services back to the
higher order cross-connect unit. The higher order cross-connect unit processes the services and
then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
FE Signal Access Unit

The FE signal access unit provides access to two FE signals and works with the Layer 2 switching
unit to realize the Layer 2 switching function.
l
In the receive direction, after performing restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel

conversion for the FE signals, the FE signal access unit extracts framed FE signals by
delimiting the frames and adding the preambles and performs the CRC check and Ethernet
performance statistics.
In the transmit direction, after delimiting the frames, adding the preambles, calculating the
CRC check codes, and performing the Ethernet performance statistics, the FE signal access
unit performs the parallel/serial conversion, encodes the FE signals, and then transmits the
FE signals to the FE interface.
GE Signal Access Unit

The GE signal access unit provides access to two GE optical signals or two GE electrical signals
and works with the Layer 2 switching unit to realize the Layer 2 switching function.
l
3-36
In the receive direction, after performing the O/E conversion, restructuring, decoding, and
serial/parallel conversion for the GE optical signals or after performing restructuring,
decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for the GE electrical signals, the GE signal access
unit extracts framed GE signals by delimiting the frames and adding the preambles and
performs the CRC check and Ethernet performance statistics.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
In the transmit direction, after delimiting the frames, adding the preambles, calculating the
CRC check codes, and performing the Ethernet performance statistics, the GE signal access
unit performs the parallel/serial conversion and encoding and then transmits the GE signals
to the GE interface after performing O/E conversion.
E1 Signal Processing Unit

The E1 signal processing unit provides access to, codes/decodes, and maps/demaps E1 electrical
signals, and also processes overheads. The signal processing flow on this unit is the same as the
signal processing flow on the SP3S/SP3D. For details, see 3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal
Flow of the SP3S/SP3D.
STM-1 Signal Processing Unit

The STM-1 signal processing unit provides access to STM-1 optical signals, extracts the clock
signal, restores the data, scrambles/descrambles the data, processes overheads, and processes
pointers. The signal processing flow on the STM-1 signal processing unit is the same as the
signal processing flow on the SL1D. For details, see 3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal
Flow of the SL1D.
Clock Unit
The clock unit selects the external clock source or the service clock source from a service
interface according to the clock priority. Through the phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides
the system clock and the frame headers of service signals and overhead signals to other units on
the system control and communication board and the other boards.
Auxiliary Interface Unit

The auxiliary interface unit processes the input and output of the Orderwire interface,
asynchronous data interface, synchronous data interface, and external alarm interface.
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the power supply required by
the chips of the other units on the system control and communication board.
l
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +3.3 V power required
by the other boards in the IDU.
l
Combines and then converts the two -48 V power inputs into the +12 V power required by
the fan.
3.4.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
SRV
SYNC
CSHA
STAT
PROG
Figure 3-15 Front panel of the CSHA

CF RCV RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD
F1/S1
ALMI/ALMO PHONE
FE1
FE2
GE1
GE2

E1
1~16
3-37
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
1. Indicators
2. Buttons

4. FE service interfaces
5. GE service interfaces
SRV
SYNC
CSHB
STAT
PROG
Figure 3-16 Front panel of the CSHB
CF RCV RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD
F1/S1
ALMI/ALMO PHONE
FE1
FE2
GE1
GE2
E1
17~32
E1
1~16
1. Indicators
2. Buttons

1 2 1 2
STAT
PROG
SYNC
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2
LOS1
LOS2
CSHC
Figure 3-17 Front panel of the CSHC
E1
E1(1~16)
1~16
GE1 GE2 STM-1
CF RCV
RST RSTNMS/COM
CF RCV
NMS/COM
EXT
NE
CLK/TIME
CLK/TOD
F1/S1
ALMI/ALMO PHONE
FE1
FE2
STM-1
STM-1
GEETH
1. Indicators
2. Buttons

6. STM-1 optical interfaces
Indicators
Table 3-23 Description of the indicators on the CSHA/CSHB
3-38
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Indicator
PROG
3 Boards
State
Meaning
Off

board.




BIOS boot state.
On (green)

initialized.


fails.
On (red)

SYNC
SRV
Off
On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
On (red)

board.
On (yellow)

system.
Off
Table 3-24 Description of the indicators on the CSHC
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)

3-39
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Indicator
PROG
State
Meaning
Off

board.




BIOS boot state.
On (green)

initialized.


fails.
On (red)

SYNC
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
3-40
Off
On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
On (red)

board.
On (yellow)

system.
Off
On (green)
The port connection is normal.
Off
The port connection is interrupted.
On or blinking (yellow)
The data is being transmitted or received.
Off
No data is being transmitted or received.
On (green)
Off

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
ACT2
Off
On (red)

Off

On (red)

Off

LOS1
LOS2
Description of the Auxiliary Interfaces and Management Interfaces

Table 3-25 Description of the auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces
Interface
Description
NMS/COM
NM interface/NM serial interface
EXT
NE cascade interface
CLK/TOD
External clock/time interface (2048 kbit/s or

2048 kHz)/The wayside E1 interface
Connector Type
RJ-45
F1/S1
Synchronous/Asynchronous data interface
ALMI/ALMO
Alarm input/output interface
PHONE
Orderwire interface
CF RCV
CF configuration reset button
RST
Board warm reset button
NOTE
The external clock interface and wayside E1 interface are combined into one interface. This interface can
transparently transmit the DCC byte, orderwire overhead byte, and synchronous/asynchronous data service
overhead byte. One interface, however, can implement only one of the three functions: external clock
interface, wayside E1 service, and transparent transmission of the overhead byte.
The 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface can transparently transmit the orderwire byte. One interface,
however, can implement only one of the two functions: 64 kbit/s synchronous data interface and transparent
transmission of the orderwire byte.
The auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces use RJ-45 connectors. The pin assignments
of the interfaces, however, are different. Figure 3-18 shows the front view of the RJ-45
connector.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-41
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
87654321
Table 3-26 Pin assignment of the NMS/COM interface

Interface
NMS/COM
Pin
Signal
Receiving data (+)
Grounding end of the NM serial

interface
Receive end of the NM serial interface
Receiving data (-)
Not defined
Transmit end of the NM serial

interface
Table 3-27 Pin assignment of the EXT interface

Interface
EXT
Pin
Signal
Receiving data (+)
Receiving data (-)
4, 5, 7, 8
Not defined
NOTE
The EXT interface supports the MDI/MDI-X auto-negotiation. That is, the EXT interface can transmit data
through pins 3 and 6 and can receive data through pins 1 and 2.
The RJ-45 connector has two indicators. For the meanings of the states of the indicators, see
Table 3-28.
3-42

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards

Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On
The link is normal.
Off
The link fails.
On or blinking

receiving data.
Off

receiving data.
ACT (yellow)
NOTE
The NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface are equivalent to two ports on a hub. Thus, ensure that no
external Ethernet link is configured between the two interfaces during the networking process. Otherwise,
an Ethernet loop is formed. As a result, a network storm is generated, wherein repeated resets are performed
on the NEs.
Figure 3-19 shows the two common incorrect connections.
SRV
SYNC
CSHA
STAT
PROG
Figure 3-19 Incorrect connections between the NMS/COM interface and the EXT interface
CF RCV RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD
F1/S1
ALMI/ALMO PHONE
FE1
FE2
GE1
GE2
E1
1~16
SYNC
SRV
CSHA
STAT
PROG
LAN
CF RCV RST
NMS/COM
EXT
CLK/TOD
F1/S1
ALMI/ALMO PHONE
FE1
FE2
GE1
GE2
E1
1~16
The clock interface (CLK) and the high-precision time interface (TOD) use different pins of the
same RJ-4 connector. The pin assignment information of the CLK/TOD interface is provided
in Table 3-29.
NOTE
Pins 3 and 6-8 are reserved for running the high-precision time protocol (IEEE 1588 protocol) and are not
used in this product version.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-43
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Table 3-29 Pin assignment of the CLK/TOD interface

Pin
Working Mode
Externa
l Clock
External
Time Input
External Time
Output
External
Time Input
External Time
Output
(1 PPS +
Time
Informatio
n)
(1 PPS + Time
Information)
(DCLS)
(DCLS)
CLK
receivin
g (-)
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
CLK
receivin
g (+)
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not defined
Not
defined
1 PPS signal
input (-)
1 PPS signal
output (-)
DCLS time
signal input (-)
DCLS time
signal output (-)
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
CLK
transmit
ting (-)
Grounding
end
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
CLK
transmit
ting (+)
Grounding
end
Grounding end
Grounding end
Grounding end
Not
defined
1 PPS signal
input (+)
1 PPS signal
output (+)
DCLS time
signal input (+)
DCLS time
signal output (+)
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
(RS-422 level)
Time
information
input (-)
Time
information
output (-)
Not defined
Not defined
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422 level)
Time
information
input (+)
Time
information
output (+)
Not defined
Not defined
(RS-422
level)
(RS-422 level)
Not
defined
Not
defined
The pin assignment information of the F1/S1 interface is provided in Table 3-30.
3-44

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Table 3-30 Pin assignment of the F1/S1 interface

Interface
Pin
Signal
F1/S1
Transmitting asynchronous data signals
Grounding end
Receiving asynchronous data signals
Transmitting synchronous data signals (TIP)
Transmitting synchronous data signals (RING)
Grounding end
Receiving synchronous data signals (TIP)
Receiving synchronous data signals (RING)
The pin assignment information of the ALMI/ALMO interface is provided in Table 3-31.
Table 3-31 Pin assignment of the ALMI/ALMO interface
Interface
Pin
Signal
ALMI/
ALMO
The first external alarm input signal
Grounding end for the first alarm input signal
The second external alarm input signal
The third external alarm input signal
Grounding end for the third alarm input signal
Grounding end for the second alarm input signal
The first external alarm output signal (+)
The first external alarm output signal (-)
The pin assignment information of the PHONE interface is provided in Table 3-32.
Table 3-32 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface
Interface
Pin
Signal
PHONE
Not defined
2
3
4
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
RING

3-45
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Interface
Pin
Signal
TIP
Not defined
7
8
Service Interfaces
Table 3-33 Description of the service interfaces on the CSHA/CSHB
Interface
Description
FE1
FE interface
Connector Type
FE2
GE1
RJ-45
GE electrical interface
GE2
E1 (1-16)
The first to sixteenth E1 signal

interfaces
E1 (17-32)
The seventeenth to thirty-second

E1 signal interfaces a
Anea 96
NOTE
a. Only the CSHB provides 32 E1 signal interfaces. The CSHA provides only 16 E1 signal interfaces.
Table 3-34 Description of the service interfaces on the CSHC

Interface
Description
FE1
FE interface
Connector Type
RJ-45
FE2
GE1
GE optical interface
TX1
Transmit port of the first STM-1

optical interface
RX1
Receive port of the first STM-1

optical interface
TX2
Transmit port of the second STM-1

optical interface
GE2
3-46

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Interface
Description
Connector Type
RX2
Receive port of the second STM-1

optical interface
E1 (1-16)
The first to sixteenth E1 signals
Anea 96
The FE interfaces and GE electrical interfaces support the MDI, MDI-X, and auto-negotiation
modes. For the pin assignment information, see Table 3-35 and Table 3-36.
Table 3-35 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI mode
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
TX+
BIDA+
Bidirectional data wire A

(+)
TX-
BIDA-

(-)
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+
Bidirectional data wire B

(+)
Reserved
BIDC+
Bidirectional data wire C

(+)
Reserved
BIDC-

(-)
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-

(-)
Reserved
BIDD+
Bidirectional data wire D

(+)
Reserved
BIDD-

(-)
Table 3-36 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI-X mode

Pin
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+

(+)
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-

(-)

3-47
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
TX+
BIDA+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD-

(-)
TX-
BIDA-

(-)
Reserved
BIDC+

(+)
Reserved
BIDC-

(-)
The RJ-45 connector has two indicators. The meanings of the two indicators are the same as the
meanings of the indicators on the NMS/COM interface (RJ-45 connector).
The E1 interface uses the Anea 96 socket. The pin assignment information of the Anea 96
interface is provided in Figure 3-20 and Table 3-37.
POS.1
POS.96

Pin
3-48
Signal
Pin
Signal

25

signal (+)

26

signal (-)

27

signal (+)

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Pin
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
Signal
Pin
Signal

28

signal (-)

29

signal (+)

30

signal (-)

31

signal (+)

32

signal (-)

33

signal (+)
10

34

signal (-)
11

35

signal (+)
12

36

signal (-)
13

37

14

38

15

39

signal (+)
16

40

signal (-)
17

41

signal (+)
18

42

signal (-)
19

43

signal (+)
20

44

signal (-)
21

45

22

46


3-49
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
23

47

24

48

49

73

50

74

51

75

52

76

53

77

54

78

55

79

56

80


The CF card stores the following information:
3-50
All the data of the NE, including the NE ID, NE IP address, and service data
NE software and all the board software programs
All the FPGA files
License file for microwave link capability

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Figure 3-21 Positions of the DIP switches and CF card
1 2 3 4
ON DIP
1. DIP switches
2. CF card
Table 3-38 Setting the DIP switches

Function
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Normal
operating state
when the
watchdog is
enabled.
Reserved.
Memory selfcheck state.
Commissioning
state.
Operating state
when the
watchdog is
disabled and the
full memory
check is
performed.

3-51
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Function
3-52
BIOS holdover
state.
BIOS exhibition
state.
Reserved (by
default,
operating state
when the
watchdog is
started).
Reserved (by
default,
operating state
when the
watchdog is
started).
To recover the
data of the CF
card.
To erase the data

in the system
parameter area.
To erase the
databases.
To erase the NE
software,
including the
patches.
To erase the
databases and
NE software
(including the
patches).
To format the
file system, that
is, to erase all
the data in the
file system.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Function

1
To format the
file system so
that all the data
is erased (file
system +
extended BIOS
+ system
parameter area).
NOTE
a: When a DIP switch is turned to the numeral side, it represents the binary digit 1. When a DIP switch is
turned to the letter side, it represents the binary digit 0.
3.4.6 Valid Slots

The CSHA/CSHB/CSHC is inserted in slot 1 of the IDU chassis. Slot 1 occupies the space of
two ordinary slots. The functional units on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC are mapped into the logical
boards and the corresponding logical slots are also allocated for the logical boards on the NMS
so that the NMS can manage each functional units on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.
Figure 3-22 Slot for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 1 (CSHA/CSHB/CSHC)
Different logical boards are allocated for the CSHA, CSHB, and CSHC on the NMS.
Figure 3-23 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHA
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 1 ( CSHA )
Slot 10 ( AUX )
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 7 (EM4T)
Slot 9 (SP3S)
Figure 3-24 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHB
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 1 (CSHB )
Slot 10 ( AUX )

Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 7 (EM4T)
Slot 9 (SP3D)
3-53
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Figure 3-25 Logical slots for the logical boards of the CSHC
Slot 3 (EXT)
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN) Slot 1 ( CSHC ) Slot 10 ( AUX )
Slot 4 (EXT)
Slot 7 (EM4F)
Slot 8 (SL1D)
Slot 9 (SP3S)

The E1 interface impedance of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC can be identified by the board feature
name.
Table 3-39 Board feature code of the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC
Board Feature Code
120
75

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC.
Related References

This topic describes the board specifications, including the packet switching performance, crossconnection performance, Ethernet interface performance, SDH optical interface performance,
E1 interface performance, clock performance, auxiliary interface performance, board
mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Packet Switching
Supports the 4.2Gbit/s packet switching function.
3-54

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Cross-Connection Performance
Supports full time division cross-connections at the VC-12, VC-3, or VC-4 level, which are
equivalent to 8x8 VC-4s.
Ethernet Interface Performance

The Ethernet interface performance meets the relevant standards specified in IEEE 802.3. The
following three tables provide the performance indexes of the GE optical interfaces, GE electrical
interfaces, and FE electrical interfaces, respectively.
Table 3-40 Performance of the GE optical interface
Item
Performance
1000
Classification code
1000Base-SX
1000Base-LX
Fiber type
Multiple-mode optical
fiber
Single-mode optical
fiber
Transmission distance (km)
0.5
10
Operating wavelength (nm)
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
Mean launched power (dBm)
-9.5 to 0
-9 to -3
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm)
-17
-19
-3
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules for providing GE optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP
modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Table 3-41 GE electric interface performance

Item
Performance
Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s)
10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)
Code pattern
Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T)

MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX)
4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)
Interface type
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
RJ-45

3-55
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Table 3-42 FE electric interface performance

Item
Performance
10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
Code pattern

Interface type
RJ-45

Item
Performance
155520
Classification code
Ie-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Fiber type
Multi-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
(km)
15
40
80
(nm)
1270 to 1380
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
Mean launched power

(dBm)
-19 to -14
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-30
-28
-34
-34
-14
-8
-10
-10

(dB)
10
8.2
10
10
NOTE
3-56

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Item
Performance
2048
Code pattern
HDB3
Wire pair in each

Impedance (ohm)
75
120
Orderwire Interface Performance

Table 3-45 Orderwire interface performance
Item
Performance
Transmission path
Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huaweidefined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
Orderwire type
Addressing call
Wire pair in each

Impedance (ohm)
600
NOTE
The OptiX RTN equipment also supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when an OptiX RTN
equipment calls the number of 888, the orderwire group call number, all the OptiX RTN equipment orderwire
phones in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is
established.
Synchronous Data Interface Performance

Table 3-46 Synchronous data interface performance
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Item
Performance
Transmission path
Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined

byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
64
Interface type
Codirectional
Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.

3-57
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Asynchronous Data Interface

Table 3-47 Asynchronous data interface performance
Item
Performance
Transmission path
Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or the

Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame.
19.2
Meets the RS-232 standard.
Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance

The clock timing and synchronization performance meets the relevant standards specified in the
ITU-T Recommendations.
Table 3-48 Clock timing and synchronization performance
Item
Performance
External synchronization
source
2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 9), or 2048 kHz

(compliant with ITU-T G.703 13)
Frequency accuracy
Compliant with ITU-T G.813
Pull-in, hold-in, and pull-out

ranges
Noise generation
Noise tolerance
Noise transfer
Transient response and
holdover performance
Wayside Service Interface Performance

Table 3-49 Wayside service interface performance
3-58
Item
Performance
Transmission path
Uses the Huawei-defined bytes in the overhead of the

microwave frame.
2048
Impedance (ohm)
120

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Mechanical Behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions

(width)
Weight
CSHA: 1.11 kg
CSHB: 1.16 kg
CSHC: 1.13 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of the CSHA: < 18.0 W
Power consumption of the CSHB: < 22.7 W
Power consumption of the CSHC: < 19.6 W
3.5 IF1
The IF1 is a medium-capacity SDH IF board and is available in two types, namely, IF1A and
IF1B. In this document, the IF1 is used to stand for both the IF1A and IF1B. The only difference
from the IF1B is that the IF1A is more reliable. The IF1 supports the DC-C power distribution
modes.
The functional version of the IF1 is SL91.
The IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal and provides the management channel to the ODU
and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow
This topic considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the working
principle and signal flow of the IF1.
3.5.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF interface, and an ODU power switch on the front panel.
3.5.5 Valid Slots
The IF1 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS should be the
same as the physical slots.
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1.
This topic describes the board specifications, including baseband signal processing performance
of the modem, IF performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-59
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards

The functional version of the IF1 is SL91.

The IF1 receives and transmits one IF signal and provides the management channel to the ODU
and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
IF Processing
l
Maps SDH and PDH service signals into microwave frame signals.
Codes and decodes microwave frame signals.
Modulates and demodulates microwave frame signals.
Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals.
Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and -48 V power supplies.
Overhead Processing
l
Processes the regenerator section overheads of the SDH microwave signals.
Processes the multiplex section overheads of the SDH microwave signals.
Processes the higher order path overheads of the SDH microwave signals.
Processes the overheads of the PDH microwave frame signals.
Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 overhead bytes in the SDH microwave
signals.
Supports the setting and query of the link ID.

NOTE
Higher order path overheads are processed in two modes, namely, the pass-through mode and termination mode.
In the pass-through mode, the path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the overhead values
are not changed. In the termination mode, when the path overheads are detected in the receive direction, the
overhead bytes are re-set to the default values in the transmit direction. By default, the board adopts the passthrough mode.
Pointer Processing
l
Processes the AU pointers in the SDH microwave signals.
Processes the TU pointers in the PDH microwave signals.
l
Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection.
Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching.
Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels
in an SNCP group.
Supports the setting of SNCP switching conditions.

NOTE
For details on the 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, 1+1 SD, and SNCP, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission
System Feature Description.
3-60

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards

l
NOTE
l
Supports the inloop and outloop over IF interfaces.
Supports the inloop and outloop at composite ports.
Supports the detection of the board temperature.
Supports the monitoring of the power supply and the clock.
Supports the warm reset and cold reset on the board.
Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

NOTE
For details on the loopback function, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Maintenance
Guide.
A warm reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control and communication unit
but does not affect the services. A cold reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system
control and communication unit, the initiation of the board (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is
reloaded), and a service interruption.

This topic considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the working
principle and signal flow of the IF1.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-61
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards

Figure 3-26 Functional block diagram of the IF1
Backplane
ODU control signal
SMODEM
unit
Service
bus
Overhead
bus
Logic processing unit
Microwave MODEM
unit
frame signal
MUX/DEMUX unit
IF
processing
unit
Combiner
interface
unit
IF
System control and

communication unit
Paired board
HSM switching signal
Cross-connect unit
System control and
communication unit
Control bus
System control and

communication unit
Logic
control unit
-48 V power supplied

to the ODU
Power
supply
unit
+3.3 V power supplied to

other modules on the
board
Clock signal provided
to the other units on
the board
Clock
unit
-48 V
+3.3
V
+3.3 power supplied

to the monitoring
circuit
System clock signal
Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction

Table 3-51 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF1
Step
Functional Unit
Processing Flow
Combiner interface
unit
Separates the ODU control signal and the microwave

service signal from the IF signal.
SMODEM unit
Demodulates the ODU control signal.
Transmits the ODU control signal to the serial interface

of the CPU unit in the system control and
communication unit.
Controls the level of the service signal through the

automatic gain control (AGC) circuit.
Filters the signal.
Performs A/D conversion.
3-62
IF processing unit

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Step
Functional Unit
Processing Flow
MODEM unit
Performs digital demodulation.
Performs time domain adaptive equalization.
Performs FEC decoding and generates the

corresponding alarms.
Synchronizes the frames and detects the R_LOS and

R_LOF alarms.
Performs descrambling.
Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates the

corresponding alarms and performance events.
Checks the link ID and generates the corresponding

alarms.
Checks bits 6-8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byte, and

generates the corresponding alarms and performance
events.
Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and

reports the SSM status to the system control and
communication unit.
Detects the changes in the ATPC message and the

microwave RDI, and reports the changes to the system
control and communication unit through the control
bus.
Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes

including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and
K bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal, and
transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the logic
processing unit.
Extracts the wayside service bytes to form another 2

Mbit/s overhead signal and transmits the 2 Mbit/s
overhead signal to the logic processing unit.
Adjusts the AU pointer and generates the

corresponding performance events.
Checks the higher order path overheads and generates

the corresponding alarms and performance events.
Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4

signal to the logic processing unit.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
3 Boards
MUX/DEMUX unit
(for SDH microwave
signal processing)

3-63
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Step
Functional Unit
Processing Flow
MUX/DEMUX unit
(for PDH microwave
signal processing)
Detects the PDH microwave frame header and

events.
Verifies the check code and generates the

Detects the link ID and generates the corresponding

alarms.

bus.

including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes
from the PDH microwave frame to form a 2 Mbit/s
overhead signal, and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead
Adjusts the TU pointers.
Maps the TU-12s of the PDH microwave signals into

the specified position in the VC-4.
Processes the clock signal.
Multiplexes the 2 Mbit/s overhead signals into an 8

overhead signal to the system control and
communication unit. Each 2 Mbit/s overhead signal
occupies a 2 Mbit/s timeslot in the 8 Mbit/s overhead
bandwidth.
Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication

signal to the cross-connect unit.
Logic processing
unit
NOTE
In the 1+1 FD/SD mode, the MUX/DEMUX unit transmits the service signals by HSM bus to the MUX/DEMUX
unit of the paired board. The MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board selects the signal of higher quality for
subsequent processing.
3-64

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction

Table 3-52 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF1
Step
Functional Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit
Demultiplexes the 8 Mbit/s overhead signal into 2

Mbit/s overhead signals.
Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal

from the cross-connect unit.
Sets the higher order path overheads.
Sets the AU pointer.
Sets the multiplex section overheads.
Sets the regenerator section overheads.
Performs scrambling.
MUX/DEMUX unit
(for PDH microwave
signal processing)
Demaps TU-12s from the VC-4 signal.
Sets the PDH microwave frame overheads.
MODEM unit
Performs FEC coding.
Performs digital modulation.
Performs D/A conversion.
Performs analog modulation.
MUX/DEMUX unit
(for SDH microwave
signal processing)
IF processing unit
SMODEM unit
Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmitted

from the system control and communication unit.
Combiner interface
unit
Combines the ODU control signal, microwave service

signal, and -48 V power supplies, and transmits the
combined signals to the IF cable.
Control Signal Processing Flow

The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues the configuration data and query commands to the other units of the board
through the control bus. The command responses, alarms, and performance events are also
reported to the CPU unit through the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the read/write address signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.
Power Supply unit

l
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Receives the -48 V power supply from the power supply bus in the backplane, performs
the start-relay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion operations, and then supplies the -48 V
power to the ODU.
3-65
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
l
Receives the +3.3 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane and supplies the
+3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides the clock
signal to the other units on the board.
3.5.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF interface, and an ODU power switch on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-27 Front panel of the IF1
-48V OUTPUT
PULL
IF1
WARNING
STAT
SRV
LINK
ODU
RMT
ACT
IF1
ODU-PWR
IF
Indicators
Table 3-53 Description of the indicators on the IF1
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
The board is working

normally.
On (red)
Off
There is no power supplied

to the board.
SRV
LINK
3-66
On (green)
The services are normal.
On (red)
Indicates that a critical or

major alarm occurs in the
service.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote alarm

occurs in the services.
Off
The services are not

configured.
On (green)
The space link is normal.
On (red)
The space link is faulty.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
ODU
On (green)
The ODU works normally.
On (red)
The logical board is not

added on the NMS
The ODU has critical or

major alarms.
No power is supplied.
RMT
ACT
On (yellow)
The ODU has minor alarms.
On for 300 ms (yellow) and

The antennas are not aligned.
On (yellow)
The equipment at the

opposite end reports an RDI.
Off

opposite end does not report
an RDI.
On (green)
The board is in the active

state in the 1+1 protection
system.
The board is already

activated in the
unprotected system.
The board is in the standby

system.
The board is not activated

in the unprotected system.
Off
Interfaces
Table 3-54 Description of the Interfaces
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Interface
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
IF
IF interface
TNC
IF jumperb
ODU-PWRa
ODU power switch

3-67
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
NOTE
a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To turn on or turn off the switch, you need to
first pull the switch lever outwards slightly. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is
open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.
b: The 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board. Hence, when the 5D IF cable is used, the IF jumper
is not required.
Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance
label on the front panel.
The high temperature warning label indicates that the board surface temperature may exceed
70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. In this case, you need to wear protective
gloves before handling the board.
The operation warning label indicates that you must turn off the ODU-PWR switch before
removing the IF cable.
The operation guidance label indicates that you need to pull the switch outward slightly before
setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.
3.5.5 Valid Slots

The IF1 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IF1 on the NMS should be the
same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-28 Slots for the IF1 in the IDU chassis
Slot 3 (IF1)
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 4 (IF1)
Slot 1
The ODU is not inserted in a physical slot but has a logical slot on the NMS. The logical slot
number of the ODU is the logical slot number of the IF board that is connected to the ODU plus
20.
Figure 3-29 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IF1
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
3-68
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 3 (IF1)
Slot 10
Slot 1
Slot 4 (IF1)
SLOT 7

Slot 8
Slot 9
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Table 3-55 Slot allocation

Item
Description
Slot allocation priority
Slot 3 > slot 4

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IF1.
Related References
A.14.1 Parameter Description: IF Interface_IF Attribute
A.14.2 Parameter Description: IF Interface_ATPC Attribute
A.15.2 Parameter Description: VC-4 POHs

This topic describes the board specifications, including baseband signal processing performance
of the modem, IF performance, board mechanical behavior, and board power consumption.
IF Performance
Table 3-56 IF performance
Item
Performance
IF signal
Transmit frequency of the IF
board (MHz)
350
Receive frequency of the IF

board (MHz)
140
Impedance (ohm)
50
ODU O&M signal
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Modulation mode
ASK

board (MHz)
5.5

board (MHz)
10

3-69
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem

Table 3-57 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem
Item
Performance
Encoding mode
Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH microwave signals
Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for

SDH microwave signals
Adaptive timedomain equalizer for

baseband signals
Supported
Mechanical Behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions

(width)
Weight
0.72 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 12 W
3.6 IFU2
The IFU2 is a general IF board, which can support the Hybrid microwave transmission and
Packet microwave transmission at the same time. The IFU2 board supports the DC-I power
distribution mode.
NOTE
In this version, the IFU2 supports only the Hybrid microwave transmission.

The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.
The IFU2 receives and transmits one Hybrid/Packet IF signal, provides the management channel
to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
This topic considers the processing of one Hybrid microwave IF signal as an example to describe
the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.
3.6.4 Front Panel
3-70

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
There are indicators, an IF interface, labels and an ODU power switch on the front panel.
3.6.5 Valid Slots
The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS should be
the same as the physical slots.
3.6.6 Parameter Settings
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.
This topic describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance,
board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.

The functional version of the IFU2 is SL91.

The IFU2 receives and transmits one Hybrid/Packet IF signal, provides the management channel
to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU.
IF Processing
l
Supports the Hybrid microwave frames, and supports the pure transmission of E1 or
Ethernet signals and the hybrid transmission of E1 and Ethernet signals.
Supports the Packet microwave frames and supports the packet service transmission.
Supports the adaptive modulation (AM) technology.
Maps service signals into microwave frame signals.
Provides a maximum of 56 MHz signal bandwidth and supports the highest modulation
mode of 256QAM.
Overhead Processing
l
Processes the overheads of the Hybrid/Packet microwave signals.
l
Supports N+1 protection.

NOTE
For details on the 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, and 1+1 SD, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System
Feature Description.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-71
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards

l
NOTE
l
Supports the MAC inloop at IFETH ports.
Supports the PRBS BER test over IF interfaces.
Supports the monitoring of the power supply and the clock.
Supports the detection of the board voltage.
Supports the detection of the board clock.

NOTE
Guide.

the working principle and signal flow of the IFU2.
NOTE
The working principle and signal flow of the Packet microwave IF signals are similar to the working
principle and signal flow of the Hybrid microwave IF signals. The only difference is with regard to the
frame structure. In the case of the Packet microwave, the MUX/DEMUX unit only multiplexes/
demultiplexes the packet services and does not transmit the TDM services to the cross-connect unit or
receive the TDM services from the cross-connect unit.
3-72

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards

Figure 3-30 Functional block diagram of the IFU2
SMODEM
unit
Backplane
ODU control signal
System control and

communication unit
HSM switching signal
Paired board
Service bus
Logic
processi
ng unit
MODEM
Microwave frame
unit
signal
MUX/DEMUX unit
IF
processing
unit
Combiner
interface
unit
IF
Overhead
bus
Ethernet
processin
g unit
GE bus
Cross-connect unit
System control and
communication unit
Packet switching unit
Control bus
System control and

communication unit
Logic
control unit
-48 V power supplied to the ODU

the other units on the board
Power
supply
unit
-48V2
+3.3
V

the monitoring circuit
Clock signal provided to the
other units on the board
-48 V1
Clock
unit
System clock signal

Table 3-59 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFU2
Step
Functional
Module
Processing Flow
Combiner interface
unit

SMODEM unit
Transmits the ODU control unit to the system control

and communication unit.
Filters the signal.
Performs the ADC sampling.
Performs A/D conversion.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
IF processing unit

3-73
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Step
Functional
Module
Processing Flow
MODEM unit
Performs digital demodulation.

Detects the Hybrid microwave frame header and

events.


alarms.

bus.

SSM bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal, and
processing unit.
Maps the E1 signals in the Hybrid microwave service

signals to the specific positions in the VC-4s and then
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit.
Transmits the Ethernet signals in the Hybrid

microwave service signals to the ethernet processing
unit.
Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/

DEMUX unit.
Sends the processed signals to the packet switching

unit.

bandwidth.

signal to the cross-connect unitthe main and standby
cross-connect units.
3-74
MUX/DEMUX unit
Ethernet processing
unit
Logic processing
unit

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
NOTE

Table 3-60 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFU2
Step
Functional
Module
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit


Ethernet processing
unit
Receives the GE signal from the packet switching unit.
Processes the GE signals.
MUX/DEMUX unit
Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signal.
Sets the Hybrid microwave frame overheads.
Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, and

microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.
Filters the signal.
Amplifies the signals.
MODEM unit
IF processing unit
SMODEM unit

Combiner interface
unit


Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-75
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Power Supply Unit

l
This unit receives the -48 V power from the power supply bus in the backplane, performs
the start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the -48 V power to the
ODU.
the start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to
the other units on the IFU2.
Clock Unit
3.6.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF interface, labels and an ODU power switch on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
ODU-PWR
IF
WARNING
-48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER
BEFORE
STAT
SRV
LINK
ODU
RMT
ACT
IFU2
Figure 3-31 Front panel of the IFU2

O
PULL
Indicators
Table 3-61 Description of the indicators on the IFU2
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)

normally.
On (red)
Off

to the board.
SRV
3-76
On (green)
On (red)

service.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Indicator
LINK
ODU
RMT
ACT
3 Boards
State
Meaning
On (yellow)

Off

configured.
On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
On (red)

added on the NMS

major alarms.
On (yellow)

On (yellow)

Off

an RDI.
On (green)

system.

activated in the
unprotected system.

system.

Off
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-77
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Interface and Switch

Table 3-62 Description of the Interfaces
Interface
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
IF
IF interface
TNC
IF jumperb
ODU-PWRa
ODU power switch
NOTE
is not required.
Labels
3.6.5 Valid Slots

The IFU2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFU2 on the NMS should be
Figure 3-32 Slots for the IFU2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 3 (IFU2)
Slot 4 (IFU2)
Slot 1
20.
3-78

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Figure 3-33 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFU2
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 3 (IFU2)
Slot 4 (IFU2)
Slot 10
Slot 1
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9

Item
Description
Slot 3 > slot 4

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFU2.
Related References
A.14.3 Parameter Description: Hybrid/AM Configuration
A.14.17 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic Attributes
A.14.18 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.14.19 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance,
IF Performance
Item
Performance
IF signal
board (MHz)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
350

3-79
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Item
Performance

board (MHz)
140
Impedance (ohm)
50
ODU O&M signal

Modulation mode
ASK

board (MHz)
5.5

board (MHz)
10

Item
Performance
Encoding mode
The LDPC encoding is performed for the Hybrid microwave signals.

baseband signals
Supported
Mechanical Behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions
19.82 mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width)
Weight
0.79 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption : < 23 W
3.7 IFX2
The IFX2 is a general IF board, which can support the XPIC function of the Hybrid microwave
and Packet microwave. The IFX2 board supports the DC-I power distribution mode.
3-80

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
NOTE
In this version, the IFX2 supports only the Hybrid microwave transmission.

The functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.
The IFX2 receives and transmits one Hybrid/Packet IF signal, provides the management channel
to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 can cancel the crosspolarization interference in the IF signal.
the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.
3.7.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, an IF interface, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on
the front panel.
3.7.5 Valid Slot
The IFX2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS should be
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2.
This section describes the board performance, including IF performance, modem performance,
board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

The functional version of the IFX2 is SL91.

The IFX2 receives and transmits one Hybrid/Packet IF signal, provides the management channel
to the ODU, and supplies the required -48 V power to the ODU. The IFX2 can cancel the crosspolarization interference in the IF signal.
IF Processing
l
Supports the XPIC function, provides the XPIC input and output interfaces, and supports
the manual configuration of the XPIC function.
Supports the Hybrid microwave frames and supports the pure transmission of E1 or
Ethernet signals and the hybrid transmission of E1 and Ethernet signals.
Supports the Packet microwave frames and supports the packet service transmission.
Supports the adaptive modulation (AM) technology.
Maps service signals into microwave frame signals.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-81
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
l
Provides the maximum signal bandwidth of 56 MHz and supports the highest modulation
mode of 256QAM.
Overhead Processing
l
Processes the overheads of the Hybrid/Packet microwave signals.
l
Supports N+1 protection.

NOTE
For details on the 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD, and 1+1 SD, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System

l
NOTE
3-82
Supports the MAC inloop at IFETH ports.
Supports the PRBS BER test over IF interfaces.
Supports the detection of the board voltage.
Supports the detection of the board clock.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
NOTE
Guide.

the working principle and signal flow of the IFX2.
NOTE
The working principle and signal flow of the Packet microwave IF signals are similar to the working
principle and signal flow of the Hybrid microwave IF signals. The only difference is with regard to the
frame structure. In the case of the Packet microwave, the MUX/DEMUX unit only multiplexes/
demultiplexes the packet services and does not transmit the TDM services to the cross-connect unit or
receive the TDM services from the cross-connect unit.

Figure 3-34 Functional block diagram of the IFX2
Backplane
ODU control signal
SMODEM
unit
System control and

communication unit
HSM switching
signal
Paired
board
Service bus
Overhead
MODEM
unit
Logic
processi
ng unit
Microwave
frame signal
MUX/DEMUX unit
IF
processing
unit
Combiner
interface
unit
IF
bus
Ethernet
processing
unit
GE
bus
Cross - connect unit

System control and
communication unit
XPIC signal
Control
bus
System control and

communication unit
Logic
control unit
- 48 V power supplied to the ODU

+3.3V power supplied to the
Power
supply
unit
+3.3V power supplied to

the monitoring circuit
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
- 48 V1
- 48 V2
+3.3 V
Clock
unit

System clock signal
3-83
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards

Table 3-67 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFX2
Step
Functional
Module
Processing Flow
Combiner interface
unit

SMODEM unit
Transmits the ODU control unit to the system control

and communication unit.
Performs the ADC sampling.
Filters the signal and splits the signal to two channels.
3-84
IF processing unit
MODEM unit
Performs A/D conversion for one filtered signal and

transmits the converted signal to the MODEM unit.
Outputs the other filtered signal as the XPIC signal.
Performs A/D conversion for the XPIC signal from the

paired IFX2 and transmits the converted signal to the
MODEM unit.
Performs digital demodulation by using the XPIC IF

signal from the paired IFX2 as a reference signal.


Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Step
Functional
Module
Processing Flow
MUX/DEMUX unit
Detects the Hybrid microwave frame header and

events.


alarms.

bus.

SSM bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal, and
processing unit.
Maps the E1 signals in the Hybrid microwave service

signals to the specific positions in the VC-4s and then
transmits the VC-4s to the logic processing unit.
Transmits the Ethernet signals in the Hybrid

microwave service signals to the Ethernet processing
unit.
Processes the GE signals received from the MUX/

DEMUX unit.
Sends the processed signals to the packet switching

unit.

bandwidth.

Ethernet processing
unit
Logic processing
unit
NOTE
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-85
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards

Table 3-68 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFX2
Step
Functional
Module
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit


Ethernet processing
unit
Receives the GE signal from the packet switching unit.
Processes the GE signals.
MUX/DEMUX unit
Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signal.
Sets the Hybrid microwave frame overheads.
Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, and

microwave frame overheads to form microwave
frames.
Filters the signal.
Amplifies the signals.
MODEM unit
IF processing unit
SMODEM unit

Combiner interface
unit


3-86

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Power Supply Unit

l
the start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the -48 V power to the
ODU.
the start-delay, filtering, and DC-DC conversion, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to
the other units on the IFX2.
Clock Unit
3.7.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, an IF interface, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on
the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
IF
-48V OUTPUT
PULL
I
X-IN
X-OUT
IFX2
ODU-PWR
WARNING
XPIC
STAT
SRV
LINK
ODU
RMT
ACT
IFX2
Figure 3-35 Front panel of the IFX2
Indicators
Table 3-69 Description of the indicators on the IFX2
Indicator
State
Meaning
XPIC
On (green)
The XPIC input signal is

normal.
On (red)
The XPIC input signal is lost.
Off
The XPIC function is

disabled.
On (green)

normally.
On (red)
Off

to the board.
STAT
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-87
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Indicator
State
Meaning
SRV
On (green)
On (red)

service.
On (yellow)

Off

configured.
On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
On (red)

added on the NMS

major alarms.
LINK
ODU
RMT
ACT
On (yellow)

On (yellow)

Off

an RDI.
On (green)

system.

activated in the
unprotected system.

system.

Off
3-88

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Interfaces
Table 3-70 Description of the interfaces
Interface
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
IF
IF interface
TNC
IF jumperb
ODU-PWRa
ODU power switch
X-IN
XPIC signal input

interface
SMA
XPIC cable
X-OUT
XPIC signal output

interface
SMA
NOTE
is not required.
Labels
3.7.5 Valid Slot

The IFX2 can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the IFX2 on the NMS should be
Figure 3-36 Slots for the IFX2 in the IDU chassis
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Slot 3 (IFX2)
Slot 4 (IFX2)
Slot 1

3-89
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
20.
Figure 3-37 Logical slots for the logical boards of the IFX2
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 23 (ODU)
Slot 24 (ODU)
Slot 3 (IFX2)
Slot 4 (IFX2)
Slot 10
Slot 1
Slot 7
Slot 9
Slot 8

Item
Description
Slot 3 > slot 4

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the IFX2.
Related References

This section describes the board performance, including IF performance, modem performance,
board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.
IF Performance
Item
Performance
IF signal
3-90

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Item
Performance

board (MHz)
350

board (MHz)
140
Impedance (ohm)
50
ODU O&M signal

Modulation mode
ASK

board (MHz)
5.5

board (MHz)
10

Item
Performance
Encoding mode
The LDPC encoding is performed for the Hybrid microwave signals.

baseband signals
Supported
Mechanical Behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions
Weight
0.80 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 33 W
3.8 EM6T/EM6F
The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE interface board, which provides four FE electrical interfaces and
two GE interfaces. The EM6T has similar functions to the EM6F. The only difference is as
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-91
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
follows: the GE interfaces on the EM6T always function as electrical interfaces whereas the GE
interfaces on the EM6F use the SFP modules and therefore can function as two optical or
electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces on the EM6F and the EM6T are compatible
with the FE electrical interfaces.
The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is SL91.
The EM6T/EM6F accesses, processes, and aggregates four FE signals and two GE signals.
This topic considers the processing of one GE signal on the EM6T as an example to describe
the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F.
3.8.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, FE interfaces, and GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T/EM6F.
The GE electrical interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T are compatible with the FE
interfaces. The GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6F use pluggable SFP optical modules.
3.8.5 Valid Slots
The EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the
NMS should be the same as the physical slots.
The type of the SFP module equipped on the EM6F can be identified by the board feature code
that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code.
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6F.
This topic describes the board specifications, including the GE interface performance, FE
interface performance, board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.

The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is SL91.

The EM6T/EM6F accesses, processes, and aggregates four FE signals and two GE signals.
Ethernet Service Signal Processing
3-92
The EM6T provides two GE electrical interfaces whereas the EM6F uses the SFP optical
modules to provide two GE optical or electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interfaces are
compatible with the FE electrical interfaces.
Supports the setting and query of the working modes of the Ethernet interfaces. The
supported working modes are as follows:
The FE interfaces support 10M full duplex, 10M half duplex, 100M full duplex, 100M
half duplex, and auto-negotiation.
The GE electrical interfaces support 10M full duplex, 10M half duplex, 100M full
duplex, 100M half duplex, 1000M full duplex, and auto-negotiation.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
The GE optical interfaces support 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation.
Supports the addition, deletion, and switching of IEEE 802.1q/802.1p-compliant VLAN

tags, and forwards packets based on the VLAN tags.
Supports the setting and query of the tag attributes of the Ethernet interfaces. The following
three TAG attributes are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid.
Accesses Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3 service frames with the maximum frame length
ranging from 1518 to 9600 bytes.
Supports Jumbo frames with the maximum frame length of 9600 bytes.
Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.
Supports the link state pass through (LPT) function.
Supports the link aggregation group (LAG) function.
Supports the Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS).

NOTE
For details on LAG and Link State Pass Through, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System
Layer 2 Switching Processing of Ethernet Services

The Ethernet interface board can realize the following functions when working with the packet
switching board:
l
Supports port-based, port+VLAN-based, and port+QinQ E-Line services.
Supports 802.1d bridge-based, 802.1q bridge-based, and 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN

services.
QoS Service Processing

The Ethernet interface board can realize the following QoS functions when working with the
packet switching board:
l
Supports flow classification over Ethernet interfaces based on the port, C-VLAN ID, SVLAN ID, priority of the 802.1p packets with C-VLAN or S-VLAN tags, or DSCP in the
IPv6 packets.
Supports CAR flow monitoring.
Supports queue scheduling.
Each Ethernet interface supports scheduling of eight levels of priority queues.
Supports the setting of the queue scheduling mode of each Ethernet interface to SP, SP
+WRR, or WRR.
Supports traffic shaping for a specific port, priority queue, or traffic flow.
Ethernet OAM Processing

The Ethernet interface board can realize the following Ethernet OAM functions when working
with the packet switching board:
l
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.1ag:
Management of OAM maintenance points
Continuity check test

3-93
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Loopback test
Link trace test
Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.3ah:
OAM automatic discovery
Link performance monitoring
Fault detection
Loopback at the remote end
Self-loop detection and self-loop port blocking
Clock Processing
l
Supports synchronous Ethernet.
Supports receiving and transmitting SSM messages through Ethernet interfaces.

l
setting the alarm thresholds.
Supports RMON performance events.

NOTE
For details on the alarm management and performance event management functions, see the OptiX RTN
l
Supports the inloop at the PHY layer over Ethernet ports.
Supports the inloop at the MAC layer over Ethernet ports.
Supports the mirroring function over Ethernet interfaces.
Supports the query of the manufacturing information about the SFP module.

This topic considers the processing of one GE signal on the EM6T as an example to describe
the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F.
3-94

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards

Figure 3-38 Functional block diagram
Backplane
GE signal
GE signal
Control signal
access unit
Ethernet
processing
unit
Ethernet
signal
Logic
processing
unit
Ethernet
signal
FE signal Control signal

access unit
FE signal
Control bus of the board
Control bus
Logic
control unit
Power
supply unit

the board
+3.3 V backup power
supplied to the board
System control and

communication unit
-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V

Clock unit
System clock

Table 3-75 Signal processing flow in the receive direction
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Step
Functional Unit
Processing Flow
GE signal access unit
Provides access to GE signal.
Performs reassembling, decoding, and serial/parallel

conversion for the GE signals.
Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRC

code processing, and Ethernet performance count for
the frame signals.

3-95
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Step
Functional Unit
Processing Flow
Ethernet processing
unit
Adds the tags identifying the ingress ports to the

Ethernet data frames.
Processes the VLAN tags in the Ethernet data frames.
Performs the QoS processing, such as traffic

classification and CAR traffic monitoring, for the
Ethernet data frames.
Forwards the Ethernet data frames to the logic

processing unit.
Logic processing
unit
Transmits the Ethernet data frames to the packet

switching unit.

Table 3-76 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction
Step
Functional Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing unit
Selects the Ethernet data frames from the packet

switching unit.
Transmits the Ethernet data frames to the Ethernet

processing unit.
Processes the VLAN tags in the Ethernet data frames.
Performs the QoS processing, such as traffic shaping

and queue scheduling, for the Ethernet data frames.
Forwards the Ethernet data frames to the

corresponding egress ports based on the egress tags
contained in the Ethernet data frames.
Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC

code computing, and Ethernet performance count.
Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for the

Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated FE/
GE signals through the Ethernet interfaces.
Ethernet processing
unit
GE signal access unit

The Ethernet processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access by using the control signal.
The logic control unit controls the Ethernet processing unit and logic processing unit through
the control unit on the board.
The logic control unit communicates with the system control and communication unit through
the system control bus. The configuration data and query commands from the system control
and communication unit are issued to the various units of the board through the logic control
3-96

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
unit. The command response reported by each unit on the board, and the alarms and performance
events are reported to the system control and communication unit through the logic control unit.
Power Supply Unit

This unit receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power into
the +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
The power supply unit receives a +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as
a +3.3 V power backup for the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
3.8.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, FE interfaces, and GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T/EM6F.
The GE electrical interfaces on the front panel of the EM6T are compatible with the FE
interfaces. The GE interfaces on the front panel of the EM6F use pluggable SFP optical modules.
Front Panel Diagram
GE1
GE2
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
EM6T
STAT
PROG
SRV
EM6T
Figure 3-39 Front panel of the EM6T
EM6F
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
STAT
PROG
SRV
LINK1
LINK2
EM6F
Figure 3-40 Front panel of the EM6F
GE1
GE2
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
Indicators
Table 3-77 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)

3-97
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Indicator
SRV
PROG
State
Meaning
Off
There is no power supplied to the board.
On (green)
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the

system.
On (yellow)
A minor alarm occurs in the system.
Off
On for 100 ms (green) and off


being reset, the software is being loaded to
the flash memory.


being reset, the board software is in BIOS
boot state.
On (green)
The upper layer software is being initialized.
On for 100 ms (red) and off for

100 ms repeatedly

fails.
On (red)

being reset, the memory self-check fails or
loading the upper layer software fails.
When the board is running, the logic file or
upper layer software is lost.
LINK1a
LINK2a
3-98
Off
On (green)
The GE1 interface is connected correctly

and is not receiving or transmitting data.
Blinking (yellow)
The GE1 interface is receiving or

transmitting data.
Off
The GE1 interface is not connected or is

connected incorrectly.
On (green)

Flashing (green)

transmitting data.
Off


Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE optical interfaces.
Interfaces
Table 3-78 Description of the interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F
Inte
rfac
e
FE1
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding Cable
RJ-45
5.8 Network Cable
LC (SFP optical module)
5.5 Fiber Jumper
FE interface
FE2
FE3
FE4
GE1
GE2
GE1
GE2
GE electrical
interface
GE optical
interface (EM6F)
The FE electrical interfaces and GE electrical interfaces support the MDI and MDI-X adaptation
modes. For the front view and pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector, see Figure 3-41 and refer
to Table 3-79 and Table 3-80.
87654321
Table 3-79 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI mode

Pin
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
TX+
BIDA+

(+)

3-99
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
TX-
BIDA-

(-)
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+

(+)
Reserved
BIDC+

(+)
Reserved
BIDC-

(-)
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-

(-)
Reserved
BIDD+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD-

(-)
Table 3-80 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector in MDI-X mode

Pin
3-100
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+

(+)
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-

(-)
TX+
BIDA+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD-

(-)
TX-
BIDA-

(-)
Reserved
BIDC+

(+)
Reserved
BIDC-

(-)

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
The RJ-45 connector has two indicators. For meaning of the indicators, see Table 3-81.
Indicator
State
Meaning
LINK (green)
On
The link is normal.
Off
The link fails.
On or blinking

receiving data.
Off

receiving data.
ACT (yellow)
Label
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EM6F.
The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS
1. That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface is lower than 10 dBm
(10 mW).
3.8.5 Valid Slots

The EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the
NMS should be the same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-42 Slots for the EM6T/EM6F in the IDU chassis
Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 1
Figure 3-43 Logical slots for the logical boards of the EM6T/EM6F
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 3 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot10
Slot 1
Slot 4 (EM6T/EM6F)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
Table 3-82 Slot configuration for the EM6T/EM6F
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Item
Description
Slot 4 > slot 3

3-101
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards

The type of the SFP module equipped on the EM6F can be identified by the board feature code
that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code.
Table 3-83 Board feature code of the EM6F
Board Feature Code
Module Type
BOM Code of the Module
01
1000BASE-SX (Multimode, 0.5 km)
34060286
02
1000BASE-LX (Singlemode, 10 km)
34060473
03
10/100/1000BASE-T(X)
(100m)
34100052

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the EM6T/EM6F.
Related References
A.14.13 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Basic Attributes
A.14.14 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Flow Control
A.14.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
A.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the board specifications, including the GE interface performance, FE
interface performance, board mechanical behavior and board power consumption.
Performance of Optical Interfaces

The optical interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F meet the requirements specified in IEEE 802.3. The
following table lists the main specifications for the optical interfaces.
Table 3-84 Performance of the GE optical interface
3-102
Item
Performance
1000
Classification code
1000Base-SX
1000Base-LX
Fiber type
Multiple-mode optical
fiber
Single-mode optical
fiber
Transmission distance (km)
0.5
10

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Item
Performance
Operating wavelength (nm)
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
Mean launched power (dBm)
-9.5 to 0
-9 to -3
Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm)
-17
-19
-3
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910 uses SFP modules for providing GE optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP
modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.
Performance of GE Electrical Interfaces

The GE electrical interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F meet the requirements specified in IEEE 802.3.
The following table lists the main specifications for the GE electrical interfaces.
Table 3-85 GE electric interface performance
Item
Performance
10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
1000 (1000BASE-T)
Code pattern

4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T)
Interface type
RJ-45
Performance of FE Electrical Interfaces

The FE electrical interfaces on the EM6T/EM6F meet the requirements specified in IEEE 802.3.
The following table lists the main specifications for the FE electrical interfaces.
Table 3-86 FE electric interface performance
Item
Performance
10 (10BASE-T)
100 (100BASE-TX)
Code pattern

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-103
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Item
Performance
Interface type
RJ-45
Mechanical Behavior
Item
Performance
EM6T
EM6F
Dimensions
19.82mm (height) x 196.70 mm (depth) x 193.80 mm (width)
Weight
0.37 kg
0.38 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption of EM6T: < 10.4 W
Power consumption of EM6F: < 11.3 W
3.9 SL1D
The SL1D is an SDH dual-port STM-1 board.
The functional version of the SL1D is SL91.
The SL1D transmits and receives 2xSTM-1 optical signals.
This topic considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the working
principle and signal flow of the SL1D.
3.9.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, STM-1 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel.
3.9.5 Valid Slots
The SL1D can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS should be
The type of the SFP optical module equipped on the SL1D can be identified by the board feature
name.
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D.
3-104

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
This topic describes the board specifications, including STM-1 optical interface performance,

The functional version of the SL1D is SL91.

The SL1D transmits and receives 2xSTM-1 optical signals.
Specifications for Optical Interfaces

l
Provides Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2 optical interfaces.
All the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.957.
Specifications for Optical Modules

l
Adopts the SFP optical module to facilitate the later maintenance of the optical module.
Supports the detection and query of the information about the optical module.
Supports the enabling and disabling of the laser.
Supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.

NOTE
The ALS function is described as follows:

1. After detecting that the R_LOS alarm persists over the receive port for 500 ms, the optical module
automatically shuts down the laser of the transmit port.
2. The laser changes to emit alternative laser pulses. The laser pulses are emitted for 2s after a 60s
interval.
3. After the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser is recovered to normal and emits light continuously.
Overhead Processing
l
Processes the regenerator section overheads in STM-1 signals.
Processes the multiplex section overheads in STM-1 signals.
Processes the higher order path overheads in STM-1 signals.
Supports the setting and query of the J0/J1/C2 byte.

NOTE
Higher order path overheads are processed in two modes, namely, the pass-through mode and termination
mode. In the pass-through mode, the path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the
overhead values are not changed. In the termination mode, when the path overheads are detected in the
receive direction, the overhead bytes are re-set to the default values in the transmit direction. By default,
the board adopts the pass-through mode.
Pointer Processing
Processes AU pointers.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-105
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
l
in an SNCP group.
in a linear MSP group.
Supports the setting of SNCP switching conditions.
Supports the setting of linear MSP switching conditions.

NOTE
For details on SNCP and linear MSP, see the OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System Feature
Description.

l
NOTE
l
Supports the outloop on VC-4 paths.

NOTE
A warm reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control and communication unit but
does not affect the services. A cold reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control
and communication unit, the initiation of the board (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded), and
service interruption.

This topic considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the working
principle and signal flow of the SL1D.
3-106

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards

Figure 3-44 Functional block diagram of the SL1D
Backplane
Service
bus
Overhead
bus
Logic
processing
unit
Overhead
processing
unit
STM-1
O/E
conversion
unit
STM-1
Cross-connect unit
System control and

communication unit
Control bus
Logic
control
unit
Supplies power to the


System control and

communication unit
Clock
unit
+3.3 V
System clock signal

Table 3-88 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL1D
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Step
Functional Unit
Processing Flow
O/E conversion unit
Regenerates STM-1 optical signals.
Detects the R_LOS alarm.
Converts the STM-1 optical signals into electrical

signals.

3-107
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Step
Functional Unit
Processing Flow
Overhead processing
unit
Restores the clock signal.
Synchronizes the frames and detects the R_LOS and

R_LOF alarms.
Performs descrambling.
Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates the

Checks bits 6-8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byte, and

events.
Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and

reports it to the system control and communication
unit.

including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes and K
bytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to the
logic processing unit.
Adjusts the AU pointer and generates the

corresponding performance events.
Checks the higher order path overheads and generates

the corresponding alarms and performance events.
Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4


bandwidth.

Logic processing
unit

Table 3-89 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL1D
3-108
Step
Functional Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit



Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Step
Functional Unit
Processing Flow
Overhead processing
unit
Sets the higher order path overheads.
Sets the AU pointer.
Sets the multiplex section overheads.
Sets the regenerator section overheads.
Performs scrambling.
Converts the electrical signals into optical signals.
O/E conversion unit

The SL1D is directly controlled by the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.
The CPU unit issues the configuration data and query commands to the other units of the SL1D
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit and loads the FPGA software.
Clock Unit
3.9.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, STM-1 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
TX2/RX2
TX1/RX1
SL1D
SL1D
STAT
SRV
LOS1
LOS2
Figure 3-45 Front panel of the SL1D
Indicators
Table 3-90 Description of the indicators on the SL1D
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)

normally.
On (red)

3-109
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Indicator
SRV
LOS1
LOS2
State
Meaning
Off

to the board.
On (green)
On (red)

service.
On (yellow)

Off

configured.
On (red)
The first optical interface of

the SL1D reports the R_LOS
alarm.
Off

the SL1D does not report the
R_LOS alarm.
On (red)
The second optical interface

of the SL1D reports the
R_LOS alarm.
Off

of the SL1D does not report
the R_LOS alarm.
Interfaces
Table 3-91 Description of the interfaces
3-110
Interface
Description
Connector Type
Corresponding
Cable
TX1
Transmit port of the

first STM-1 optical
interface
LC (SFP)
Fiber jumper
RX1
Receive port of the

first STM-1 optical
interface
TX2
Transmit port of the

second STM-1
optical interface
LC (SFP)

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Interface
Description
Connector Type
RX2
Receive port of the

second STM-1
optical interface
Corresponding
Cable
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel.
The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS
1. That is, the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface is lower than 10 dBm
(10 mW).
3.9.5 Valid Slots

The SL1D can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS should be
Figure 3-46 Slots for the SL1D in the IDU chassis
Slot 3 (SL1D)
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 4 (SL1D)
Slot 1
Figure 3-47 Logical slots for the logical boards of the SL1D
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 3 (SL1D)
Slot 10
Slot 4 (SL1D)
Slot 1
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
Table 3-92 Slot allocation for the SL1D

Item
Description
Slot 4 > slot 3

The type of the SFP optical module equipped on the SL1D can be identified by the board feature
name.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-111
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Table 3-93 Board feature code of the SL1D

Feature Code
Type of Optical Module
Part Number of the

Optical Module
01
Ie-1 (Multi-mode, 2km)
34060287
02
S-1.1 (Single-mode, 15km)
34060276
03
L-1.1 (Single-mode, 40km)
34060281
04
L-1.2 (Single-mode, 80km)
34060282

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SL1D.
Related References
A.14.10 Parameter Description: SDH Interfaces
A.15.1 Parameter Description: Regenerator Section Overhead

This topic describes the board specifications, including STM-1 optical interface performance,

3-112
Item
Performance
155520
Classification code
Ie-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Fiber type
Multi-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
Single-mode
fiber
(km)
15
40
80
(nm)
1270 to 1380
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
Mean launched power

(dBm)
-19 to -14
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Item
Performance
Receiver minimum
sensitivity (dBm)
-30
-28
-34
-34
-14
-8
-10
-10

(dB)
10
8.2
10
10
NOTE
Mechanical Behavior
Item
Performance
Dimensions

(width)
Weight
0.30 kg
Power Consumption
Power consumption: < 3.4 W
3.10 SP3S/SP3D
The SP3S is a 16xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm tributary board. The SP3D is a 32xE1 75-ohm/120-ohm
tributary board.
The functional version of the SP3S is SL91. The functional version of the SP3D is TNH1.
The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
This topic considers the processing of one E1 signal as an example to describe the working
principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.
3.10.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and E1 interfaces on the front panel.
3.10.5 Valid Slots
The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS
should be the same as the physical slots.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-113
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards

The E1 interface impedance of the SP3S/SP3D can be identified by the board feature code of
the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name.
This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D.
This topic describes the board specifications, including the E1 interface performance, board
mechanical behavior and board power consumption.

The functional version of the SP3S is SL91. The functional version of the SP3D is TNH1.

The SP3S receives and transmits 16xE1 signals. The SP3D receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
Overhead and Pointer Processing

l
Processes overheads and pointers at the VC-12 level.
Supports the query of the J2 and V5 bytes.
Supports the setting of the J2 and V5 bytes.
Clock Processing
l
Supports the E1 retiming function.
Supports the first and fifth E1 signals to be extracted as the tributary clock source.

l
NOTE
3-114
Supports the inloop and outloop over the E1 tributary interfaces.
Supports the PRBS 15 test.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
NOTE
Guide.
A warm reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control and communication unit but
does not affect the services. A cold reset causes the reset on the board software unit in the system control
and communication unit, the initiation of the board (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded), and
a service interruption.

This topic considers the processing of one E1 signal as an example to describe the working
principle and signal flow of the SP3S/SP3D.

Figure 3-48 Functional block diagram of the SP3S/SP3D
Backplane
Service bus
Logic
processing unit
Mapping/Demappi
ng unit
E1 signal
Codec unit
E1
Interface unit
E1
Control bus
Cross-connect unit
System control and

communication unit
Logic
control
unit
+3.3V power supplied
to the board
Power
Supply Unit
+3.3V backup power

supplied to the board

-48 V1
-48 V2
+3.3 V
Clock
unit
System clock signal

Table 3-96 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SP3S/SP3D
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Step
Functional Unit
Processing Flow
Interface unit
The external E1 signals are coupled by the transformer

and then are transmitted to the board.

3-115
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Step
Functional Unit
Processing Flow
Codec unit
Equalizes the received signals.
Recovers the clock signal.
Detects the T_ALOS alarm.
Performs the HDB3 decoding.
Asynchronously maps the signals into C-12s.
Adds the path overhead bytes to the C-12s, thus

forming VC-12s.
Processes the pointers, thus forming TU-12s.
Performs the byte interleaving for three TU-12s, thus

forming one TUG-2.
Performs the byte interleaving for seven TU-2s, thus

forming one TUG-3.
Performs the byte interleaving for three TU-3s, thus

forming one C-4.
Adds the higher order path overhead bytes to the C-4,

thus forming one VC-4.

Mapping/
Demapping unit
Logic processing
unit

Table 3-97 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SP3S/SP3D
Step
Functional Unit
Processing Flow
Logic processing
unit

Mapping/
Demapping unit
Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.
Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.
Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.
Processes path overheads and pointers and detects the

Extracts the E1 signals.
3-116
Codec unit
Performs the HDB3 coding.
Interface unit
The E1 signals are coupled by the transformer and then

are transmitted to the external cable.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards

The SP3S/SP3D is directly controlled by the CPU unit of the system control and communication
unit. The CPU unit issues the configuration data and query commands to the other units of the
SP3S/SP3D through the control bus. The command responses, alarms, and performance events
are also reported to the CPU unit through the control bus.
Power Supply Unit

This unit receives two -48 V power supplies from the backplane, converts the -48 V power into
the +3.3 V power, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
The power supply unit receives a +3.3 V power supply from the backplane, which functions as
a +3.3 V power backup for the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
3.10.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and E1 interfaces on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
SP3S
SP3S
STAT
SRV
Figure 3-49 Front panel of the SP3S

E1
1-16
21
1
42
22

SP3D
SP3D
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
STAT
SRV
Figure 3-50 Front panel of the SP3D
3-117
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Indicator
Table 3-98 Description of the indicators on the SP3S/SP3D
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)

normally.
On (red)
Off

to the board.
SRV
On (green)
On (red)

service.
On (yellow)

Off

configured.
Interface
Table 3-99 Description of the interface on the SP3S
Interface
Description
Connector
Type
Corresponding Cable
1-22
The first to sixteenth

E1 interfaces
Anea 96
E1 Cable to the External

Equipment or E1 Cable to the
E1 Panel
Table 3-100 Description of the interfaces on the SP3D
3-118
Interface
Description
Connector
Type
Corresponding Cable
1-22
The first to sixteenth

E1 interfaces
Anea 96

E1 Panel

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Interface
Description
Connector
Type
Corresponding Cable
23-42
The seventeenth to
thirty-second E1
interfaces
Anea 96

E1 Panel
NOTE
In the case of the OptiX RTN 910, only the ports 1-16 and 22-37 of the SP3D interface are used. Ports 1-16
correspond to E1 signals 1-16 and ports 22-37 correspond to E1 signals 17-32.
The interfaces on the SP3S/SP3D use the Anea 96 connectors. The pin assignment information
of the Anea 96 interfaces is provided in Figure 3-51 and Table 3-101.
POS.1
POS.96

Pin
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Signal
Pin
Signal

25

signal (+)

26

signal (-)

27

signal (+)

28

signal (-)

29

signal (+)

30

signal (-)

31

signal (+)

3-119
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Pin
3-120
Signal
Pin
Signal

32

signal (-)

33

signal (+)
10

34

signal (-)
11

35

signal (+)
12

36

signal (-)
13

37

14

38

15

39

signal (+)
16

40

signal (-)
17

41

signal (+)
18

42

signal (-)
19

43

signal (+)
20

44

signal (-)
21

45

22

46

23

47

24

48

49

73

50

74


Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
51

75

52

76

53

77

54

78

55

79

56

80

3.10.5 Valid Slots

The SP3S/SP3D can be inserted in slots 3 and 4. The logical slots of the SP3S/SP3D on the NMS
should be the same as the physical slots.
Figure 3-52 Slots for the SP3S/SP3D in the IDU 910 chassis
Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 1
Figure 3-53 Logical slots for the logical boards of the 910
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 3 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 10
Slot 1
Slot 4 (SP3S/SP3D)
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9
Table 3-102 Slot configuration for the SP3S/SP3D
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Item
Description
Slot 4 > slot 3

3-121
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards

The E1 interface impedance of the SP3S/SP3D can be identified by the board feature code of
the bar code. In the bar code, the board feature code is the number next to the board name.
Table 3-103 Board feature code of the SP3S/SP3D
Board Feature Code
120
75

This topic provides the hyperlinks of the main parameter settings for the SP3S/SP3D.
Related References
A.14.12 Parameter Description: PDH Interfaces

This topic describes the board specifications, including the E1 interface performance, board
mechanical behavior and board power consumption.
3-122
Item
Performance
2048
Code pattern
HDB3
Wire pair in each

Impedance (ohm)
75
120

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Mechanical Behavior
Item
Performance
SP3S
SP3D
Dimensions
Weight
0.54 kg
0.64 kg
Power consumption
Power consumption of the SP3S: < 5.7 W
Power consumption of the SP3D: < 9.6 W
3.11 PIU
The PIU is the power supply board and can access two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies.
The functional version of the PIU is TNC1.
The PIU supports the functions and features such as power access, power protection, lightning
protection, and information reporting.
The PIU mainly consists of the lightning protection and failure detection unit, communication
unit, and board in-position unit.
3.11.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and power access interfaces.
3.11.5 Valid Slots
The PIU can be inserted in Slot 5. The logical slot of the PIU on the NMS should be the same
as the physical slot.
This topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions and input voltage.

The functional version of the PIU is TNC1.

The PIU supports the functions and features such as power access, power protection, lightning
protection, and information reporting.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-123
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
l
Power access
The PIU accesses two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies for the equipment. The
maximum power and maximum current of each power supply are 170 W and 5 A
respectively.
Power protection
The PIU protects the DC power supplies against overcurrent and short circuits. In this
manner, the board and board components are prevented from being blown out in the case
of overcurrent.
Lightning protection
The PIU protects the equipment against lightning and reports an alarm if the protection
fails.
Power backup
The two DC power supplies provide 1+1 hot backup for each other.

The PIU mainly consists of the lightning protection and failure detection unit, communication
unit, and board in-position unit.
Figure 3-54 shows the functional block diagram of the PIU.
Figure 3-54 Functional block diagram of the PIU
Lightning protection Backplane
and failure detection
unit
Alarm signal
indicating lightning
Lightning protection
failure
and failure detection
unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Alarm signal indicating

Inter-board
lightning failure
communication
Communication
bus
unit
Board inposition signal
Board
in-position unit
Other boards
Other boards
System control and

communication unit
System control and
communication unit
Lightning Protection and Failure Detection Unit

This unit protects the equipment against lightning and detects the failure of the lightning
protective circuit. If the lightning protection fails, the PIU reports the alarm signals to system
control and communication unit, through the communication unit.
Communication Unit
This unit reports the board manufacturing information, PCB version information, and alarm
signals indicating the lightning protection failure to the system control and communication unit.
Board In-Position Unit

This unit reports the board in-position signals to the system control and communication unit.
3-124

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
3.11.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and power access interfaces.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-55 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU.
Figure 3-55 Front panel of the PIU
PWRA
PWRB
NEG1 RTN1 NEG2 RTN2

(-)
(+)
(-)
(+)
PIU
-48V
-60V
Indicators
Table 3-106 Description of the power status indicators
Indicator
Status
Description
PWRA
On (green)
The power supply is connected.
Off
There is no power supplied to the PIU or the power

supply is connected incorrectly.
On (green)
Off

PWRB
Interfaces
The PIU accesses two power supplies. Table 3-107 lists the types of the interfaces on the PIU
and their respective usage.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-125
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Table 3-107 Description of the interfaces on the PIU

Interface
Interface Type
Usage
NEG1(-)
-48 V power input

interface
Inputs the -48 V power.
RTN1(+)
BGND power input

interface
Inputs the BGND power.
NEG2(-)
-48 V power input

interface
Inputs the -48 V power.
RTN2(+)
BGND power input

interface
Inputs the BGND power.
Label
The label on the front panel indicates that the PIU accesses multiple power supplies.
CAUTION
Multiple power supplies are accessed for the equipment. When powering off the equipment,
ensure that these power supplies are disabled.
3.11.5 Valid Slots

The PIU can be inserted in Slot 5. The logical slot of the PIU on the NMS should be the same
as the physical slot.
Figure 3-56 Slot for the PIU in the IDU chassis
Slot 3
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 4
Slot 1
Figure 3-57 Logical slot for the logical board of the PIU
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 3
Slot 10
Slot 1
Slot 4
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9

This topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions and input voltage.
3-126

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Table 3-108 lists the technical specifications for the PIU.

Table 3-108 Technical specifications
Item
Performance
Dimensions
41.4 mm (width) x 224.8 mm (depth) x 21.0

mm height)
Weight
0.12 kg
Power Consumption
< 0.5 W
Input voltage
-38.4 V to -72.0 V
3.12 FAN
The FAN is the fan board that dissipates the heat from the chassis through wind cooling.
The functional version of the FAN is TNC1.
The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status.
The FAN mainly consists of the start-delay unit, communication unit, intelligent fan speed
adjustment unit, and board in-position unit.
3.12.4 Front Panel
There are indicators, ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.
3.12.5 Valid Slots
The FAN is inserted in slot 6 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS should
be the same as the physical slot.
This topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions, weight, power
consumption, and working voltage.

The functional version of the FAN is TNC1.

The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status.
The FAN has the following functions and features:
l
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Accesses one +12 V power supply for driving the three fans each of which consumes 6 W
power.
3-127
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
l
Provides start-delay for the power supply of the fans and protects fans against
overcurrent.
Intelligently adjusts the rotating speed of fans to ensure proper heat dissipation of the system
with lowest power consumption and lowest noise.
Reports the fan rotating speed, alarms, version number, and board in-position information.
Provides alarm indicators.
Disables the power supplies to the fans.

The FAN mainly consists of the start-delay unit, communication unit, intelligent fan speed
adjustment unit, and board in-position unit.
Figure 3-58 shows the functional block diagram of the FAN.
Figure 3-58 Functional block diagram of the FAN
Three fans
+12 V
+12 V
Start
delay
+12 V
System control and

communication unit
+12 V
+12 V power
shutdown signal
Communication unit
Rotating speed
reporting unit
PWM signal
Inter-board
communication
bus
Fan rotating
speed
PWM driving
unit
Intelligent fan speed
adjustment unit
Board in-position
unit
System control and

communication unit
System control and
communication unit
System control and
communication unit
Fan in-position
signal
System control and

communication unit
Start-Delay Unit
This unit protects the fan power supplies against start delay and overcurrent.
Communication Unit
This unit reports the board manufacturing information, PCB version information, and ambient
temperature information to the system control and communication unit. In addition, it provides
the +12 V power shutdown signal to the start-delay unit.
3-128

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Intelligent Fan Speed Adjustment Unit

This unit reports the fan rotating speed to the system control and communication unit and adjusts
the fan rotating speed based on the three pulse-width modulation (PWM) signals that are received
from the system control and communication unit. The PWM signals of the fans are isolated from
each other.
The system adjusts the fan rotating speed according to the working temperature, as listed in
Table 3-109.
Table 3-109 Adjustment of the fan rotating speed
Working Temperature
Rotating Speed
25C
Low speed (3200 rotation/min)
25C to 60C
Linear increase in accordance with the

temperature
60C
Full speed (16000 rotation/min)
Board In-Position Unit

This unit reports the board in-position information to the system control and communication
unit.
3.12.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, ESD wrist strap jack, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-59 shows the front panel of the FAN.
Figure 3-59 Front panel of the FAN
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

3-129
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Indicators
Table 3-110 Description of the fan status indicators
Indicator
State
Meaning
FAN
On (green)
The fan is running normally.
On (red)
The fan is faulty.
Off
The fan is not powered on or is not installed.
ESD Wrist Strap Jack

The ESD wrist strap needs to be connected to the ESD wrist strap jack to realize the proper
grounding of the human body.
Labels
The front panel of the FAN has the following labels:
l
ESD protection label: indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive.
Fan warning label: warns you not to touch the fan leaves when the fan is rotating.
3.12.5 Valid Slots

The FAN is inserted in slot 6 in the IDU chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS should
be the same as the physical slot.
Figure 3-60 Slot for the FAN in the IDU chassis
Slot 3
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 4
Slot 10
Figure 3-61 Logical slot for the logical board of the FAN
Slot 5 Slot 6
(PIU) (FAN)
Slot 3
Slot 1
Slot 10
Slot 4
Slot 7
Slot 8
Slot 9

This topic describes the board specifications, including the dimensions, weight, power
consumption, and working voltage.
Table 3-111 lists the technical specifications for the FAN.
3-130

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3 Boards
Table 3-111 Technical specifications for the FAN

Item
Performance
Dimensions
42.0 mm (width) x 217.6 mm (depth) x 28.5 mm height)
Weight
0.200 kg
Power consumption
<2.3 W (room temprature)

<17 W (high temperature)
Working voltage
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
10.8 V-13.2 V (for accessing the 12 V DC power)

3-131
OptiX RTN 910

4 Accessories
Accessories
About This Chapter

The accessories of the OptiX RTN 910 include the E1 panel and the power distribution unit
(PDU). You need to select the accessories based on the actual requirements.
4.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, you can install an E1 panel in the cabinet. The
E1 panel can function as the DDF of the IDU.
4.2 PDU
The PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet. The PDU is used to distribute the input
power to the equipment in the cabinet.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

4-1
OptiX RTN 910

4 Accessories
4.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, you can install an E1 panel in the cabinet. The
E1 panel can function as the DDF of the IDU.
The dimensions of the E1 panel are 483 mm x 33 mm x 42 mm (width x depth x height). An E1
panel provides cable distribution for 16 E1s.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
R9
R10
R11
R12
R13
R14
R15
R16
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
T10
T11
T12
T13
T14
T15
T16
1-8
9-16
Interfaces
Table 4-1 Interface description of an E1 panel
Interface
Description
Type of Connector
T1-T16
Transmit port of the 1st to

16th E1 ports (connected to
the external equipment)
BNC
R1-R16
Receive port of the 1st to 16th

E1 ports (connected to the
external equipment)
1-8
1st to 8th E1 ports (connected

to an IDU)
9-16
9th to 16th E1 ports

(connected to an IDU)
Grounding bolt
Connecting a protection
ground cable
DB37
NOTE
The interface impedance of each E1 port on an E1 panel is 75 ohms.
For the pin assignments of the E1 port that is connected to an IDU, see Figure 4-2 and refer to
Table 4-2.
4-2

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

4 Accessories
Figure 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)
Pos. 1
Pos. 37
Table 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
20
1st E1 receiving differential

signal (+)
21
1st E1 transmitting differential

signal (+)
1st E1 receiving differential

signal (-)
1st E1 transmitting differential

signal (-)
22
2nd E1 receiving differential

signal (+)
23
2nd E1 transmitting differential

signal (+)
2nd E1 receiving differential

signal (-)

signal (-)
24
3rd E1 receiving differential

signal (+)
25
3rd E1 transmitting differential

signal (+)
3rd E1 receiving differential

signal (-)

signal (-)
26
4th E1 receiving differential

signal (+)
27
4th E1 transmitting differential

signal (+)

signal (-)

signal (-)
36

signal (+)
35

signal (+)
17

signal (-)
16

signal (-)
34

signal (+)
33

signal (+)
15

signal (-)
14

signal (-)
32

signal (+)
31

signal (+)
13

signal (-)
12

signal (-)

4-3
OptiX RTN 910

4 Accessories
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
30

signal (+)
29

signal (+)
11

signal (-)
10

signal (-)
Others
Reserved
4.2 PDU
The PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet. The PDU is used to distribute the input
power to the equipment in the cabinet.
4.2.1 Front Panel
There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches
on the front panel of the PDU.
4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle
The PDU realizes the simple power distribution function. The PDU distributes the input power
to the equipment in a cabinet.
4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode
The PDU supports the DC-C and DC-I power distribution modes. By default, the DC-C power
distribution mode is used.
4.2.1 Front Panel

There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches
on the front panel of the PDU.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-3 Front panel of the PDU
1
OUTPUT
ON
OUTPUT
ON
RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-)
OFF
20A
20A 20A 20A
OFF
INPUT
20A
1. Output power terminals (A)
4-4
20A 20A 20A
2. PGND terminals

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

4 Accessories
3. Input power terminals
4. Output power terminals (B)
5. Power switches (A)
6. Power switches (B)
Interfaces
Table 4-3 Interfaces on the PDU
Position
Interface
Description
Output power
terminals (A)
Power output (+)
Power output (-)
PGND
terminals
Grounding stud
of the two-hole
OT terminal
For connecting the PGND cable
Input power
terminals
RTN1(+)
The first power input (+)
RTN2(+)
The second power input (+)
NEG1(-)
The first power input (-)
NEG2(-)
The second power input (-)
Output power
terminals (B)
Power output (+)
Power output (-)
Power
switches (A)
20 A
They are switches for the power outputs. The fuse

capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the right
correspond to output power terminals 1-4 on the A side,
respectively.
Power
switches (B)
20 A
They are switches for the power outputs. The fuse

capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the right
correspond to output power terminals 1-4 on the B side,
respectively.
4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle

The PDU realizes the simple power distribution function. The PDU distributes the input power
to the equipment in a cabinet.
Functions
l
The PDU supports two inputs of -48 V/-60 V DC power.
Each input power supply supports four outputs.
The fuse capacity of the switch of each power output is 20 A.
The PDU supports the DC-C and DC-I power distribution modes.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

4-5
OptiX RTN 910

4 Accessories
Working Principle
The PDU mainly consists of input terminals, output terminals, and miniature circuit breakers
(MCBs). The PDU supports the simple power distribution function for the input power.
Figure 4-4 Functional block diagram of the PDU
OUTPUT A
+
SW1
SW2
INPUT
+
+
SW3
RTN1(+)
BGND
SW4
RTN2(+)
1
2
3
4
OUTPUT B
+
NEG1(-)
BGND
SW1
NEG2(-)
SW2
+
+
SW4
PGND
SW4
1
2
3
4
4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode

The PDU supports the DC-C and DC-I power distribution modes. By default, the DC-C power
distribution mode is used.
The power distribution mode of the PDU is controlled by the short-circuiting copper bar that is
inside the PDU.
DC-C Power Distribution Mode

When the DC-C power distribution mode is used, the short-circuiting copper bar short-circuits
terminal RTN1(+), terminal RTN2(+), and the PGND.
4-6

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

4 Accessories
Figure 4-5 Internal structure of the PDU in DC-C mode
DC-I Power Distribution Mode

To use the DC-I power distribution mode, remove the short-circuiting copper bar.
Figure 4-6 Internal structure of the PDU in DC-I mode
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

4-7
OptiX RTN 910

5 Cables
Cables
About This Chapter

This topic describes the purpose, appearance, and pin assignment information of various cables
of the IDU 910.
5.1 Power Cable
The power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to the power supply device (for example,
the PDU on top of the cabinet), thus conducting the -48 V power to the IDU.
5.2 PGND Cable
The PGND cable is available in two types, namely, the IDU PGND cable and E1 panel PGND
cable.
5.3 IF Jumper
The IF jumper connects the IDU and IF cable. The IF jumper is used with the IF cable to transmit
the IF signal, O&M signal, and -48 V power between the ODU and the IDU.
5.4 XPIC Cable
The XPIC cable is used to transmit the reference IF signal between the two IFX2 boards of the
XPIC working group to realize the XPIC function.
5.5 Fiber Jumper
The fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper is terminated with an
LC/PC connector and is connected to the SDH optical interface or GE optical interface on the
OptiX RTN 910. The connector with which the other end of the fiber jumper is terminated
depends on the type of the optical interface on the equipment to be connected.
5.6 E1 Cables
The E1 cable is available in two types, namely, the E1 cable (Anea 96) to the external equipment
and E1 cable to the E1 panel.
5.7 Orderwire Cable
The orderwire cable connects the orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire
cable are terminated with RJ-11 connectors. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the
PHONE interface on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected
to the interface of the orderwire phone.
5.8 Network Cable
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

5-1
OptiX RTN 910

5 Cables
The network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable
are terminated with RJ-45 connectors.
5-2

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

5 Cables
5.1 Power Cable

The power cable connects the PIU board in the IDU to the power supply device (for example,
the PDU on top of the cabinet), thus conducting the -48 V power to the IDU.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-1 Power cable
Single cord end terminal
1U DC connector
Power cable
Table 5-1 Specifications of the power cable

Model
Cable
Terminal
2.5 mm2 power

cable and
terminal
Power Cable, 450 V/

750 V, H07Z-K-2.5
mm2, Blue/Black,
Low Smoke Zero
Halogen Cable
Common Terminal, Single Cord End Terminal,

Conductor Cross Section 2.5 mm2, 12.5 A,
Insertion Depth 8 mm, Blue
NOTE
In the case of the OptiX RTN 910, the power cable whose core has a sectional area of 2.5 mm2 can extend for
a maximum distance of 50 m.
5.2 PGND Cable

The PGND cable is available in two types, namely, the IDU PGND cable and E1 panel PGND
cable.
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable
The IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of the
external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and the
external equipment share the same ground.
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

5-3
OptiX RTN 910

5 Cables
The E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of
the external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and
the external equipment share the same ground.
5.2.1 IDU PGND Cable

The IDU PGND cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of the
external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the IDU and the
external equipment share the same ground.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-2 IDU PGND cable
Main label
1
Cable tie
H.S.tube
L
1. Bare crimping terminal, OT
2. Bare crimping terminal, OT
Pin Assignment
None.
5.2.2 E1 Panel PGND Cable

The E1 panel PGND cable connects the right ground nut of the E1 panel to the ground point of
the external equipment (for example, the ground support of a cabinet) so that the E1 panel and
the external equipment share the same ground.
5-4

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-3 E1 panel PGND cable
Main label
1
L
Bare crimping terminal, OT
Pin Assignment
None.
5.3 IF Jumper
The IF jumper connects the IDU and IF cable. The IF jumper is used with the IF cable to transmit
the IF signal, O&M signal, and -48 V power between the ODU and the IDU.
The IF jumper is a 2 m RG-223 cable. One end of the IF jumper is terminated with a type-N
connector and is connected to the IF cable. The other end of the IF jumper is terminated with a
TNC connector and is connected to the IF board.
NOTE
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
The 5D IF cable is directly connected to the IF board. Thus, when the 5D IF cable is used, the IF jumper
is not required.
When the RG-8U or 1/2-inch IF cable is used, an IF jumper is required to connect the RG-8U or 1/2inch IF cable to the IF board.

5-5
OptiX RTN 910

5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-4 IF jumper
1
H.S.tube 2 PCS
L = 3 cm
2000 mm
1. RF coaxial cable connector, TNC, male
2. RF coaxial cable connector, type-N, female
Pin Assignment
None.
5.4 XPIC Cable

The XPIC cable is used to transmit the reference IF signal between the two IFX2 boards of the
XPIC working group to realize the XPIC function.
The XPIC cable is an RG316 cable with SMA connectors at both ends. One end of the XPIC
cable is connected to the X-IN port of one IFX2 board of an XPIC working group, and the other
end of the XPIC cable is connected to the X-OUT port of the other IFX2 board of the same XPIC
working group.
When the XPIC function of an IFX2 board is disabled, use an XPIC cable to connect the X-IN
port and X-OUT port of the IFX2 board to loop back signals.
The XPIC cable is available in the following two types:
l
XPIC cable using angle connectors: The XPIC cable using angle connectors is very long,
and is used to connect the two IFX2 boards in the horizontal direction.
XPIC cable using straight connectors: The XPIC cable using straight connectors is very
short, and is used to connect the two IFX2 boards in the vertical direction. The XPIC cable
using straight connectors is also used to connect the X-IN port and X-OUT port of the same
IFX2 board to loop back signals.
The OptiX RTN 910 uses the XPIC cables with angle connectors.
5-6

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-5 View of the XPIC cable
1
L1
1. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, angle, male
Cable Connection Table

None.
5.5 Fiber Jumper

The fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper is terminated with an
LC/PC connector and is connected to the SDH optical interface or GE optical interface on the
OptiX RTN 910. The connector with which the other end of the fiber jumper is terminated
depends on the type of the optical interface on the equipment to be connected.
Types of Fiber Jumpers

Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers
Connector 1
Connector 2
Cable
LC/PC
FC/PC
2 mm single-mode fiber
2 mm multi-mode fiber
LC/PC
SC/PC
LC/PC
LC/PC
NOTE
In the case of the OptiX RTN 910, multi-mode fibers are required to connect to the 1000Base-SX GE optical
interfaces.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

5-7
OptiX RTN 910

5 Cables
Fiber Connectors
The following figures show three common types of fiber connectors, namely, LC/PC connector,
SC/PC connector, and FC/PC connector.
Figure 5-6 LC/PC connector
Figure 5-7 SC/PC connector
5-8

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

5 Cables
Figure 5-8 FC/PC connector
5.6 E1 Cables
The E1 cable is available in two types, namely, the E1 cable (Anea 96) to the external equipment
and E1 cable to the E1 panel.
The E1 cable to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to input or output E1 signals
directly to the external equipment.
5.6.2 E1 Cable to the E1 Panel
The E1 cable to the E1 panel is used together with the E1 transit cable to connect the IDU to the
E1 panel when the E1 panel functions as the DDF. One end of the E1 cable is terminated with
a DB44 connector and is connected to the E1 transit cable. The other end of the E1 cable is
terminated with a DB37 connector and is connected to the E1 panel.
5.6.3 E1 Transit Cable
An E1 transit cable is used to connect an E1 interface on the IDU. One end of the E1 transit
cable is terminated with an Anea 96 connector and is connected to the E1 interface on the IDU.
The other end of the E1 transit cable is terminated with a DB44 connector and is connected to
the E1 cable on the external equipment or to the E1 cable on the E1 panel.

The E1 cable to the external equipment is used when the IDU needs to input or output E1 signals
directly to the external equipment.
Each E1 cable to the external equipment can transmit a maximum of 16 E1 signals. The E1
cables to the external equipment are categorized into two types, namely, 75-ohm coaxial cables
and 120-ohm twisted pair cables.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

5-9
OptiX RTN 910

5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-9 E1 cable
Main label
1
W
X1
A
View A
Pos.96
Cable Connector, Anea, 96PIN,

Female Connector
Pos .1
1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female
NOTE
The appearance of the 120ohm E1 cable is the same as the appearance of the 75ohm E1 cable.
The core of a 75ohm E1 cable is 1.6 mm. Therefore, use 2.5 mm (0.098inch) crimp pliers to terminate
the ends of E1 cables on the DDF frame with 7511 coaxial connectors.
Pin Assignment
Table 5-3 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 cable
Pin
5-10
W1
Core
Serial
No.
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Remark
s
Pin
R1
R2
R3
R4
W2
Remark
s
Core
Serial
No.
25
Tip
T1
26
Ring
27
Tip
T2
28
Ring
29
Tip
T3
30
Ring
31
Tip
T4
32
Ring

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Pin
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
5 Cables
W1
Core
Serial
No.
Tip
10
Ring
11
Tip
12
Ring
13
Tip
14
Ring
15
Tip
16
Ring
17
Ring
18
Tip
19
Ring
20
Tip
21
Ring
22
Tip
23
Ring
24
Tip
49
Ring
50
Tip
51
Ring
52
Tip
53
Ring
54
Tip
55
Ring
56
Shell
Remark
s
Pin
R5
W2
Remark
s
Core
Serial
No.
33
Tip
10
T5
34
Ring
35
Tip
12
T6
36
Ring
37
Tip
14
T7
38
Ring
39
Tip
16
T8
40
Ring
41
Ring
18
T9
42
Tip
43
Ring
20
T10
44
Tip
45
Ring
22
T11
46
Tip
47
Ring
24
T12
48
Tip
73
Ring
26
T13
74
Tip
75
Ring
28
T14
76
Tip
77
Ring
30
T15
78
Tip
79
Ring
32
T16
Tip
80
Tip
Braid
Shell
Braid
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
R6
R7
R8
R9
R10
R11
R12
R13
R14
R15
R16

5-11
OptiX RTN 910

5 Cables
Table 5-4 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 cable

Pin
5-12
W1
Remark
s
Pin
Color of
the
Core
Relatio
n
White
R1
Blue
Twisted
pair
White
R2
Green
Twisted
pair
White
R3
Grey
Twisted
pair
Red
R4
Orange
Twisted
pair
Red
R5
10
Brown
Twisted
pair
11
Black
R6
12
Blue
Twisted
pair
13
Black
R7
14
Green
Twisted
pair
15
Black
R8
16
Grey
Twisted
pair
17
White
R9
18
Blue
Twisted
pair
19
White
R10
20
Green
Twisted
pair
21
White
R11
22
Grey
Twisted
pair
23
Red
R12
24
Orange
Twisted
pair
49
Red
R13
50
Brown
Twisted
pair
W2
Remark
s
Color of
the
Core
Relatio
n
25
White
T1
26
Orange
Twisted
pair
27
White
T2
28
Brown
Twisted
pair
29
Red
T3
30
Blue
Twisted
pair
31
Red
T4
32
Green
Twisted
pair
33
Red
T5
34
Grey
Twisted
pair
35
Black
T6
36
Orange
Twisted
pair
37
Black
T7
38
Brown
Twisted
pair
39
Yellow
T8
40
Blue
Twisted
pair
41
White
T9
42
Orange
Twisted
pair
43
White
T10
44
Brown
Twisted
pair
45
Red
T11
46
Blue
Twisted
pair
47
Red
T12
48
Green
Twisted
pair
73
Red
T13
74
Grey
Twisted
pair

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

5 Cables
Pin
W1
Remark
s
Pin
Color of
the
Core
Relatio
n
51
Black
R14
52
Blue
Twisted
pair
53
Black
R15
54
Green
Twisted
pair
55
Black
R16
56
Grey
Twisted
pair
Shell
Braid
W2
Remark
s
Color of
the
Core
Relatio
n
75
Black
T14
76
Orange
Twisted
pair
77
Black
T15
78
Brown
Twisted
pair
79
Yellow
T16
80
Blue
Twisted
pair
Shell
Braid
5.6.2 E1 Cable to the E1 Panel

The E1 cable to the E1 panel is used together with the E1 transit cable to connect the IDU to the
E1 panel when the E1 panel functions as the DDF. One end of the E1 cable is terminated with
a DB44 connector and is connected to the E1 transit cable. The other end of the E1 cable is
terminated with a DB37 connector and is connected to the E1 panel.
Each E1 cable can transmit eight E1 signals. The interface impedance of the E1 cable is 75 ohms.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-10 E1 cable that connects the IDU to an E1 panel
Pos.1
B
Pos.1
X1
X2
Pos.37
Pos.44
1500 mm
X1. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
X2. Cable connector, type-D, 37 male

5-13
OptiX RTN 910

5 Cables

Table 5-5 Connection table of the E1 cable that connects a PO1/PH1 board to an E1 panel
Connector
X1
Connector
X2
Remarks
Connector
X1
Connector
X2
Remarks
X1.38
X2.20
R1
X1.34
X2.36
R5
X1.23
X2.2
X1.19
X2.17
X1.37
X2.22
X1.33
X2.34
X1.22
X2.4
X1.18
X2.15
X1.36
X2.24
X1.32
X2.32
X1.21
X2.6
X1.17
X2.13
X1.35
X2.26
X1.31
X2.30
X1.20
X2.8
X1.16
X2.11
X1.15
X2.21
X1.11
X2.35
X1.30
X2.3
X1.26
X2.16
X1.14
X2.23
X1.10
X2.33
X1.29
X2.5
X1.25
X2.14
X1.13
X2.25
X1.9
X2.31
X1.28
X2.7
X1.24
X2.12
X1.12
X2.27
X1.8
X2.29
X1.27
X2.9
X1.7
X2.10
Shell
Braid
Shell
Braid
R2
R3
R4
T1
T2
T3
T4
R6
R7
R8
T5
T6
T7
T8
5.6.3 E1 Transit Cable

An E1 transit cable is used to connect an E1 interface on the IDU. One end of the E1 transit
cable is terminated with an Anea 96 connector and is connected to the E1 interface on the IDU.
The other end of the E1 transit cable is terminated with a DB44 connector and is connected to
the E1 cable on the external equipment or to the E1 cable on the E1 panel.
An E1 transit cable can be connected to a 75-ohm E1 interface or a 120-ohm E1 interface.
5-14

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-11 E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44 connectors
View B
Pos.44 #4-40
M092
Label 2
Main Label
X3
Pos.1
W2
W1
Label 1
X1
X2
400
X1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female
X2/X3. Cable connector, type-D, 44 female
Label 1: "CHAN 0-7"
Label 2: "CHAN 8-15"

Table 5-6 Connection table of the E1 transit cable terminated with the Anea 96 and DB44
connectors
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Wire
Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2/X3
Remarks
Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2/X3
Remarks
W1
X1.2
X2.38
R1
X1.10
X2.34
R5
X1.1
X2.23
X1.9
X2.19
X1.26
X2.15
X1.34
X2.11
X1.25
X2.30
X1.33
X2.26
X1.4
X2.37
X1.12
X2.33
X1.3
X2.22
X1.11
X2.18
X1.28
X2.14
X1.36
X2.10
X1.27
X2.29
X1.35
X2.25
X1.6
X2.36
X1.14
X2.32
X1.5
X2.21
X1.13
X2.17
T1
R2
T2
R3

T5
R6
T6
R7
5-15
OptiX RTN 910

5 Cables
Wire
W2
Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2/X3
Remarks
Connecto
r X1
Connecto
r X2/X3
Remarks
X1.30
X2.13
T3
X1.38
X2.9
T7
X1.29
X2.28
X1.37
X2.24
X1.8
X2.35
X1.16
X2.31
X1.7
X2.20
X1.15
X2.16
X1.32
X2.12
X1.40
X2.8
X1.31
X2.27
X1.39
X2.7
X1.18
X3.38
X1.50
X3.34
X1.17
X3.23
X1.49
X3.19
X1.42
X3.15
X1.74
X3.11
X1.41
X3.30
X1.73
X3.26
X1.20
X3.37
X1.52
X3.33
X1.19
X3.22
X1.51
X3.18
X1.44
X3.14
X1.76
X3.10
X1.43
X3.29
X1.75
X3.25
X1.22
X3.36
X1.54
X3.32
X1.21
X3.21
X1.53
X3.17
X1.46
X3.13
X1.78
X3.9
X1.45
X3.28
X1.77
X3.24
X1.24
X3.35
X1.56
X3.31
X1.23
X3.20
X1.55
X3.16
X1.48
X3.12
X1.80
X3.8
X1.47
X3.27
X1.79
X3.7
Shell
Braid
Shell
Braid
R4
T4
R9
T9
R10
T10
R11
T11
R12
T12
R8
T8
R13
T13
R14
T14
R15
T15
R16
T16
5.7 Orderwire Cable

The orderwire cable connects the orderwire phone to the equipment. Both ends of the orderwire
cable are terminated with RJ-11 connectors. One end of the orderwire cable is connected to the
PHONE interface on the CSHA/CSHB/CSHC. The other end of the orderwire cable is connected
to the interface of the orderwire phone.
5-16

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

5 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-12 Orderwire cable
1
Main label
6
X1
X2
1. Orderwire interface, RJ-11 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 5-7 Pin assignment of the orderwire cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Function
X1.3
X2.3
Tip
X1.4
X2.4
Ring
5.8 Network Cable

The network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable
are terminated with RJ-45 connectors.
Two types of interfaces use the RJ-45 connectors, which are the medium dependent interface
(MDI) and MDI-X. The MDI interface is used by the terminal equipment, for example, the
network card. For the pin assignment information of the MDI interface, see Table 5-8. The MDIX interface is used by the network equipment. For the pin assignment information of the MDIX interface, see Table 5-9.
Table 5-8 Pin assignment of the MDI interface
Pin
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
TX+
BIDA+

(+)
TX-
BIDA-

(-)
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+

(+)

5-17
OptiX RTN 910

5 Cables
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
Reserved
BIDC+

(+)
Reserved
BIDC-

(-)
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-

(-)
Reserved
BIDD+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD-

(-)
Table 5-9 Pin assignment of the MDI-X interface

Pin
10/100BASE-T(X)
1000BASE-T
Signal
Function
Signal
Function
RX+
Receiving data (+)
BIDB+

(+)
RX-
Receiving data (-)
BIDB-

(-)
TX+
BIDA+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD+

(+)
Reserved
BIDD-

(-)
TX-
BIDA-

(-)
Reserved
BIDC+

(+)
Reserved
BIDC-

(-)
Straight through cables are used between MDI and MDI-X interfaces, and crossover cables are
used between MDI interfaces or between MDI-X interfaces. The only difference between the
straight through cable and crossover cable is with regard to the pin assignment.
The NMS/COM interface, NE interface, and Ethernet service electrical interfaces of the OptiX
RTN 910 support the MDI and MDI-X autosensing modes. Straight through cables and crossover
5-18

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

5 Cables
cables can be used to connect the NMS/COM interface, EXT interface, and Ethernet service
electrical interfaces to MDI or MDI-X interfaces.
Cable Diagram
Figure 5-13 Network cable
1
Label 1 Main Label
Label 2
1. Network port connector, RJ-45
Pin Assignment
Table 5-10 Pin assignment of the straight through cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
Relation
X1.1
X2.1
White/Orange
Twisted pair
X1.2
X2.2
Orange
X1.3
X2.3
White/Green
X1.6
X2.6
Green
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.5
X2.5
White/Blue
X1.7
X2.7
White/Brown
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Table 5-11 Pin assignment of the crossover cable
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
Relation
X1.6
X2.2
Orange
Twisted pair
X1.3
X2.1
White/Orange
X1.1
X2.3
White/Green
X1.2
X2.6
Green
X1.4
X2.4
Blue

Twisted pair
Twisted pair
5-19
OptiX RTN 910

5 Cables
5-20
Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
X1.5
X2.5
White/Blue
X1.7
X2.7
White/Brown
X1.8
X2.8
Brown

Relation
Twisted pair
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

A Parameters Description
Parameters Description
This topic describes the parameters used in this document.

A.1 Parameters for NE Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs).
A.2 Parameters for Cable Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing cables.
A.3 Parameters for Communications Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management.
A.4 Radio Link Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links.
A.5 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP).
A.6 SDH/PDH Service Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.
A.7 Clock Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks.
A.8 Parameters for Ethernet Services
This topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services.
A.9 Ethernet Protocol Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol.
A.10 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration and
maintenance (OAM).
A.11 QoS Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS.
A.12 RMON Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances.
A.13 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.
A.14 Parameters for Board Interfaces
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-1
OptiX RTN 910

This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces.
A.15 Parameters for Overhead
This topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead.
A-2

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

A.1 Parameters for NE Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing network elements (NEs).
A.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching
This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.
A.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation.
A.1.3 Parameter Description: Object Attribute_Changing NE IDs
This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.
A.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization
This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.
A.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE Time
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NE
time.
A.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the standard NTP key.
A.1.7 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions of NEs
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functions
of an NE.
A.1.1 Parameter Description: NE Searching

This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for NEs.
Navigation Path
On the Main Topology, choose File > Discovery > NE.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-3
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters for the Search Field

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Address Type
IP Address of GNE
IP Address Range of GNE
If the OSI protocol is

used on the DCN, you
can search for an NE
based on NSAP
Address only.
If the IP protocol is
used on the DCN, you
can search for an NE
based on IP Address of
GNE or IP Address
Range of GNE.
To search for all the

NEs that communicate
with the gateway NE,
select IP Address
Range of GNE.
To select the gateway

NE only, select IP
Address of GNE.
NSAP Address
IP Address Range of GNE
NOTE
If Address Type is set to IP
Address of GNE or IP
Address Range of GNE,
and if the U2000 (server)
and the gateway NE are
located in different network
segments, ensure that the
U2000 and relevant routers
are configured with the IP
routes for the network
segment in which the
U2000 and gateway NE are
located.
If Address Type is set to
NSAP Address, ensure that
the OSI protocol stack is
installed.
A-4

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Search Address
If Address Type is set

to IP Address of
GNE, enter the IP
address of the gateway
NE, such as 129.9.x.x.

to IP Address Range
of GNE, enter the
number of the IP
network segment in
which the gateway NE
is located, such as
129.9.255.255.

to NSAP Address,
enter the NSAP address
of the gateway NE.
User Name
This parameter specifies

the user name of the
gateway NE.
Password

the password of the
gateway NE.
Parameter for Searching for NEs

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Search for NE
Selected
Selected

whether to search for all
the NEs in the specified
domain.
Deselected
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-5
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Create NE after search
Selected
Deselected
To create NEs in
batches, it is
recommended that you
select Create NE after
search. The NEs are
automatically created
after they are found.
After Create NE after

search is selected,
enter NE User and
Password that are used
for creating an NE.
Deselected
NOTE
If only Create NE after
search is selected, Search
for NE is selected
automatically.
NE User
Password
Upload after create
Selected
Deselected
This parameter
specifies the user name
to be entered when an
NE is created.
This parameter is valid

only when Create NE
after search is
selected.
This parameter
specifies the password
NE is created.

only when Create NE
after search is
selected.
This parameter
specifies whether to
automatically upload
the NE data after the
NE is found and
created.
If only Upload after

create is selected,
Search for NE and
Create NE after
search are selected
automatically.
Deselected
A-6

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter for the Found NEs

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE ID
This parameter indicates

the ID of the found NE,
which consists of
extended ID and NE ID.
For example, in the case of
NE9-25, the value 9
indicates the extended ID,
and the value 25 indicates
the NE ID.
GNE Address

the address of the gateway
NE that is connected to the
found NE.
GNE ID

the ID of the gateway NE
that is connected to the
found NE.
Created As GNE
Yes
Yes
This parameter
specifies the password
NE is created.

only when Create NE
after search is
selected.
No
Common
Connection Mode
Common
The communication
between the client and the
server is encrypted if this
parameter is set to
Security SSL.
Security SSL
Port
1400

the communication port.
NE Status
Created

whether the found NE is
created.
Uncreated
A.1.2 Parameter Description: NE Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are related to NE creation.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-7
OptiX RTN 910

Navigation Path
1.
In the Physical View, right-click New > NE.
2.
Choose RTN Series > OptiX RTN 910 from the Object Tree.
Parameters on the Main Interface

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Type

the type of the NE to be
created.
ID
The ID refers to the

basic ID. If the
extended ID is not
used, the basic ID of an
NE must be unique on
the networks that are
managed by the same
NMS.
This parameter is set

according to the
planning information.
NOTE
The NE ID consisting of the
basic ID and extended ID
identifies an NE on the
NMS.
Extended ID
1 to 254
If the number of existing

NEs does not exceed the
range represented by the
basic ID, do not change
the extended ID.
Name
This parameter
specifies the name of
the NE.
After you specifies the

name of the NE, the
name is displayed
under the icon of the
NE.
Remarks
A-8


the remarks of the NE.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Gateway Type
Non-Gateway
Non-Gateway
This parameter is set to

Gateway if the new NE
is a gateway NE.
This parameter is set to

Non-Gateway if the
new NE is a nongateway NE.

according to the DCN
planning if the new NE
can function as a
gateway NE or a nongateway NE.
Gateway
Affiliated Gateway

the gateway NE of the new
NE when Gateway Type
is set to Non-Gateway.
Affiliated Gateway
Protocol
IP
IP
This parameter needs to

be set when Gateway
Type is set to
Gateway.
When the OSI over

DCC solution is used,
this parameter is set to
OSI.
In other cases, this

parameter is set to IP.
OSI
IP Address

the IP address of the new
NE. This parameter needs
to be set when Affiliated
Gateway Protocol is set
to IP.
Connection Mode
Common
Common
The communication
between the client and the
server is encrypted if this
parameter is set to
Security SSL.
Security SSL
Port
1400

the communication port.
NE User

the user name to be
entered when an NE is
created.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-9
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Password

the password to be entered
when an NE is created.
NSAP Address

the NSAP address of the
new NE. This parameter
needs to be set when
Affiliated Gateway
Protocol is set to OSI.
You need to set the area ID
only, and the other parts
are automatically
generated by the NE.
A.1.3 Parameter Description: Object Attribute_Changing NE IDs

This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing NE IDs.
Navigation Path
1.
In the Main Topology, right-click the NE whose ID needs to be modified.
2.
Choose Object Attributes.
3.
Click Modify NE ID.
Parameters for Changing NE IDs

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
New ID
The new ID refers to

the basic ID. If the
extended ID is not
used, the basic ID of an
NE must be unique on
the networks that are
managed by the same
NMS.

according to the
NOTE
The NE ID consisting of the
basic ID and extended ID
identifies an NE on the
NMS.
A-10

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
New Extended ID
1 to 254
If the number of existing

NEs does not exceed the
range represented by the
basic ID, do not change
the extended ID.
A.1.4 Parameter Description: NE Time Synchronization

This topic describes the parameters that are used for synchronizing the time of NEs.
Navigation Path
1.
Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from

the Main Menu.
2.
Click the NE Time Synchronization tab.
Parameters for NE Time Synchronization

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name

the name of the NE.
NE ID

the ID of the NE.
Synchronous Mode
Standard NTP
Null
If this parameter is set

to NM, the NE
synchronizes the time
of the NMS server.

to Standard NTP, the
NE synchronizes the
Network Time
Protocol (NTP) server
through the standard
NTP.
NM
Null
Standard NTP
Authentication
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled


only when Synchronous
Mode is set to Standard
NTP.
A-11
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters for the Standard NTP Server

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Standard NTP Server

Identifier
NE ID
NE ID
If the NE functions as
the gateway NE, this
If the NE functions as a
non-gateway NE and
communicates with the
gateway NE through
the HWECC protocol,
NE ID.
non-gateway NE and
communicates with the
gateway NE through
the IP protocol, this
If the NE functions as
the gateway NE, this
parameter is set to the
IP address of the
external NTP server.
non-gateway NE, this
ID or IP address of the
gateway NE.
If the NTP server does

not need to
authenticated, this
value "0".
If the NTP server needs

to be authenticated, the
authentication is
performed according to
the allocated key of the
NTP server. In this
case, the NE
authenticates the NTP
server based on the key
and the corresponding
password (specified in
the management of the
standard NTP key).
Standard NTP Server
Standard NTP Server

Key
A-12
IP
0 to 1024

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters for Setting Automatic Synchronization

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Synchronization
Starting Time
This parameter
specifies the start time
of the synchronization
period. After this
parameter is specified,
the NMS and the NE
synchronize the time
once at the intervals of
Synchronization
Period(days).
It is recommended that
you use the default
value.
This parameter
indicates whether
Synchronization
Starting Time is the
daylight saving time.

according to the actual
situation.
This parameter
indicates the period of
synchronizing the time
of the NE with the time
of the NMS.
you use the default
value.
Selected
DST
Deselected
Deselected
Synchronization Period
(days)
1 to 300
A.1.5 Parameter Description: Localization Management of the NE

Time
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for localization management of the NE
time.
Navigation Path
1.
On the Main Topology, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time
Localization Management.
2.
Select the NE for time localization management from the Object Tree, and then click
.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-13
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters for Localization Management of the NE Time

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE
This parameter indicates the name of the

NE.
TimeZone
This parameter indicates the time zone.
DST
This parameter indicates whether DST is

enabled.
Parameters for Time Zone

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Time Zone
After the time zone is changed, the

current time of the NE is changed
accordingly.
This parameter is set according to the

place where the NE is located.
The parameters related to daylight saving

time can be valid only when this
parameter is selected.

situation whether daylight saving time is
used in the place where the NE is located.
DST
Selected
Deselected
Deselected
Offset
1 to 120
This parameter specifies the offset value of

the daylight saving time.
WEEK
This parameter specifies the method of

adjusting the daylight saving time.
Unit: minute(s)
Start Rule
DATE
WEEK
Start Time
This parameter specifies the start daylight

saving time.
End Rule
DATE
WEEK

adjusting the daylight saving time.
This parameter specifies the end daylight

saving time.
WEEK
End Time
A.1.6 Parameter Description: Standard NTP Key Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the standard NTP key.
A-14

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Navigation Path
1.
Choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > NE Time Synchronization from

the Main Menu.
2.
Click the Standard NTP Key Management tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name

the name of the NE.
NE ID

the ID of the NE.
Key
1 to 1024
This parameter
indicates the key for
NTP authentication.

according to the
requirements of the
This parameter
indicates the password
that corresponds to
Key.

according to the
requirements of the
Password
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-15
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Trusted
Yes
Yes
When this parameter is

set to No, the key
verification is not
trusted. After receiving
the key, the NE rejects
the clock
synchronization
service.

set to Yes, the key
verification is trusted.
After receiving the key,
the NE provides the
clock synchronization
service.
After receiving an
unknown or incorrect
key, the NE rejects the
clock synchronization
service. Hence, it is
set a trusted key only.
No
A.1.7 Parameter Description: Automatic Disabling of the Functions

of NEs
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for automatically disabling the functions
of an NE.
Navigation Path
1.
On the Main Topology, choose Configuration > NE Batch Configuration > Automatic
Disabling of NE Function.
2.
Select the NE whose functions need to be automatically disabled from the Object Tree, and
.
then click
Parameters for Automatically Disabling the Functions of NEs

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name

NE.
NE Type
OptiX RTN 910
This parameter indicates the type of the NE.
A-16

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Operation Type
This parameter indicates the type of the

operation, such as loopback, and shutdown
of the laser.
Auto Disabling
Disabled
Enabled
This parameter specifies whether to

automatically disable the operations such as
loopback, and shutdown of the laser.
This parameter specifies the time of

automatically disabling the operations such
as loopback, and shutdown of the laser.
Enabled
Auto Disabling
Time(min)
1 to 2880
A.2 Parameters for Cable Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing cables.
A.2.1 Parameter Description: Fiber Search
This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for fibers.
A.2.2 Parameter Description: Fiber Creation
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating fibers.
A.2.3 Parameter Description: Radio Link Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating radio links.
A.2.1 Parameter Description: Fiber Search

This topic describes the parameters that are used for searching for fibers.
Navigation Path
1.
Choose File > Discovery > Fiber from the Main Menu.
2.
Select the board of the NE on which the fiber needs to be searched for or the IF board of
the NE on which radio links need to be searched for from the Subject Tree, and the click
.
3.
Click Search.
Parameters for Searching For Fibers

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source NE

the name of the source NE
on which fibers or radio
links are found.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-17
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Board

the board and slot of the
source NE on which fibers
or radio links are found.
Source Port

the number of the port on
the board of the source NE
links are found.
Sink NE

the name of the sink NE on
which fibers or radio links
are found.
Sink Board

the board and slot of the
sink NE on which fibers or
radio links are found.
Sink Port

the number of the port on
the board of the sink NE
links are found.
Level

the level of the found fiber
or the working mode of
the found radio link.
Name

the name of the found
fiber or radio link.
Direction
Two-Fiber Bidirectional

the direction of the found
fiber.

whether the found fiber or
radio link conflicts with
the fiber or radio link
displayed on the NMS.

whether the cable is
created successfully.

the type of the found fiber
or cable.
Single-Fiber
Unidirectional
Conflict with logical link
(Y/N)
Yes
Operation Result
Succeeded
No
Failed
Fiber/Cable Type
A-18

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

A.2.2 Parameter Description: Fiber Creation

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating fibers.
Navigation Path
1.
Choose File > Create > Link from the Main Menu. The Add Object dialog box is
displayed.
2.
Choose Link > Fiber from the Object Tree.
Parameters for Fibers

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Create Ways
Common Ways
Common Ways
If Common Ways is
selected, fibers need to
created one by one.
If Batch Ways is
selected, fibers can be
created in batches.
Batch Ways
Fiber/Cable Type
Fiber
Fiber

that Fiber/Cable Type to
be created is a fiber.
Name

the name of the fiber to be
created. The name
consists of up to 255
characters, excluding
certain special marks such
as | * ? " < >.
Remarks

the remark information
customized by the user.
Source NE

the source NE on which
the fiber needs to be
created.
Source NE Slot-Board
Type-Port

the board, slot, and port of
the fiber needs to be
created.
Rate Level

the level that corresponds
to the port on the board.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-19
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Medium Type
G.652
G.652

the medium type of the
fiber.
G.653
G.654
G.655
Sink NE

the sink NE on which the
fiber needs to be created.
Sink NE Slot-Board
Type-Port

fiber needs to be created.
Direction
Two-Fiber Bidirectional

the direction of the fiber to
be created.
Single-Fiber
Unidirectional
Length(km)

the length of the fiber to be
created.
Attenuation(dB)

the attenuation of the fiber
to be created.
Created On

the time when the fiber is
created.
Creator

the name of the person
who creates the fiber.
Maintainer

who maintains the fiber.
A.2.3 Parameter Description: Radio Link Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating radio links.
Navigation Path
A-20
1.
Choose File > Create > Link from the Main Menu. The Add Object dialog box is
displayed.
2.
Choose Link > Microwave Link from the Object Tree.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters for Microwave Links

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Fiber/Cable Type
Radio Link
Radio Link

that a radio link needs to
be created is Fiber/Cable
Type.
Name

the name of the radio link
to be created. The name
consists of up to 255
characters, excluding
certain special marks such
as | * ? " < >.
Remarks

the remark information
customized by the user.
Source NE
The parameter specifies

the radio link needs to be
created.
Source NE Slot-Board
Type-Port

the radio link needs to be
created.
Rate Level

the level that corresponds
to the port on the IF board.
Sink NE
The parameter specifies

radio link needs to be
created.
Sink NE Slot-Board
Type-Port

radio link needs to be
created.
Length(km)

the length of the radio link
to be created.
Created On

the time when the radio
link is created.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-21
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Creator

who creates the radio link.
Maintainer

who maintains the radio
link.
A.3 Parameters for Communications Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for communications management.
This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.
A.3.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the DCC rate.
A.3.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent Transmission Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management.
A.3.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port Extended ECC
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports.
A.3.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management.
A.3.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management.
A.3.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP Route Management Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes.
A.3.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF Parameter Settings
This topic describes the parameters that are used for OSPF settings.
A.3.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the proxy ARP.
A.3.10 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer Parameter
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocol
model.
A.3.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table
This topic describes the parameters that are related to OSI routing tables.
A.3.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the OSI tunnels.
A.3.13 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN.
A.3.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting
A-22

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting ports of the inband DCN.
A.3.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting a protocol of the inband DCN.
A.3.16 Parameter Description: Access Control
This topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS.
A.3.17 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control
This topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.
A.3.1 Parameter Description: NE Communication Parameter

Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE communication setting.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication >
Communication Parameters from the Function Tree.
Parameters for NE Communication Setting

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP Address
Before delivery,
the IP address of
the NE is set to
129.9.0.x. The
letter x indicates
the basic ID.
Gateway IP Address
0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask
255.255.0.0
In the HWECC solution, an IP address is

set according to the following rules:
l The IP address, subnet mask, and
default gateway of the gateway NE
should meet the planning requirements
of the external DCN.
l If an NE uses the extended ECC, the IP
address must be in the same network
segment.
l The IP address of other NEs should be
set according to the NE ID. In this case,
the IP address of an NE should be set
in the format of 0x81000000+ID. That
is, if the ID is 0x090001, the IP address
should be set to 129.9.0.1.
Extended ID
1 to 254
Connection Mode
Common
Security SSL
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Common
Do not change the extended ID when

the number of actual NEs does not
exceed the range permitted by the basic
NE ID.
It is recommended that this parameter

takes the default value.
The communication between the client

and the server is encrypted if this
parameter is set to Security SSL.

A-23
OptiX RTN 910

A.3.2 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Rate

Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the DCC rate.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC
Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the DCC Rate Configuration tab.
Parameters for DCC Rate Configuration

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
This parameter indicates the port that is

connected to the DCC channel.
NOTE
On the NMS interface, the first interface on the
system control, switching, and clock board (like
1-CSHC-1) corresponds to its external clock
interface.
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Channel Type
D1-D3
D4-D12
D1-D12
D1-D1
Enabled (for line

ports)
It is recommended that you use the default

value, except for the following cases:
Disabled (for
external clock
interfaces)
If the port is connected to the other ECC

subnet, Enabled/Disabled is set to
Disabled.
If the port is connected to a third-party

network and does not exchange the
network management information with
other ports, Enabled/Disabled is set to
Disabled.
If external clock interfaces are used to

transparently transmit the DCC solution,
Enabled/Disabled is set to Enabled for
the external clock interfaces.
D1-D1 (for the PDH

radio whose
transmission
capacity is less than
16xE1)

l
If the IP over DCC or OSI over DCC

solution is adopted, Channel Type for
the SDH line ports is set to a value that is
the same as the value for third-party
network.
If the DCC transparent transmission

solution is adopted, the value of Channel
Type for the SDH line ports should not
conflict with the value that is set for the
third-party network.
D1-D3 (for other

cases)
A-24

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
DCC Resources
This parameter indicates the DCC

resources.
Communication
Status
This parameter indicates the

communication status.
Protocol Type
HWECC
HWECC

TCP/IP
OSI
User
LAPD Role
User
If the IP over DCC solution is adopted,

Protocol Type is set to TCP/IP.
If the OSI over DCC solution is adopted,

Protocol Type is set to OSI.
This parameter is valid only when

Protocol Type is set to OSI.
In the case of a DCC channel, LAPD

Role must be set to User for one end and
must be set to Network for the other end.
Network
A.3.3 Parameter Description: DCC Management_DCC Transparent

Transmission Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for DCC transparent transmission management.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCC
2.
Click the DCC Transparent Transmission Management tab.
Parameters for DCC Transparent Transmission Management

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Timeslot/
Porta
This parameter indicates the source timeslot

or port.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-25
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Transparent
Transmission of
Overhead Bytes at
Source Port
D1
Only one overhead byte can be selected

each time.
X1, X2, X3, and X4 indicate the

customized overhead bytes that are used
for transmitting asynchronous data
services.
An overhead byte cannot be a byte that is

used. For example, an overhead byte
cannot be a byte in the used DCC channel.
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
E1
E2
F1
K1
K2
X1
X2
X3
X4
Sink Timeslot/
Porta
A-26
This parameter indicates the sink timeslot or

port.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Transparent
Transmission of
Overhead Bytes at
Sink Port
D1
Only one overhead byte can be selected

each time.
An overhead byte cannot be a byte that is

used. For example, an overhead byte
cannot be a byte in the used DCC channel.
Generally, Transparent Transmission

of Overhead Bytes at Sink Port can be
set to a value that is the same as or
different from the value in the case of
Source Timeslot/Port.
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
E1
E2
F1
K1
K2
X1
X2
X3
X4
NOTE
a. A bidirectional cross-connection is set up between the source port and the sink port. Hence, a port functions
the same regardless of the source port or sink port.
A.3.4 Parameter Description: ECC Management_Ethernet Port

Extended ECC
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the extended ECCs of Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
Click an NE in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > ECC Management from the
Function Tree.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-27
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters for the ECC Extended Mode

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ECC Extended
Mode
Automatically
Assign
Automatically
Assign

value.
Specified mode
Parameters for Setting the Server

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP
0.0.0.0
This parameter indicates the IP address of

the server.
Port
1601 to 1699
1601
This parameter is valid only when ECC

Extended Mode is set to Specified
mode.
This parameter can be set only when the

NE functions as the server of the
extended ECC. In normal cases, the NE
that is close to the U2000 functions as the
server.
This parameter can be set to any value

from 1601 to 1699.
Parameters for Setting the Client

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Opposite IP
0.0.0.0
Port
1601 to 1699
1601
l
This parameter is valid only when ECC

Extended Mode is set to Specified
mode.
This parameter can be set only when the
NE functions as the client of the extended
ECC. Except for the NE that functions as
the server, all other NEs that use the
extended ECC can function as the client.
Opposite IP and Port are respectively set
to the IP address of the server NE and the
specified pot number.
A.3.5 Parameter Description: NE ECC Link Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for NE ECC link management.
A-28

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > NE ECC
Link Management from the Function Tree.
Parameter for NE ECC Link Management

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination NE
This parameter specifies the sink NE of the

ECC connection.
Transfer NE
This parameter specifies the next transfer

NE and the direction of the ECC route.
Distance
0 to 64
This parameter specifies the number of

NEs (excluding the source NE and sink
NE) through which the ECC route passes,
namely, the number of ECC packet
forwarding attempts. The value can be set
to a value that is greater than the number
of actual ECC packet forwarding
attempts. If the value is set to a value that
is less than the number of actual ECC
packet forwarding attempts, however, the
destination NE fails to be accessed.
If the value is set to 0, it indicates that the

source NE is adjacent to the destination
NE.
This parameter indicates that multiple

ECC routes from the source NE to the
destination NE may be available. An
ECC route of a higher priority is selected
to transmit the packets to the destination
NE.
If the ECC route is generated

automatically, the priority is 4.
If the ECC route is added manually, the

priority is 5.
Level
Mode
Manual
This parameter indicates the ECC routing

mode.
This parameter specifies the physical port

through which the ECC route passes. The
value of this parameter is automatically
assigned the NE.
Automatic
SCC No.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-29
OptiX RTN 910

A.3.6 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP

Route Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for IP route management.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > IP
Protocol Stack Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the IP Route Management tab.
Parameters for IP Route Management

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination
Address
This parameter specifies the destination

address of the packets. This parameter can
be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or
C only, but cannot be set to the IP address
of the local host or the loopback address
with the 127 field.
Mask
This parameter indicates the subnet mask of

the destination address of the packets.
Gateway IP
This parameter specifies the IP address of

the gateway on the subnetwork where the
NE is located, namely, the IP address of the
next hop of the packets.
Protocol
DIRECT
DIRECT: indicates the route between

the local NE and an adjacent NE.
STATIC: indicates the route that is

created manually.
OSPF: indicates the route between the

local NE and a non-adjacent NE.
RIP: indicates the route that is discovered

by the routing information protocol.
OSPF_ASE: indicates the route whose

Destination Address is beyond the
OSPF domain.
OSPF_NSSA: indicates the route whose

Destination Address is in a not so stubby
area (NSSA).
A route can be deleted in the case of

STATIC only, but cannot be edited in the
other cases.
Compared with a dynamic route, a static

route has a higher priority. If any conflict
occurs, the static route is preferred.
STATIC
OSPF
RIP
OSPF_ASE
OSPF_NSSA
A-30

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Interface
This parameter indicates the interface that is

used on the route. Interface is a concept
specified in the TCP/IP protocol stack. In
the TCP/IP protocol stack, you can create
multiple types of interface, such as a
loopback interface (namely, the interface
whose IP address is 127.0.0.1), an Ethernet
interface, and PPP interface. Each interface
must have a unique interface name.
Hop Count
0 to 65535
This parameter indicates the maximum

number of routers through which the
packets are transmitted. Hop Count is used
to indicate the overhead bytes that are
transmitted to the destination address. The
smaller the value, the less the overhead
bytes. If multiple routes can reach the same
destination address, a route whose overhead
is less is preferred to transmit the packets.
Working Status
Working
This parameter indicates whether the

current IP route is available.
Unworking
A.3.7 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_IP

Route Management Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for new static IP routes.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the IP Route Management tab.
3.
Click New.
Parameters for Creating IP Routes

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination
Address

address of the packets. This parameter can
be set to a valid IP address of class A, B, or
C only, but cannot be set to the IP address
of the local host or the loopback address
with the 127 field.
Subnet Mask
This parameter indicates the subnet mask of

the destination address of the packets.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-31
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Gateway
This parameter specifies the IP address of

the gateway on the subnetwork where the
NE is located, namely, the IP address of the
next hop of the packets.
A.3.8 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack Management_OSPF

Parameter Settings
This topic describes the parameters that are used for OSPF settings.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the OSPF Parameter Settings tab.
OSPF Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Area
The OSPF protocol supports the division

of NEs into multiple areas. Only the NEs
in the same area can transmit the OSPF
packets to each other to generate the
route.
When setting the area for the NEs, you

need to set the NEs that run the OSPF
protocol to the same area.
DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the Hello

packet timer at the DCC interface.
The Hello packets are used for detecting

the neighbor router on the network that is
connected to the router. By periodically
transmitting the hello packets, you can
determine whether the interface on the
neighbor router is still in the active status.
DCC Hello Timer(s) determines the

interval for the hello packet timer to
transmit the hello packets.
In the case of two interconnected NEs,

DCC Hello Timer(s) must be set to the
same value.
DCC Hello Timer

(s)
A-32
1 to 255

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
DCC Neighbor
Dead Time(s)
1 to 65535
DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies

the dead time of a neighbor router at the
DCC interface.
If the local router fails to receive the hello

packets from the connected neighbor
router within the time specified in DCC
Neighbor Dead Time(s), it considers
that the neighbor router is unavailable.
DCC Neighbor Dead Time(s) should be

set to a value that is a minimum of twice
the value of DCC Hello Timer(s).
In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC

Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to
the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF
protocol fails to operate normally.
DCC
Retransmission
Timer(s)
1 to 65535
DCC Retransmission Timer(s) specifies

the interval for transmitting a request
through the DCC interface to retransmit the
link state advertisement (LSA) packets.
DCC Delay(s)
1 to 3600
DCC Delay(s) specifies the delay time to

transmit the LSA packets through the
DCC interface.
The LSA packets in the LSA database of

the local router are aged as the time
elapses, but are not aged when they are
being transmitted on the network. Hence,
before the LSA packets are transmitted,
you need to increase the age of the LSA
packets based on the value of DCC Delay
(s).
DCC Hello Timer(s) specifies the hello

packet timer at the LAN interfaces.
The hello packets are used for detecting

the neighbor router on the network that is
connected to the router. By periodically
transmitting the hello packets, you can
determine whether the interface on the
neighbor router is still in the active status.
LAN Hello Timer(s) determines the

interval for the hello packet timer of the
NE to transmit the hello packets.
In the case of two interconnected NEs,

LAN Hello Timer(s) must be set to the
same value.
LAN Hello Timer

(s)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
1 to 255

A-33
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAN Neighbor
Dead Time(s)
1 to 65535
LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) specifies

the dead time of a neighbor router at the
LAN interface.
If the local router fails to receive the hello

packets from the connected neighbor
router within the time specified in LAN
Neighbor Dead Time(s), it considers
that the neighbor router is unavailable.
LAN Neighbor Dead Time(s) should be

set to a value that is a minimum of two
times the value of LAN Neighbor Dead
Time(s).
In the case of adjacent NEs, DCC

Neighbor Dead Time(s) must be set to
the same value. Otherwise, the OSPF
protocol fails to operate normally.
LAN
Retransmission
Timer(s)
1 to 65535
LAN Retransmission Timer(s) specifies

the time for transmitting a request for
retransmission of the LSA packets through
the LAN interface.
LAN Delay(s)
1 to 3600
LAN Delay(s) specifies the delay time to

transmit the LSA packets through the
LAN interface.
The LSA packets in the LSA database of

the local router are aged as the time
elapses, but are not aged when they are
being transmitted on the network. Hence,
before the LSA packets are transmitted,
you need to increase the age of the LSA
packets based on the value of LAN Delay
(s).
A.3.9 Parameter Description: IP Protocol Stack_Proxy ARP

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the proxy ARP.
Navigation Path
A-34
1.
2.
Click the Proxy ARP tab.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters for configuring the proxy ARP

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Proxy ARP
Disabled
Disabled
The proxy ARP enables the NEs in the

same network segment but different
domains to communicate with each other.
To realize communication between such

NEs, the source NE sends the ARP
broadcast packet to address the route to
the destination NE. The NE with the
proxy ARP function enabled checks the
routing table after sensing the ARP
broadcast packet. If the routing table
contains the destination address that the
ARP broadcast packet looks for, the NE
returns a ARP spoofing packet, which
enables the NE that sends the ARP
broadcast packet to consider that the
MAC address of the NE that returns the
ARP spoofing packet is the MAC address
of the destination NE. In this manner, the
packet that is to be sent to the destination
NE is first sent to the NE with the proxy
ARP function enabled and then
forwarded to the destination NE.
Enabled
A.3.10 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Network Layer

Parameter
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the network layer of the OSI protocol
model.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > OSI
2.
Click the Network Layer Parameters tab.
Network Layer Parameters

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE

NE.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-35
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Configuration Role
L1
L1
Configuration Role cannot be set to

ES.
An NE whose Configuration Role is set

to L1 cannot function as a neighbor of an
NE in the other area. It uses a route in the
local area only and access the other area
by distributing the default route of the
nearest L2 NE.
An NE whose Configuration Role is set

to L2 can function as a neighbor of an NE
in the other area and can use a route in the
backbone area. The backbone area is a
collection that is formed by consecutive
L2 NEs. That is, the L2 NE of all the roles
must be consecutive (connected to each
other).
L2
Current Role
This parameter indicates the current role.
A.3.11 Parameter Description: OSI Management_Routing Table

This topic describes the parameters that are related to OSI routing tables.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Routing Table tab.
Parameters for Routing Tables

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
This parameter indicates the port used for

OSI communication.
Data Link Layer
This parameter indicates the protocol that is

used at the data link layer.
Adjacency No.
This parameter specifies the identifier of

the adjacency that is set up by two NEs
through the OSI protocol. One adjacency
number corresponds to an OSI adjacency.
The value is dynamically allocated by the

NE.
Adjacency Type
A-36
This parameter indicates the type of the

adjacency.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Adjacency State
This parameter indicates the state of the

adjacency.
Peer End Area ID
This parameter indicates the area ID that is

contained in the NSAP address of the
opposite NE.
Peer End System

ID
This parameter indicates the system ID of

the opposite NE. Generally, the system ID
is the MAC address.
Destination Area
ID
This parameter indicates the area ID of the

destination NE.
Destination SYSID
This parameter indicates the system ID of

the destination NE. Generally, the system
ID is the MAC address.
Metric
++This parameter indicates the number of

hops that reach the destination NE or
destination area.
Adjacency No.1
This parameter indicates the number of the

adjacent link that is connected to the
destination NE.
Adjacency No.2

adjacent link that is connected to the
destination NE.
A.3.12 Parameter Description: OSI Management_OSI Tunnel

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the OSI tunnels.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the OSI Tunnel tab.
Parameters for OSI Tunnel Attributes

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Remote IP Address

the opposite end of the OSI tunnel.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-37
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAPD Actor
User
User
This parameter specifies the LAPD actor.
If the adjacent NEs run the OSI protocol,

they can perform the LAPD negotiation
only when the LAPD actor is set to
User at one end and is set to Network at
the other end.
Network
Efficient LAPD
Enable

current LAPD is enabled.
Configurable
LAPD Enable
Enabled
Enabled
This parameter specifies whether the LAPD

is enabled.
Disabled
LAPD Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Remote IP Address

the opposite end of the OSI tunnel.
L2 Wait Time to
Retry(s)
1 to 20
This parameter specifies L2 Wait Time

to Retry(s).
L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) indicates the

interval for retransmitting packets at the
LAPD link layer.
L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) needs to be

set according to the network situation. If
the network is in good situation, L2 Wait
Time to Retry(s) can be set to a smaller
value. Otherwise, it is recommended that
you set L2 Wait Time to Retry(s) to a
greater value.
This parameter needs to be set according

to the planning information. In normal
cases, it is recommended that you use the
default value.
A-38

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
L2 Retry Times
2 to 6
This parameter specifies L2 Retry

Times.
L2 Retry Times indicates the maximum

number of packet retransmission
attempts at the LAPD link layer.
L2 Retry Times needs to be set

according to the network situation. If the
network is in good situation, L2 Retry
Times can be set to a smaller value.
Otherwise, it is recommended that you
set L2 Retry Times to a greater value.

default value.
This parameter specifies L3 Hello Timer

(s).
L3 Hello Timer(s) indicates the Hello

packet timer at the LAPD link network
layer. It is used for periodical
transmission of the Hello packets.
The Hello timer determines the interval

for transmitting the Hello packets once.
L3 Hello Timer(s) needs to be set
network is in good situation, L3 Hello
Timer(s) can be set to a greater value.
set L3 Hello Timer(s) to a smaller value.

default value.
L3 Hello Timer(s)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
1 to 100

A-39
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
L3 ES Timer(s)
1 to 200
50
This parameter specifies L3 ES Timer

(s).
L3 ES Timer(s) indicates the ES

configuration timer at the LAPD link
network layer. It is used for setting the
time to transmit the configuration
information on the ES route.
L3 ES Timer(s) needs to be set according

to the network situation. If the network is
in good situation, L3 ES Timer(s) can be
set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is
recommended that you set L3 Hello
Timer(s) to a smaller value.

default value.
This parameter specifies L3 IS Timer

(s).
L3 IS Timer(s) indicates the IS

configuration timer at the LAPD link
network layer. It is used for setting the
time to transmit the configuration
information through the L1/L2 router.
L3 IS Timer(s) needs to be set according

to the network situation. If the network is
in good situation, L3 IS Timer(s) can be
set to a greater value. Otherwise, it is
recommended that you set L3 IS Timer
(s) to a smaller value.

default value.
L3 IS Timer(s)
A-40
1 to 200
10

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
L3 Hold Timer(s)
2 to 63
This parameter specifies L3 Hold Timer

(s).
L3 Hold Timer(s) indicates the hold

timer at the LAPD link network layer.
L3 Hold Timer(s) needs to be set

network is in good situation, L3 Hold
Timer(s) can be set to a smaller value.
set L3 IS Timer(s) to a greater value.

default value.
This parameter specifies COST.
COST indicates the overhead value of

the virtual LAPD that corresponds to the
OSI tunnel.
The overhead value determines whether

this link is perverted. If the overhead
value is smaller, this link has a higher
priority to be selected.
This parameter needs to set according to

the planning information.
1 to 63
COST
20
A.3.13 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Bandwidth

Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for bandwidth management of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN
2.
Click the Bandwidth Management tab.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-41
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters for Bandwidth Management

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Ethernet Board
VLAN ID
1 to 4094
4094
The equipment on the traditional DCN

can be connected to the NMS through the
SCC board, but the OptiX RTN 910 can
also be connected to the NMS through an
Ethernet interface. If an Ethernet port is
used to carry the network management
information, the NE differentiates the
network management information and
Ethernet service information according to
the VLAN ID.
If the default VLAN ID of the inband

DCN conflicts with the VLAN ID in the
service, the VLAN ID of the inband DCN
can be changed manually. The same
VLAN ID must be, however, is used on
the network-wide inband DCN.
Bandwidth(kbps)
This parameter specifies the bandwidth of

the inband DCN.
E1 Port
Bandwidth(kbps)
The OptiX RTN 910 does not support this

parameter.
Tunnel Bandwidth
(kbps)

parameter.
IF Port Bandwidth
(kbps)

parameter.
A.3.14 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Port Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting ports of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > DCN
2.
Click the Port Settings tab.
Parameters for Setting FE or GE Ports

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Name
This parameter indicates the name of the FE

or GE port.
A-42

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable Status
Enabled
Enabled
This parameter specifies whether the FE

or GE port is enabled.
The inband DCN can transmit the

network management information over
the link only after the inband DCN
function is enabled at the FE or GE ports
at both ends of a link.
Disabled
Parameters for Setting IF Ports

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Name
This parameter indicates the name of the IF

port.
Enable Status
Enabled
Enabled
This parameter specifies whether the IF

port is enabled.
The inband DCN can transmit the

network management information over
the link only after the IF ports at both ends
of a link are enabled on the inband DCN.
Disabled
A.3.15 Parameter Description: DCN Management_Protocol Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are used for setting a protocol of the inband DCN.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the required NE from the Object Tree, and then choose
Communication > DCN Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Protocol Settings tab.
Parameters for Setting a Protocol

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
Displays the port name.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-43
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protocol Type
IP
IP
If the values of ProtocolType are

different from each other, the equipment
at both ends cannot be interconnected
with each other. Therefore, Protocol
Type must be set to the same value for
the equipment at both ends of a link.

to the planning information. Generally, it
is recommended that you set this
parameter to IP.
HWECC
A.3.16 Parameter Description: Access Control

This topic describes the parameters that are used for access control of the NMS.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Communication > Access
Control from the Function Tree.
Parameters for Ethernet Access Control

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
The First Network

Port
Enabled
Enabled
After The First Network Port is set to

Enabled for Ethernet access, the NE can
access the NMS through the Ethernet port.
Disabled
Parameters for Access Control over Serial Ports

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable Serial Port

Access
Selected
Selected
After Enable Serial Port Access is

selected, the NE can access the NMS or
command lines through the serial port.
Access Command
Line
Selected
Deselected
If Access Command Line is selected, the

serial interface can be used to access the
command line terminal.
Access NM
Selected
Selected
If Access NM is selected, the serial interface

can be used to access the NMS.
Deselected
Deselected
Deselected
A-44

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Baud Rate
1200
9600
This parameter specifies the data

transmission rate in the communications
through serial ports.
This parameter is set according to the rate

of the serial port at the opposite end, and
the rates at both ends must be the same.
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
A.3.17 Parameter Description: LCT Access Control

This topic describes the parameters that are used for LCT access control.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Security > LCT Access
Parameters for LCT Access Control

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE

NE.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-45
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LCT Access
Control Switch
Access Allowed
Access Allowed
No NMS user logs in to the NE. In this

case, when the LCT requests an LCT user
to log in to the NE, the NE does not check
the status of LCT Access Control
Switch, and directly allows the LCT user
to log in to the NE.
An NMS user first logs in to the NE. In

this case, when the LCT requests an LCT
user to log in to the NE, the NE
determines whether to allow the LCT
user to log in to the NE through the LCT
according to the status of LCT Access
Control Switch.
An LCT user first logs in to the NE. In

this case, when the NMS requests an
NMS user to log in to the NE, the NMS
user can directly log in to the NE. After
the NMS user successfully logs in to the
NE, the online LCT user is not affected.
When both the LCT user and NMS user

log in to the NE, the online LCT user is
not affected after LCT Access Control
Switch is set to Disable Access.
Disable Access
A.4 Radio Link Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio links.
A.4.1 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC Workgroup_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the XPIC function.
A.4.2 Parameter Description: Link Configuration_XPIC
A.4.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group.
A.4.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection.
A.4.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.
A.4.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.
A.4.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.
A-46

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910


Workgroup_Creation
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the XPIC tab.
3.
Click New.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IF Channel
Bandwidth
28M
This parameter specifies the working

bandwidth of the radio link.
When this parameter is set to 56M, the

high-power ODU must be used.
This parameter indicates the polarization

direction of a radio link.
It is recommended that you set the IF port
on the IFX2 board that has a smaller slot
number to Link ID-V and the IF port on
the other IFX2 board to Link ID-H.
Polarization
direction-V
56M
Polarization
direction-H
Link ID-V
Link ID-H
1 to 4094
Set Link ID-V and Link ID-H.
A link ID is an identifier of a radio link

and is used to prevent the radio links
between sites from being wrongly
connected.
When the link ID received by an NE is
different from the link ID set for the NE,
the NE reports an MW_LIM alarm and
inserts the AIS.
These two parameters are set according
to the planning information. These two
parameters must be set to different
values, but Link ID-V must be set to the
same value at both ends of a link and Link
ID-H must also be set to the same value
at both ends of a link.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-47
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Transmit Power
(dBm)
This parameter specifies the transmit

power of an ODU. The value of this
parameter must not exceed the rated
power range supported by the ODU.
The transmit power of the ODU must be

set to the same value at both ends of a
radio link.
Consider the receive power of the ODU

at the opposite end when you set this
parameter. Ensure that the receive power
of the ODU at the opposite end can ensure
stable radio services.

This parameter specifies the maximum

transmit power of the ODU. This
parameter cannot be set to a value that
exceeds the nominal power rang of the
ODU in the guaranteed capacity
modulation module..
This parameter is set to limit the

maximum transmit power of the ODU
within this preset range.
The maximum transmit power adjusted

by using the ATPC function should not
exceed this value.

This parameter indicates the channel

central frequency.
The value of this parameter must not be

less than the sum of the lower transmit
frequency limit supported by the ODU
and a half of the channel spacing, and
must not be more than the difference
between the upper transmit frequency
limit supported by the ODU and a half of
the channel spacing.

Maximum
Transmit Power
(dBm)
Transmission
Frequency(MHz)
A-48

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
T/R Spacing(MHz)
This parameter specifies the spacing

between the transmit frequency and the
receive frequency of an ODU to prevent
mutual interference between the
transmitter and the receiver.
If Station Type of the ODU is TX high,

the transmit frequency is one T/R spacing
higher than the receive frequency. If
Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the
transmit frequency is one T/R spacing
lower than the receive frequency.
If the ODU supports only one T/R

spacing, set this parameter to 0,
indicating that the T/R spacing supported
by the ODU is used.
A valid T/R spacing value is determined

by the ODU itself, and the T/R spacing
should be set according to the technical
specifications of the ODU.
The T/R spacing of the ODU should be

set to the same value at both the ends of
a radio link.
When this parameter is set to mute, the

ODU does not transmit microwave
signals but can normally receive
microwave signals.
When this parameter is set to unmute, the

ODU normally transmits and receives
microwave signals.
In normal cases, this parameter is set to

unmute.
Transmission
Status
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
unmute
unmute
mute

A-49
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ATPC Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
This parameter specifies whether the

ATPC function is enabled.
When this parameter is set to Enabled

and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB
higher or lower than the central value
between the ATPC upper threshold and
the ATPC lower threshold at the receive
end, the receiver notifies the transmitter
to decrease or increase the transmit power
until the RSL is within the range that is 2
dB higher or lower than the central value
the ATPC lower threshold.
The settings of the ATPC attributes must

be consistent at both ends of a radio link.
In the case of areas where fast fading

severely affects the radio transmission, it
parameter to Disabled.
During the commissioning process, set

this parameter to Disabled to ensure that
the transmit power is not changed. After
the commissioning, re-set the ATPC
attributes.
The central value between the ATPC

upper threshold and the ATPC lower
threshold is set as the expected receive
power.
It is recommended that you set ATPC
Upper Threshold(dBm) to the sum of
the planned central value between the
ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold and 10 dB, and ATPC
Lower Threshold(dBm) to the
difference between the planned central
value between the ATPC upper threshold
and the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.
You can set the ATPC upper threshold
only when ATPC Automatic Threshold
Enable Status is set to Disabled.
Enabled
ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm)
-75.0 to -20.0
-45.0
ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm)
-35.0 to -90.0
-70.0
l
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status
A-50
Disabled
Disabled

automatic threshold function is enabled.
If this parameter is set to Enabled, the

equipment automatically uses the preset
ATPC upper and lower thresholds
according to the work mode of the radio
link.
Enabled

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910


Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Link
2.
Click the XPIC tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Group ID
This parameter indicates the ID of the work

group.
Polarization
direction-V
This parameter indicates the IF port to which

the polarization direction V corresponds.
Link ID-V
This parameter indicates the link ID to

which the polarization direction V
corresponds.
Polarization
direction-H

the polarization direction H corresponds.
Link ID-H
This parameter indicates the link ID to

which the polarization direction H
corresponds.
IF Channel
Bandwidth
28M
IF Channel Bandwidth refers to the

channel spacing of the corresponding
radio links.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
56M

A-51
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Power to Be
Received -V(dBm)
This parameter is used to set the expected

receive power of the ODU and is mainly
used in the antenna alignment stage.
After this parameter is set, the NE
automatically enables the antenna
misalignment indicating function.
When the antenna misalignment

indicating function is enabled, if the
actual receive power of the ODU exceeds
the range of receive power3 dB, the
ODU LED of the IF board connected to
the ODU is on (yellow) for 300 ms and
off for 300 ms repeatedly, indicating that
the antenna is not aligned.
After the antenna alignment, after the

state that the antenna is aligned lasts for
30 minutes, the NE automatically
disables the antenna misalignment
indicating function.


used in the antenna alignment stage.
After this parameter is set, the NE



Power to Be
Received -H(dBm)
A-52

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maximum
Transmit Power
(dBm)

modulation module..


exceed this value.

This parameter indicates or specifies the

exceeds the nominal power range of the
ODU.
The transmit power of the ODU should

be set to the same value at both ends of a
radio link.



transmit frequency of the ODU, namely,
the channel central frequency.

less than the sum of the lower TX
between the upper TX frequency limit
supported by the ODU and a half of the
channel spacing.
The difference between the transmit

frequencies of both the ends of a radio
link should be one T/R spacing.

to the planning information.
Transmit Power
(dBm)
Transmission
Frequency(MHz)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-53
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
T/R Spacing(MHz)

spacing between the transmit frequency
and receive frequency of the ODU to
prevent mutual interference between the
transmitter and receiver.
If the ODU is a Tx high station, the

higher than the receive frequency. If the
ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit
frequency is one T/R spacing lower than
the receive frequency.

spacing, this parameter is set to 0,
by the ODU is used.


radio link.

transmit status of the ODU.
If this parameter is set to mute, the

transmitter of the ODU does not work but
can normally receive microwave signals.
If this parameter is set to unmute, the

ODU can normally transmit and receive
microwave signals.

unmute.
Transmission
Status
unmute
unmute
mute
Parameters for Hybrid/AM Configuration

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Group ID
This parameter indicates the ID of the work

group.
Polarization
direction

the polarization direction H or the
polarization direction V corresponds.
A-54

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
AM Enable Status
Disabled
Disabled
When this parameter is set to Disabled,

the radio link uses only the specified
modulation scheme. In this case, you
need to select Manually Specified
Modulation Mode.
When this parameter is set to Enabled,

the radio link uses the corresponding
modulation scheme according to the
channel conditions.
Enabled
Hence, the Hybrid radio can ensure the

reliable transmission of the E1 services and
provide bandwidth adaptively for the
Ethernet services when the AM function is
enabled.
Modulation Mode
of the Guaranteed
AM Capacity
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
This parameter specifies the highest-gain

modulation scheme that the AM function
supports. This parameter is set according to
the planning information. Generally, the
value of this parameter is determined by the
bandwidth of the services that need to be
transmitted over the Hybrid radio and the
availability of the radio link that
corresponds to this modulation scheme.
NOTE
Modulation Mode of the Full AM Capacity
must be higher than Modulation Mode of the
Guaranteed AM Capacity.
This parameter is valid only when AM

Enable Status is set to Enabled.
Modulation Mode
of the Full AM
Capacity
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM

NOTE

Enable Status is set to Enabled.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-55
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Manually Specified
Modulation Mode
QPSK
QPSK
This parameter specifies the modulation

scheme that the radio link uses for signal
transmission.
16QAM
32QAM

Enable Status is set to Disabled.
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
Guaranteed E1
Capacity
E1 Capacity
1 to 75
When AM Enable Status is set to

Enabled, this parameter depends on IF
Channel Bandwidth and Modulation
Mode of the Guaranteed AM
Capacity and cannot be set.

Disabled, this parameter depends on IF
Channel Bandwidth and Manually
Specified Modulation Mode and cannot
be set.
This parameter specifies the number of E1

services that can be transmitted in Hybrid
work mode. The value of this parameter
cannot exceed the Guaranteed E1
Capacity.
The E1 Capacity must be set to the same
value at both ends of a radio link.
Parameters for ATPC Management

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Group ID
This parameter indicates the object to be set.
A-56

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ATPC Enable
Status
Disabled
Enabled

If this parameter is set to Enabled and if

the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB higher
or lower than the central value between
the ATPC upper threshold and the ATPC
lower threshold at the receive end, the
receiver notifies the transmitter to
decrease or increase the transmit power



attributes.
Set the central value between the ATPC

threshold to a value for the expected
receive power.
Lower Threshold(dBm) o the difference
between the planned central value
the ATPC lower threshold and 10 dB.
You can set this parameter only when
ATPC Automatic Threshold Enable
Status is set to Disabled.
Enabled
ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm)
-75.0 to -20.0
-45.0
ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm)
-35.0 to -90.0
-70.0
l
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-57
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status
Disabled
Disabled

ATPC automatic threshold function is
enabled.

link.
If this parameter is set to Disabled, you

need to manually set ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm) and ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm).
Enabled
A.4.3 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection_Create

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF N+1 protection group.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Create.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR time(s)
300 to 720
600
This parameter specifies the wait-torestore (WTR) time.
When the time after the former working

channel is restored to normal reaches the
set WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.
It is recommended that you use the

default value.
This parameter specifies whether the SD

switching function of N+1 protection is
enabled.

the SD condition is considered as a
trigger condition of protection switching.
It is recommended that you set this

parameter to Enabled.
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
A-58

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Slot Mapping Relation Parameters

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Select Mapping
Direction
Work Unit
Work Unit
This parameter specifies the mapping

direction of N+1 protection.

In the case of N+1 protection, map N IF

ports as Work Unit and map the
remaining IF port as Protection Unit.

Protection Unit
Select Mapping
Way
Mapped Board
This parameter indicates the working unit

and protection unit that have been set.
A.4.4 Parameter Description: N+1 Protection

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF N+1 protection.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > N+1
Protection Group Parameters

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group
ID
This parameter indicates the ID of the

protection group.
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720

WTR time.

occurs.

default value.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-59
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SD Enable
Enabled
This parameter indicates or specifies

whether the SD switching function of N
+1 protection is enabled.

the SD condition is considered as a
trigger condition of protection switching.

Disabled
Protocol Status
This parameter indicates the status of the

switching control protocol.
Protection Unit Parameters

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Unit
This parameter indicates the protection unit.
Line
This parameter indicates the information

about the working board or protection
board.
Switching Status
This parameter indicates the switching state.
Protection Unit
This parameter indicates the protected unit.
Remote/Local End
Indication
This parameter indicates the local end or

remote end.
A.4.5 Parameter: IF 1+1 Protection_Create

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an IF 1+1 protection group.
Navigation Path
A-60
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1
2.
Click Create.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Working Mode
HSB
HSB
This parameter specifies the working

mode of the IF 1+1 protection.
In HSB mode, the equipment provides a

1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF
board and ODU at both ends of each hop
of a radio link to realize the protection.
In FD mode, the system uses two

channels that have a frequency spacing
between them, to transmit and receive the
same signal. The remote end selects
signals from the two received signals.
With FD protection, the impact of the
fading on signal transmission is reduced.
In SD mode, the system uses two

antennas that have a space distance
between them, to receive the same signal.
The equipment selects signals from the
two received signals. With SD protection,
the impact of the fading on signal
transmission is reduced.
The FD mode and SD mode are

compatible with the HSB switching
function.

This parameter specifies the revertive

mode of the IF 1+1 protection.
When this parameter is set to Revertive

Mode, the NE that is in the switching
state releases the switching and enables
the former working channel to return to
the normal state some time after the
former working channel is restored to
normal.
When this parameter is set to NonRevertive Mode, the NE that is in the

switching state keeps the current state
unchanged unless another switching
occurs even though the former working
channel is restored to normal.

parameter to Revertive Mode.
FD
SD
Revertive Mode
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Mode
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Revertive Mode

A-61
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600
This parameter specifies the wait-torestore (WTR) time.

occurs.
You can set WTR Time(s) only when

Revertive Mode is set to Revertive
Mode.

default value.

reverse switching function is enabled.
When both the main IF board and the

standby IF board at the sink end report
service alarms, they send the alarms to the
source end by using the MWRDI
overhead in the microwave frame. When
this parameter at the source end is set to
Enabled and the reverse switching
conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection
switching occurs at the source end.

Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.
In normal cases, it is recommended that

you set this parameter to Enabled.
Enabled
Enable Reverse
Switching
Enabled
Disabled
Working Board
This parameter specifies the working board

of the protection group.
Protection Board
This parameter specifies the protection

board of the protection group.
NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), and Enable Reverse
Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.
A.4.6 Parameter Description: IF 1+1 Protection

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF 1+1 protection.
Navigation Path
1.
A-62
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > IF 1+1

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Protection Group Parameters

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group
ID

protection group.
Working Mode
HSB
HSB
This parameter indicates the working

mode of the created IF 1+1 protection
group.
In HSB mode, the equipment provides a

1+1 hot standby configuration for the IF
board and ODU at both ends of each hop
of a radio link to realize the protection.
In FD mode, the system uses two

channels that have a frequency spacing
between them, to transmit and receive the
same signal. The remote end selects
signals from the two received signals.
With FD protection, the impact of the
fading on signal transmission is reduced.
In SD mode, the system uses two

antennas that have a space distance
between them, to receive the same signal.
The equipment selects signals from the
two received signals. With SD protection,
the impact of the fading on signal
transmission is reduced.
The FD mode and SD mode are

compatible with the HSB switching
function.


revertive mode of the protection group.
When this parameter is set to Revertive

Mode, the NE that is in the switching state
releases the switching and enables the
former working channel to return to the
normal state some time after the former
working channel is restored to normal.
When this parameter is set to NonRevertive Mode, the NE that is in the

switching state keeps the current state
unchanged unless another switching
occurs even though the former working
channel is restored to normal.

parameter to Revertive Mode.
FD
SD
Revertive Mode
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Mode
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Revertive Mode

A-63
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600

WTR time.

occurs.

Revertive Mode is set to Revertive
Mode.

value.

whether the reverse switching function is
enabled.
When both the main IF board and the

standby IF board at the sink end report
service alarms, they send the alarms to the
source end by using the MWRDI
overhead in the microwave frame. When
this parameter at the source end is set to
Enabled and the reverse switching
conditions are met, the IF 1+1 protection
switching occurs at the source end.

Working Mode is set to HSB or SD.
This parameter indicates the switching

state on the equipment side.
Unknown is displayed when the

switching state on the channel side is not
queried or not obtained after a query.

state on the channel side.
Unknown is displayed when the

switching state on the channel side is not
queried or not obtained after a query.
Enable Reverse
Switching
Switching Status of
Device
Switching Status of
Channel
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled
Active Board of
Device
This parameter indicates the current

working board on the equipment side.
Active Board of
Channel

working board on the channel side.
NOTE
Each of the parameters Working Mode, Revertive Mode, WTR Time(s), and Enable Reverse
Switching must be set to the same value at both ends of a radio hop.
A-64

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Unit
This parameter indicates the working board

and protection board.
Slot Mapping
Relation
This parameter indicates the names and

ports of the working board and protection
board.
Working Status of
Device
This parameter indicates the working state

on the equipment side.
Signal Status of
Channel

link signal.
A.4.7 Parameter: Link Configuration_IF/ODU Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IF/ODU.
Navigation Path
1.
In the NE Explorer, select the NE and then choose Configuration > Link
2.
Click the IF/ODU Configuration tab.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-65
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters for Configuring the IF

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Work Mode
1,4E1,7MHz,QPSK

work mode of the radio link in "work
mode number, service capacity, channel
spacing, modulation mode" format.

planning information. The work modes
of the IF boards at the two ends of a radio
link must be the same.
2,4E1,3.5MHz,
16QAM
3,8E1,14MHz,QPS
K
4,8E1,7MHz,
16QAM
5,16E1,28MHz,QP
SK
6,16E1,14MHz,
16QAM
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IFU2
board and the IFX2 board.
7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM
8,E3,28MHz,QPSK
9,E3,14MHz,
16QAM
10,22E1,14MHz,
32QAM
11,26E1,14MHz,
64QAM
12,32E1,14MHz,
128QAM
13,35E1,28MHz,
16QAM
14,44E1,28MHz,
32QAM
15,53E1,28MHz,
64QAM
A-66

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable AM
Disabled
Disable
When this parameter is set to Disabled,

the radio link uses only the specified
Modulation Mode.

the radio link uses the corresponding
channel conditions.
Enabled

enabled.
NOTE
This parameter is not applicable to the IF1 board.
Channel Space
7M
7M
14M
28M
56M
Guaranteed
Capacity
Modulation
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
Channel Space indicates the channel

spacing of the corresponding radio link.
NOTE
QPSK
This parameter specifies the lowest-gain

service transmission bandwidth that the
Hybrid radio must ensure and the
This parameter is valid only when Enable
AM is set to Enabled.
NOTE
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-67
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Full Capacity
Modulation
QPSK

16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
NOTE
Full Capacity Modulation must be higher than
Guaranteed E1 Capacity.

AM is set to Enabled.
NOTE
Manually Specified
Modulation
QPSK
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM

AM is set to Disabled.
64QAM
128QAM
NOTE
256QAM
Guaranteed E1
Capacity

transmission.
When Enable AM is set to Enabled, this

parameter depends on Channel Space
and Guaranteed E1 Capacity and is not
configurable.
When Enable AM is set to Disabled, this

parameter depends on Channel Space
and Manually Specified Modulation
Mode and is not configurable.
NOTE
Specified Max E1
Capacity

services that can be transmitted in the
Hybrid work mode. The value of this
parameter cannot exceed the Guaranteed
E1 Capacity.
NOTE
A-68

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Link ID
1 to 4094

ID of a radio link. As the identifier of a
radio link, this parameter is used to
prevent incorrect connections of radio
links between sites.
If the value of Received Radio Link ID

does not match the preset value of Link
ID at the local end, the local end inserts
the AIS signal to the downstream
direction of the service. At the same time,
the local end reports MW_LIM alarm to
the NMS, indicating that the link IDs do
not match.
Each radio link of an NE should have a

unique link ID, and the link IDs at both
ends of a radio link should be the same.
Received Link ID
1 to 4094
This parameter indicates the received ID of

the radio link.
NOTE
When the radio link becomes faulty, this
parameter is displayed as an invalid value.
ATPC Enable
Status
ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm)
Disabled
Disabled

ATPC function is enabled. If the APTC
function is enabled, the transmit power of
the transmitter automatically varies
within the specified ATPC range
according to the change of the RSL at the
receive end.


attributes.

receive power.
Enabled
-75.0 to -20.0
-45.0
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-69
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm)
-35.0 to -90.0
-70.0
Description
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Enable IEEE-1588
Timeslot
Enabled
Disabled

enabled.

link.

Threshold(dBm).
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled

(dBm) is set to Disabled.
If the OptiX RTN 910 is interconnected with

the packet radio equipment, this parameter
is set to Enabled. Otherwise, this parameter
is set to Disabled.
NOTE
A-70

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters for Configuring the ODU

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TX Frequency
(MHz)

the channel central frequency.

less than the sum of the lower TX
between the upper TX frequency limit
supported by the ODU and a half of the
channel spacing.

frequencies of both the ends of a radio
link should be one T/R spacing.

This parameter indicates the range of the

transmit frequency of the ODU.
The Range of Frequency(MHz)

depends on the specifications of the
ODU.
Range of TX
Frequency(MHz)
Actual TX
Frequency(MHz)
This parameter indicates the actual transmit

frequency of the ODU.
Actual RX
Frequency(MHz)
This parameter indicates the actual receive

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-71
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
T/R Spacing(MHz)
This parameter specifies the spacing

between the transmit frequency and the
receive frequency of an ODU to prevent
interference between them.
If Station Type of the ODU is TX high,

the TX frequency is one T/R spacing
higher than the receive frequency. If
Station Type of the ODU is TX low, the
TX frequency is one T/R spacing lower
than the receive frequency.

spacing, set this parameter to 0, indicating
that the T/R spacing supported by the
ODU is used.


set to the same value at both the ends of
a radio link.
Actual T/R
Spacing(MHz)
This parameter indicates the actual T/R

spacing of the ODU.
TX Power(dBm)

exceeds the nominal power range of the
ODU.
This parameter cannot take a value

greater than the preset value of
Maximum Transmit Power(dBm).

radio link.


If the value of the actual transmit power

of the ODU is greater than the preset
value of TX High Threshold(dBm), the
system separately records the duration
TX High
Threshold(dBm)
A-72

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
TX Low Threshold
(dBm)
Description
RX High
Threshold(dBm)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
when the value of the actual transmit

power of the ODU is greater than the
preset value of TX High Threshold
(dBm) and the duration when the value
of the actual transmit power of the ODU
is greater than the preset value of TX Low
Threshold(dBm) in the performance
events.
value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) and
is lower than the preset value of TX High
Threshold(dBm), the system records the
duration when the value of the actual
transmit power of the ODU is greater than
the preset value of TX Low Threshold
(dBm) in the performance events.
of the ODU is lower than the preset value
of TX Low Threshold(dBm), the system
does not record it.
TX High Threshold(dBm) and TX Low
Threshold(dBm) are valid only when the
If the value of the actual receive power of
the ODU is lower than the preset value of
RX Low Threshold(dBm), the system
records the duration when the value of the
actual receive power of the ODU is lower
than the preset value of RX Low
Threshold(dBm) and duration when the
value of the actual transmit power of the
ODU is lower than the preset value of RX
High Threshold(dBm)in the
performance events.
the ODU is greater than the preset value
of RX Low Threshold(dBm) and is
lower than the preset value of RX High
receive power of the ODU is Lower than
the preset value of RX High Threshold

A-73
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
RX Low Threshold
(dBm)
Power to Be
Received(dBm)
A-74
Description
of RX High Threshold(dBm), the
system does not record it.

used in the antenna alignment stage. After
this parameter is set, the NE


This parameter needs to be according to

the planning.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maximum
Transmit Power
(dBm)

modulation module.


exceed this value.

Range of TX
Power(dBm)

transmit power of the ODU.
Actual TX Power
(dBm)
This parameter indicates the actual

If the ATPC function is enabled, the

queried actual transmit power may be
different from the preset value.
Actual RX Power
(dBm)

power of the ODU.
TX Status
Unmute
Unmute

When this parameter is set to Mute, the

When this parameter is set to Unmute,

the ODU can normally transmit and
receive microwave signals.

you set this parameter to unmute.
Mute
Actual TX Status
Unmute

status of the ODU.
Mute
Equipment Information
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Frequency(GHz)
This parameter indicates the frequency band

where the ODU operates.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-75
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Equipment Type
This parameter indicates the equipment

type of the ODU.
PDH and SDH indicate the transmission

capacity only and is irrelevant to the type
of transmitted service.

ODU is a Tx high station or a Tx low
station.
The transmit frequency of a Tx high

station is one T/R spacing higher than the
transmit frequency of a Tx low station.
Station Type
Produce SN
This parameter indicates the manufacturing

serial number and the manufacturer code of
the ODU.
Transmission
Power Type
This parameter indicates the level of the

output power of the ODU.
A.5 Multiplex Section Protection Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to multiplex section protection (MSP).
A.5.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups.
A.5.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP
This topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.
A.5.1 Parameter Description: Linear MSP_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating linear MSP groups.
Navigation Path
A-76
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear
MS from the Function Tree.
2.
Click Create.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Type
1+1 Protection
1+1 Protection
This parameter specifies the protection

type of the linear MSP group.
In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, one

working channel and one protection
channel are required. When the working
channel fails, the service is switched from
the working channel to the protection
channel.
In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N working

channels and one protection channel are
required. Normal services are transmitted
on the working channels and extra
services are transmitted on the protection
channel. When one working channel
fails, the services are switched from this
working channel to the protection
channel, and the extra services are
interrupted.
If extra services need to be transmitted or

several working channels are required,
select 1:N Protection.

This parameter specifies the switching

mode of the linear MSP.
In single-ended mode, the switching

occurs only at one end and the state of the
other end remains unchanged.
In dual-ended mode, the switching occurs

at both ends at the same time.
If the linear MSP type is set to 1:N

Protection, Switching Mode can be set
to Dual-Ended Switching only.
1:N Protection
Switching Mode
Single-Ended
Switching
Dual-Ended
Switching
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Single-Ended
Switching (1+1
Protection)
Dual-Ended
Switching (1:N
Protection)

A-77
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Non-Revertive (1+1
Protection)
This parameter specifies the revertive

mode of the linear MSP.
Revertive (1:N
Protection)
When this parameter is set to Revertive,

the NE that is in the switching state
When this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the switching

state keeps the current state unchanged
unless another switching occurs even
though the former working channel is
restored to normal.

parameter to Revertive.

Protection, Revertive Mode can be set
to Revertive only.
This parameter specifies the WTR time.

preset WTR time, a revertive switching
occurs.

Revertive Mode is set to Revertive.

default value.

whether the switching at the SD alarm of
the linear MSP is enabled.

the B2_SD alarm is considered as a
switching condition.

Revertive
WTR Time(s)
SD Enable
300 to 720
Enabled
600
Enabled
Disabled
A-78

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protocol Type
New Protocol
New Protocol
The new protocol is supported at the early

stage, and the mainstream protocol
version is used currently.
The restructure protocol optimizes the

new protocol and provides better
measures to protect the new protocol,
thus ensuring that the new protocol runs
in a better manner.
The new protocol is more mature, and the

restructure protocol complies with the
standard. It is recommended that you use
the new protocol.
You must ensure that the interconnected

NEs run the protocols of the same type.
Restructure Protocol

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Select Mapping
Direction
West Working Unit
West Working Unit

direction of the linear MSP.
Select Mapping
Mode

board and port in the mapping direction.
If the protection type is set to 1+1

Protection, only one line port can be
mapped as West Working Unit.
Only one line port can be mapped as West

Protection Unit.
The line port mapped as West Protection

Unit and the line port mapped as West
Working Unit should be configured for
different boards if possible.
West Protection
Unit
Mapped Board
This parameter indicates the preset slot

mapping relations, including the mapping
direction and the corresponding mapping
mode.
A.5.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP

This topic describes the parameters that are related to linear MSP groups.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-79
OptiX RTN 910

Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Linear MS
from the Function Tree.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Group
ID

protection group.
Protection Type
1+1 Protection
This parameter indicates the protection

type of the linear MSP group.
In the case of 1+1 linear MSP, one

working channel and one protection
channel are required. When the working
channel fails, the service is switched from
the working channel to the protection
channel.
In the case of 1:N linear MSP, N working

channels and one protection channel are
required. Normal services are transmitted
on the working channels and extra
services are transmitted on the protection
channel. When one working channel
fails, the services are switched from this
working channel to the protection
channel, and the extra services are
interrupted.
If extra services need to be transmitted or

several working channels are required,
select 1:N Protection.

switching mode of the linear MSP.
In single-ended mode, the switching

occurs only at one end and the state of the
other end remains unchanged.
In dual-ended mode, the switching occurs

at both ends at the same time.

Protection, Switching Mode can be set
to Dual-Ended Switching only.
1:N Protection
Switching Mode
Single-Ended
Switching
Dual-Ended
Switching
A-80

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive

revertive mode of the linear MSP.
When this parameter is set to Revertive,

the NE that is in the switching state
When this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the NE that is in the switching

state keeps the current state unchanged
unless another switching occurs even
though the former working channel is
restored to normal.


Protection, Revertive Mode can be set
to Revertive only.

WTR time.

occurs.


default value.

whether the reverse switching function is
enabled.

the B2_SD alarm is considered as a
switching condition.

Revertive
WTR Time(s)
SD Enable
300 to 720
Enabled
Disabled
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-81
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protocol Type
New Protocol
The new protocol is supported at the early

stage, and the mainstream protocol
version is used currently.
The restructure protocol optimizes the

new protocol and provides better
measures to protect the new protocol,
thus ensuring that the new protocol runs
in a better manner.
You must ensure that the interconnected

NEs run the protocols of the same type.
The new protocol is more mature, and the

restructure protocol complies with the
standard. It is recommended that you use
the new protocol.
Restructure Protocol
Protocol Status
This parameter indicates the protocol status

of the linear MSP.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Unit
This parameter indicates that which of the

units, namely, the west protection unit or the
west working unit, is currently in the
protection status.
West Line
This parameter indicates the west protection

unit and the west working unit of the linear
MSP.
West Switching
Status

status of the line.
Protected Unit
This parameter indicates the working

channel protected by the current protection
channel.
Remote/Local End
Indication
When Switching Mode is set to DualEnded Switching, the central office end
that issues the switching command is
displayed.
A.6 SDH/PDH Service Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to SDH/PDH services.
A.6.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation
A-82

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point crossconnections.
A.6.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP Service Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services.
A.6.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into
SNCP Services
This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCP
services.
A.6.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely,
configuring cross-connections).
A.6.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control
This topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.
A.6.1 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_Creation

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating point-to-point crossconnections.
Navigation Path
l
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH
Service Configuration from the Function Tree.
Click Create.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
VC12
VC12
This parameter specifies the level of the

service to be created.
If the service is an E1 service or a data

service that is bound with VC-12
channels, set this parameter to VC12.
If the service is a data service that is

bound with VC-3 channels, set this
parameter to VC3.
If all the services on a VC-4 channel pass

through the NE, set this parameter to
VC4.
VC3
VC4
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-83
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
When this parameter is set to

Unidirectional, create only the crossconnections from the service source to the
service sink.

Bidirectional, create the crossconnections from the service source to the
service sink and the cross-connections
from the service sink to the service
source.

you set this parameter to Bidirectional.
Unidirectional
Source Slot
This parameter specifies the slot of the

service source.
Source VC4

the VC-4 channel where the service
source is located.
This parameter cannot be set when

Source Slot is set to the slot of the
tributary board.
This parameter indicates the timeslot

range of the service source.
This parameter can be set to a number or

several numbers. When setting this
parameter to several numbers, use the
comma (,) to separate the discrete
numbers, or use the endash (-) to
represent a consecutive number. For
example, the numbers 1, and 3-6 indicate
1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
Sink Slot

service sink.
Sink VC4

the VC-4 channel where the service sink
is located.
This parameter cannot be set when Sink

Slot is set to the slot of the tributary board.
A-84

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
This parameter specifies the timeslot

range of the service sink.

1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.


immediately activate the configured
service.
To immediately deliver the configured

SDH service to the NE, set this parameter
to Yes.
Yes
Activate
Immediately
Yes
No
A.6.2 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration_SNCP

Service Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating SNCP services.
Navigation Path
l
Click Create SNCP Service.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Type
SNCP
SNCP
This parameter indicates that the type of the

service to be created is SNCP.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-85
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Direction
Bidirectional
Bidirectional

Unidirectional, create only the crossconnections from the SNCP service
source to the SNCP service sink.

Bidirectional, create the crossconnections from the SNCP service
source to the service sink and the crossconnections from the SNCP service sink
to the service source.

you set this parameter to Bidirectional.

SCNP service to be created.

channels, set this parameter to VC12.

bound with VC-3 channels, set this
parameter to VC3.

through the NE, set this parameter to
VC4.
This parameter specifies the duration of

the hold-off time.
When a line is faulty, SNCP switching

can be performed on the NE after a delay
of time to prevent the situation where the
NE performs SNCP switching and other
protection switching at the same time.
If multiple link-based protection

schemes, such as SNCP, 1+1 protection,
and N+1 protection, are available at the
same time, the hold-off time needs to be
set to a duration that is longer than the
switching duration for the multiple linkbased protection schemes.
If only the SNCP scheme is available, it

is recommended that you set the hold-off
time to 0.
Unidirectional
Level
VC12
VC12
VC3
VC4
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
A-86
0 to 100

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Non-Revertive

switch the service to the original working
channel after the fault is rectified.
If this parameter is set to Revertive, the

service is switched from the protection
channel to the original working channel.
If this parameter is set to NonRevertive, the service is not switched
from the protection channel to the
original working channel.


occurs.


default value.
Revertive
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600
Source Slot

service source.
Source VC4

source is located.

tributary board.


1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
Sink Slot
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

service sink.

A-87
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink VC4

is located.



1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

After the Configure SNCP Tangent

Ring checkbox is selected, you can
quickly configure the SNCP service for
the SNCP ring tangent point.

you do not select this checkbox.

SNCP service.
After the Activate Immediately

checkbox is selected, you can
immediately activate the created SNCP
service.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
Selected
Configure SNCP
Tangent Ring
Deselected
Deselected
Selected
Activate
Immediately
Selected
Deselected
A.6.3 Parameter Description: SDH Service

Configuration_Converting Normal Services Into SNCP Services
This topic describes the parameters that are used for converting normal services into SNCP
services.
Navigation Path
A-88
1.
2.
If a bidirectional SDH service is created, select this service in Cross-Connection. Rightclick the selected service and choose Expand to Unidirectional from the shortcut menu.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

3.
Select the unidirectional service. Right-click the selected service and choose Convert to
SNCP Service from the shortcut menu.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Type
SNCP
SNCP
This parameter indicates that the type of the

service to be created is SNCP.
Direction
Unidirectional
This parameter indicates the direction of the

SNCP service.
Level
VC12

SNCP service.

channels, the parameter value is VC12.

bound with VC-3 channels, the parameter
value is VC3.

through the NE, the parameter value is
VC4.

the hold-off time.



time to 0.
VC3
VC4
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
0 to 100

A-89
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Revertive Mode
Non-Revertive
Non-Revertive

switch the service to the original working
channel after the fault is rectified. If this
parameter is set to "Revertive", the



occurs.


default value.
Revertive
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720
600
Source Slot

service source.
Source VC4

source is located.

tributary board.


1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

Source Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
A-90

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink Slot

service sink.
Sink VC4

is located.



1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

After the Configure SNCP Tangent

Ring checkbox is selected, you can
quickly configure the SNCP service for
the SNCP ring tangent point.

you do not select this checkbox.

SNCP service.
After the Activate Immediately

checkbox is selected, you can
immediately activate the created SNCP
service.
Sink Timeslot
Range(e.g.1,3-6)
Selected
Configure SNCP
Tangent Ring
Deselected
Deselected
Selected
Activate
Immediately
Selected
Deselected
A.6.4 Parameter Description: SDH Service Configuration

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring SDH services (namely,
configuring cross-connections).
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SDH Service
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-91
OptiX RTN 910

Cross-Connection Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
VC12

service.

channels, VC12 is displayed.

bound with VC-3 channels, VC3 is
displayed.

through the NE, VC4 is displayed.
VC3
VC4
Source Slot
This parameter indicates the slot of the

service source.
Source Timeslot/
Path
This parameter indicates the timeslot or

timeslot range of the service source.
Sink Slot

source sink.
Sink Timeslot/
Path

timeslot range of the service sink.
Activation Status
Yes
This parameter indicates whether to activate

the service.
No
Bound Group
Number

parameter.
Lockout Status

parameter.
Trail Name

parameter.
Schedule No.

parameter.
A-92

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters for Automatically Generated Cross-Connections

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Level
VC12

service.


displayed.

VC3
VC4
Source Slot

service source.
Source Timeslot/
Path

timeslot range of the service source.
Sink Slot

source sink.
Sink Timeslot/
Path

timeslot range of the service sink.
Lockout Status

parameter.
Trail Name

parameter.
Schedule No.

parameter.
A.6.5 Parameter Description: SNCP Service Control

This topic describes the parameters that are used for controlling SNCP services.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > SNCP Service

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Type
This parameter indicates the service

protection type of the protection group.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-93
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source
This parameter indicates the timeslots where

the working service source and protection
service source of the protection group are
located.
Sink
This parameter indicates the timeslots where

the working service sink and protection
service sink of the protection group are
located.
Level
VC12

service.


displayed.

VC3
VC4
Current Status

switching mode and switching status of the
services of the protection group.
Revertive Mode
Revertive

revertive mode of the service.
This parameter determines whether to

switch the service from the protection
channel to the original working channel
after the fault is rectified.


Non-Revertive
A-94

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(s)
300 to 720

WTR time.

occurs.


default value.

duration of the hold-off time.



time to 0.
Hold-off Time
(100ms)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
0 to 100

A-95
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Initiation
Condition
TIM
Null

conditions that trigger the protection
switching of the service.
If TIM is selected, the SNCP service

considers the HP_TIM or LP_TIM alarm
as an automatic switching condition.
If EXC is selected, the SNCP service

considers the B3_EXC or BIP_EXC
alarm as an automatic switching
condition.
If SD is selected, the SNCP service

considers the B3_SD or BIP_SD alarm as
an automatic switching condition.
If UNEQ is selected, the SNCP service

considers the HP_UNEQ or LP_UNEQ
alarm as an automatic switching
condition.
It is recommended that you set Initiation

Condition to the same condition for
Working Service and Protection
Service.
The protection switching conditions in

Initiation Condition are optional values
not included in the default values, and
they are set according to the planning
information.
EXC
SD
UNEQ
Null
Trail Status

working service and protection service of
the protection group.
Service Grouping

parameter.
Active Channel

working service or protection service is
currently received by the protection group.
A.7 Clock Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to clocks.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.
A.7.2 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet
This topic describes the parameters that are related to a clock subnet.
A.7.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality
A-96

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

This topic describes the parameters that are related clock quality.
A.7.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output Control
This topic describes the parameters that are related to SSM output control.
A.7.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID Enabling Status
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the clock ID function.
A.7.6 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Restoration Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to clock source restoration.
A.7.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock Source Switching
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the switching conditions of a clock source.
A.7.8 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the External Clock Source
This topic describes the parameters of the output phase-locked source of the external clock
source.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the clock synchronization status.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the priority table of a clock source.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock >
Clock Source Priority.
2.
Click the System Clock Source Priority List tab.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-97
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Source
External clock source 1

indicates the external
clock source at the
CLK or TIME port on
the CSTA, CSHA,
CSHB, or CSHC board
in physical slot 1.
The internal clock

source is always at the
lowest priority and
indicates that the NE
works in the free-run
mode.
The clock sources and

the corresponding
clock source priority
levels are determined
according to the clock
synchronization
schemes.
This parameter
indicates the type of the
external clock source
signal.

according to the
external clock signal.
In normal cases, the
external clock signal is
a 2 Mbit/s signal.
External Clock Source

Mode
A-98
2Mbit/s
2Mbit/s
2MHz

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Synchronous Status Byte
SA4 to SA8
SA4

only when External
Clock Source Mode is
set to 2Mbit/s.
This parameter
indicates which bit of
the TS0 in odd frames
of the external clock
signal is used to
transmit the SSM.

be set only when the
SSM or extended SSM
is enabled. In normal
cases, the external
clock sources use the
SA4 to transmit the
SSM.
Clock Source Priority

Sequence (1 is the
highest)
Displays the priority

sequence of clock sources.
1 indicates the highest
clock source priority.
A.7.2 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Subnet

This topic describes the parameters that are related to a clock subnet.
Navigation Path
1.
Clock Subnet Configuration.
2.
Click the Clock Subnet tab.
Parameters for Setting a Clock Subnet

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Affiliated Subnet
0 to 255
This parameter is used

when the clock subnet
needs to be created on
the NMS.
The NEs that trace the

same clock source
should be allocated
with the same clock
subnet ID.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-99
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protection Status
Start Extended SSM

Protocol
Stop SSM Protocol
The SSM protocol is a

scheme used for
synchronous
management on an
SDH network and
indicates that the SSM
is passed by the lower
four bits of the S1 byte
and can be exchanged
between the nodes. The
SSM protocol ensures
that the equipment
automatically selects
the clock source of the
highest quality and
highest priority, thus
preventing mutual
clock tracing.
After the standard SSM

protocol is started, the
NE first performs the
protection switching on
the clock source
according to the clock
quality level
information provided
by the S1 byte. If the
quality level of the
clock source is the
same, the NE then
performs the protection
switching according to
the clock priority table.
That is, the NE selects
an unlocked clock
source that is of the
highest quality and
highest priority from all
the current available
clock sources as the
clock source to be
synchronized and
traced by the local
station.
If the SSM protocol is

stopped, it indicates
that the S1 byte is not
used. The NE selects
and switches a clock
Start Standard SSM

Protocol
Stop SSM Protocol
A-100

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
source only according
to the sequence
specified in the priority
table. The clock source
of the highest priority is
used as the clock source
to be traced.
l
Clock Source
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

After the SSM protocol

is stopped, each NE
performs the protection
switching on the clock
according to the preset
priority table of the
clock source only when
the clock source of a
higher priority is lost.

the clock source that is
configured for an NE. In
Clock Source Priority,
you can set whether to add
or delete a clock source.
A-101
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Source ID
(None)
(None)

only when the extended
SSM protocol is
started.
Clock source IDs are

allocated for the
following clock
sources only:
1 to 15
External clock
source
Internal clock source

of the node that
accesses the external
clock sources
Internal clock source

of the joint node of a
ring and a chain or
the joint node of two
rings
Line clock source

that enters the ring
when the intra-ring
line clock source is
configured at the
joint node of a ring
and a chain or the
joint node of two
rings
A.7.3 Parameter Description: Clock Subnet Setting_Clock Quality

This topic describes the parameters that are related clock quality.
Navigation Path
A-102
1.
2.
Click the Clock Quality tab.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters for Clock Source Quality

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Source

the name of the
configured clock source.
In Clock Source
Priority, you can set
whether to add or delete a
clock source.
Configuration Quality
Unknown
Synchronization Quality
Automatic Extraction

the quality level that is
configured for the clock
source. This function is
required only in a special
scenario or in a test.
Generally, this parameter
need not be set.

the clock source quality
signal received by the NE.
The NE extracts the clock
source quality signal from
the S1 byte of each clock
source.
G.811 Clock Signal

G.812 Transit Clock
Signal
G.812 Local Clock Signal
G.813 SDH Equipment
Timing Source (SETS)
Signal
Do Not Use For
Synchronization
Automatic Extraction
Clock Quality
Parameters for Manual Setting of 0 Quality Level

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name

the name of the NE.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-103
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Manual Setting of 0
Quality Level
Do Not Use For

Synchronization
Do Not Use For

Synchronization

the clock quality whose
level is manually set to
zero.
G.811 Reference Clock

Between G.811 Reference
Clock and G.812 Transit
Clock
Do Not Use For

Synchronization: the
notification
information in the
reverse direction of the
selected
synchronization clock
source to avoid direct
mutual locking of
adjacent NEs.
G.811 Reference
Clock: the clock signal
specified in ITU-T G.
811.
Between G.811
Reference Clock and
G.812 Transit Clock:
lower than the quality
level of the clock signal
specified in ITU-T G.
811 but higher than the
transit exchange clock
signal specified in ITUT G.812.
G.812 Transit Clock:

the transit exchange
clock signal specified
in ITU-T G.812.
Between G.812 Transit

Clock and G.812 Local
Clock: lower than the
transit exchange clock
signal specified in ITUT G.812 but higher than
the quality level of the
local exchange clock
G.812 Local Clock: the

local exchange clock
G.812 Transit Clock

Between G.812 Transit
Clock and G.812 Local
Clock
G.812 Local Clock
Between G.812 Local
Clock and synchronous
equipment timing source
(SETS)
SETS Clock
Between synchronous
equipment timing source
(SETS) and quality
unavailable
A-104

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
l
Between G.812 Local

Clock and synchronous
equipment timing
source (SETS): lower
than the quality level of
the local exchange
clock signal specified
in ITU-T G.812 but
higher than the quality
of the SETS.
SETS Clock: the clock

signal of the SETS.
Between synchronous
equipment timing
source (SETS) and
quality unavailable:
lower than the quality
of the SETS but higher
than the quality level
unavailable in the
synchronous timing
source.
A.7.4 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_SSM Output

Control
This topic describes the parameters that are related to SSM output control.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the SSM Output Control tab.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-105
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Line Port
This parameter
indicates the name of
the line clock port.
Line Port: indicates

the SSM quality
information output port
of the current available
line clock source and
the external clock
source. This output port
can transmit the quality
information of the
clock source by
outputting the S1 byte
to the downstream NE.

only when the SSM
protocol or the
extended SSM protocol
is started.
This parameter
indicates whether the
SSM is output at the
line port.
When the line port is

connected to an NE in
the same clock subnet,
set this parameter to
Enabled. Otherwise,
Disabled.
Enabled
Control Status
Enabled
Disabled
A.7.5 Parameter Description: Clock Subset Setting_Clock ID

Enabling Status
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the clock ID function.
Navigation Path
A-106
1.
2.
Click the Clock ID Status tab.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Line Port
This parameter
indicates the name of
the line clock port.
Line Port: indicates

the SSM quality
information output port
of the current available
line clock source and
the external clock
source. This output port
can transmit the quality
information of the
clock source by
outputting the S1 byte
to the downstream NE.

only when the extended
SSM protocol is
started.
This parameter
indicates whether the
clock source ID is
output at the line port.
If the line ports are

connected to the NEs in
the same clock subnet
and if the extended
SSM protocol is started
on the opposite NE, this
parameter is set to
Enabled. Otherwise,
Disabled.
Enabled
Enabled Status
Enabled
Disabled
A.7.6 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock

Source Restoration Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to clock source restoration.
Navigation Path
1.
Clock Source Switching.
2.
Click the Clock Source Reversion Parameter tab.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-107
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name

the name of the NE.
Higher Priority Clock

Source Reversion Mode
Auto-Revertive
Auto-Revertive
When the quality of a

higher-priority clock
source degrades, the
NE automatically
switches the clock
source to a lowerpriority clock source. If
Auto-Revertive, the
NE automatically
switches the clock
source to the higherpriority clock source
when this higherpriority clock source
restores. If this
parameter is set to NonRevertive, the NE does
not automatically
switch the clock source
to the higher-priority
clock source when this
higher-priority clock
source restores.
Correct setting of
Clock Source
Switching Condition
ensures the reliability
of the clock source
switching. To improve
the clock quality, select
Auto-Revertive.
Otherwise, to prevent
jitter of the clock,
generally, it is
Non-Revertive.
A-108
Non-Revertive

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Source WTR

Time(min.)
0 to 12
This parameter
specifies the duration
from the time when the
clock source
restoration is detected
to the time when the
clock source switching
is triggered. This
parameter is used to
avoid frequent
switching of the clock
source due to
unstability of the clock
source state within a
short time.

only when Higher
Priority Clock Source
Reversion Mode is set
to Auto-Revertive.
A.7.7 Parameter Description: Clock Source Switching_Clock

Source Switching
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the switching conditions of a clock source.
Navigation Path
1.
Clock Source Switching.
2.
Click the Clock Source Switching tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Clock Source

the name of the clock
source.
Effective Status
Valid

whether the clock source
is valid.
Invalid
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-109
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Lock Status
Lock
This parameter
specifies the locking
status of the clock
source in the priority
table.
Lock: A clock source in

the priority table is in
the locked state. The
clock source in the
locked state cannot be
switched.
Unlock: A clock source

in the priority table is in
the unlocked state. The
clock source in the
unlocked state can be
switched.
Unlock
Switching Source

the clock source to be
traced by the NE after the
switching.
Switching Status
Normal

the switching status of the
current clock source.
Manual Switching
Forced Switching
A.7.8 Parameter Description: Output Phase-Locked Source of the

External Clock Source
This topic describes the parameters of the output phase-locked source of the external clock
source.
Navigation Path
Phase-Locked Source Output by External Clock.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
2M Phase-Locked
Source Number
External Clock Source 1

the number of the external
clock source output of the
NE.
A-110

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
External Clock Output

Mode
2Mbit/s
2Mbit/s
This parameter
specifies the mode of
the output clock.

be set according to the
requirements of the
interconnected
equipment. Generally,
the output external
clock signal is a 2 Mbit/
s signal.

only when External
Clock Output Mode is
set to 2Mbit/s.
This parameter
indicates which bit of
the TS0 in odd frames
of the output clock
signal is used to
transmit the SSM.

to ALL, it indicates
that all the bits of the
TS0 are used to
transmit the SSM.
you use the default
value.
External Clock Output

Timeslot
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
2MHz
SA4 to SA8
ALL
ALL

A-111
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
External Source Output

Threshold
Threshold Disabled
Threshold Disabled
This parameter
specifies the lowest
quality of the output
clock. If the clock
quality is lower than the
value of this parameter,
it indicates that the
external clock source
does not output any
clock signal.

to Threshold
Disabled, it indicates
that the external clock
source always outputs
the clock signal.
you use the default
value.
This parameter
specifies the failure
condition of the 2 Mbit/
s phase-locked clock
source.
you use the default
value.

only when 2M PhaseLocked Source Fail
Condition is not set to
No Failure Condition.
This parameter
specifies the operation
of the 2 Mbit/s phaselocked loop (PLL)
when the 2 Mbit/s
phase-locked clock
source meets the failure
conditions.
you use the default
value.
Not Inferior to G.813

SETS Signal
Local Signal
Transit Clock Signal
Clock Signal
2M Phase-Locked
Source Fail Condition
No Failure Condition
No Failure Condition
AIS
LOF
AIS OR LOF
2M Phase-Locked
Source Fail Action
Shut Down Output
Shut Down Output
2M Output S1 Byte
Unavailable
Send AIS
A-112

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910


This topic describes the parameters that are related to the clock synchronization status.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Clock > Clock
Synchronization Status.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
NE Name

the name of the NE.
NE Clock Working
Mode

the working mode of the
NE clock.
S1 Byte Synchronization
Quality Information

the synchronization
quality information of the
S1 byte.
S1 Byte Synchronous
Source

the clock synchronization
source of the S1 byte.
Synchronous Source

the synchronization
source.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-113
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Data Output Method in

Holdover Mode
Normal Data Output

Mode
Normal Data Output

Mode
When all the reference

timing signals are lost,
the slave clock changes
to the holdover mode.
At this time, the slave
clock works based on
the latest frequency
information stored
before the reference
timing signals are lost.
Then, the frequency of
the oscillator drifts
slowly to ensure that
the offset between the
frequency of the slave
clock and the reference
frequency is very
small. As a result, the
impact caused by the
drift is limited within
the specified
requirement.
Normal Data Output

Mode: The slave clock
works based on the
latest frequency
information stored
timing signals are lost,
and the holdover
duration depends on the
size of the phaselocked clock register on
the equipment. The
holdover duration can
be up to 24 hours.
Keep the Latest Data:

The slave clock works
in holdover mode all
the time based on the
latest frequency
information stored
timing signals are lost.
Keep the Latest Data
A.8 Parameters for Ethernet Services

This topic describes the parameters that are related to Ethernet services.
A-114

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

A.8.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation

This topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line)
service.
A.8.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service
This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services.
A.8.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table Item_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items.
A.8.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (ELAN) service.
A.8.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service
This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services.
A.8.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.
A.8.1 Parameter Description: E-Line Service_Creation

This topic describes the interface parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet line (E-Line)
service.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Ethernet
Service Management > E-Line Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294

the ID of the E-Line
service.
Service Name

the name of the E-Line
service.
Direction
UNI-UNI
UNI-UNI
This parameter
specifies the direction
of the E-Line service.

according to the
UNI-NNI
NNI-NNI
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-115
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
BPDU
Not Transparently
Transmitted
Not Transparently
Transmitted
This parameter
specifies the
transparent
transmission ID of the
bridge protocol data
unit (BPDU) packets. It
is used to indicate
whether the E-Line
service transparently
transmits the BPDU
packets.
If the BPDU packets

are used as the service
packets and
transparently
transmitted to the
opposite end, set this
parameter to
Transparently
Transmitted.
In other cases, set this

parameter to Not
Transparently
Transmitted.

according to the
Transparently
Transmitted
MTU(byte)
The OptiX RTN 910 does

not support this
parameter.
Service Tag Role

not support this
parameter.
A-116

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Port

only when Direction is
set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI.
Before setting this

parameter, check and
ensure that the
attributes in Ethernet
Interface of the port
are set correctly and are
the same as the
The value of this

parameter cannot be the
same as the value of
sink port.
The value of this

parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.

according to the
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-117
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source VLANs
1 to 4094
This parameter can be

set to null, a number, or
several numbers. When
setting this parameter
to several numbers, use
the comma (,) to
separate the discrete
numbers, or use the
endash (-) to represent
a consecutive number.
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
indicate 1, 3, 4, 5, and
6.

set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI.
The number of VLANs

must be the same value
of Sink VLANs.
Otherwise, you need to
create a VLAN
forwarding table for
swapping VLAN IDs.

to null, all the services
at the source port are
used as the service
source.
If this parameter is not

set to null, only the
service that contains
the VLAN ID at the
source port can be used
as the service source.
Uses the QinQ link to

carry the E-Line
service.

set to UNI-NNI.
Bearer Type
A-118
QinQ Link
QinQ Link

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
QinQ Link ID
Selects the QinQ link

ID.
A QinQ link ID is
preset in QinQ Link.

set to UNI-NNI.

carry the E-Line
service.

set to NNI-NNI.

ID of the first QinQ
link.

set to NNI-NNI.
The QinQ link ID is


carry the E-Line
service.

set to NNI-NNI.

ID of the second QinQ
link.

set to NNI-NNI.
The QinQ link ID is

Bearer Type 1
QinQ Link ID 1
Bearer Type 2
QinQ Link ID 2
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
QinQ Link
QinQ Link
QinQ Link
QinQ Link

A-119
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Sink Port
Before setting this

parameter, check and
ensure that the
attributes in Ethernet
Interface of the port
are set correctly and are
the same as the
The value of this

parameter cannot be the
same as the value of
Source Port.
The value of this

parameter cannot be
used for the E-LAN
port.

according to the

the comma (,) to
numbers, or use the
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
The number of VLANs

must be the same value
of Source VLANs.

at the sink port are used
as the service sink.

service that contains
the VLAN ID at the
sink port can be used as
the service sink.
Sink VLANs
A-120
1 to 4094

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

A.8.2 Parameter Description: E-Line Service

This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-Line services.
Navigation Path

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294

the ID of the E-Line
service.
Service Name

or specifies the name of
the E-Line service.
Source Node

the source node.
Sink Node

the sink node.
Service Tag Role

not support this
parameter.
MTU(byte)
1518 to 9600

not support this
parameter.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-121
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
BPDU
Not Transparently
Transmitted
This parameter
indicates the
transparent
transmission tag of the
bridge protocol data
unit (BPDU) packets.
to indicate whether the
Ethernet line
transparently transmits
the BPDU packets.
If the BPDU packets

are used as the service
packets and
transparently
transmitted to the
opposite end, set this
parameter to
Transparently
Transmitted.
If the BPDU packets

are used as the protocol
packets to compute the
spanning tree topology
of the network, set this
parameter to Not
Transparently
Transmitted.
Transparently
Transmitted
Active
Active

whether E-Line service is
active.
Inactive
Parameters Associated with UNI Ports

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

the UNI port.
A-122

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLANs
1 to 4094

or specifies the VLAN ID
of the UNI port.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


the comma (,) to
numbers, or use the
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.

set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI in the
process of creating an
E-Line service.

of the UNI work as the
service source or
service sink.

services of the UNI port
whose VLAN IDs are
included in the set
value of this parameter
work as the service
source or service sink.
A-123
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters Associated with NNI Ports

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
QinQ Link ID
1 to 4294967295
This parameter
indicates the QinQ link
ID of the QinQ link
connected to the NNI
port.

set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.
This parameter
indicates the NNI port.

set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.
This parameter
indicates or specifies
the VLAN ID of the
NNI port.

set to UNI-NNI or
NNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.
This parameter is preset

in QinQ Link.
Port
S-VLAN ID
Parameters for the Port Attributes

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

the QinQ link ID of the
QinQ link connected to
the port.
A-124

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable Port
This parameter
indicates whether to
enable the port.

in General Attributes
of Ethernet Interface.
This parameter
indicates the
encapsulation type of
the port.

set to UNI-UNI or
UNI-NNI in the
E-Line service.

to Null, the port
transparently transmits
the received packets.

to 802.1Q, the port
identifies the packets
that comply with the
IEEE 802.1Q standard.

to QinQ, the port
identifies the packets
that comply with the
IEEE 802.1 QinQ
standard.

in General Attributes
of Ethernet Interface.
This parameter
indicates the tag of the
port.

in Layer 2 Attributes
of Ethernet
Interface .
Encapsulation Type
Null
802.1Q
QinQ
TAG
Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-125
OptiX RTN 910

A.8.3 Parameter Description: VLAN Forwarding Table

Item_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating VLAN forwarding table items.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the VLAN Forwarding Table Item tab.
3.
Click New.
Parameters for VLAN Forwarding Table Item

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source Interface Type
V-UNI
V-UNI

the network attribute of
the source interface.
Source Interface

the source interface.
Source VLAN ID
1 to 4094

the VLAN ID of the
source service.
Sink Interface Type
V-UNI
V-UNI

the network attribute of
the sink interface.
Sink Interface

the sink interface.
Sink VLAN ID
1 to 4094

the VLAN ID of the sink
service.
NOTE
The VLAN ID of the UNI-UNI E-Line service can be converted after a VLAN forwarding table item is
created. In this case, a service from Source Interface to Sink Interface carries the VLAN ID specified in
Sink VLAN ID when the service is transmitted from Sink Interface.
The VLAN ID in a VLAN forwarding table item is converted unidirectionally and can be converted from
Source VLAN ID to Sink VLAN ID only. The VLAN ID can be converted bidirectionally only when the
other VLAN forwarding table item is configured reversely.
In normal cases, Ethernet services are bidirectional. Hence, you need to set bidirectional conversion of
VLAN IDs.
A.8.4 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating an Ethernet local area network (ELAN) service.
A-126

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Navigation Path
1.
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294
This parameter
specifies the ID of the
E-LAN service.
The OptiX RTN 910

supports simultaneous
creation of an E-LAN
service only.
Service Name

the name of the E-LAN
service.
BPDU
This parameter
indicates the
transparent
BPDU packets.
In the case of an ELAN service, this

parameter supports
only transparent
transmission of the
BPDU packets and
cannot be set manually.
Not Transparently
Transmitted indicates
that the BPDU packets
of the network.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-127
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tag Type
C-Awared
C-Awared
C-Awared indicates
that the packets are
learnt according to CTag (the VLAN tag on
the client-side). To
create the 802.1q
bridge, set this
parameter to CAwared.
S-Awared indicates
learnt according to STag (the VLAN tag at
the carrier service
layer). To create the
802.1ad bridge, set this
parameter to SAwared.
Tag-Transparent
indicates that only the
Ethernet packets that
do not contain VLAN
tags are accessed. To
create the 802.1d
bridge, set this
parameter to TagTransparent.

according to the
S-Awared
Tag-Transparent
A-128

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Self-Learning MAC
Address
Enabled
Enabled
This parameter
enable the MAC
address self-learning
function.
If the MAC selflearning function of an

Ethernet LAN is
enabled, the Ethernet
LAN learns an MAC
address according to
the original MAC
address in the packet
and automatically
refreshes the MAC
address forwarding
table.

Ethernet LAN is
disabled, a static MAC
address forwarding
table needs to be
configured. Otherwise,
the Ethernet LAN fails
to forward the services.
This parameter
indicates the mode used
to learn an MAC
address.
When the bridge uses

the SVL mode, all the
VLANs share one
MAC address table. If
the bridge uses the IVL
mode, each VLAN has
an MAC address table.
MAC Address Learning

Mode
Disabled
MTU(byte)

not support this
parameter.
Service Tag Role

not support this
parameter.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-129
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters for UNIs

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

the UNI port.
SVLAN
1 to 4094
This parameter
specifies the S-VLAN
ID of the UNI port.

only when Tag Type is
set to S-Awared.

according to the
This parameter
specifies the VLAN ID
of the UNI port.

the comma (,) to
numbers, or use the
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.

of the UNI work as the
service source or
service sink.

services of the UNI port
whose VLAN IDs are
included in the set
value of this parameter
work as the service
source or service sink.
VLANs/CVLAN
A-130
1 to 4094

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters of NNIs
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
This parameter

set to S-Awared.
This parameter
ID of the NNI port.

set to S-Awared.
SVLANs
Parameters for the Split Horizon Group

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Split Horizon Group ID
This parameter
indicates the ID of the
split horizon group.
The default split

horizon group ID is 1
and cannot be set
manually.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-131
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Split Horizon Group

Member
A split horizon group

member indicates the
logical port member in
the split horizon group.
The port members that

are added to the same
split horizon group
cannot communicate
with each other.
The OptiX RTN 910

supports only the
division of the split
horizon group
members according to
the Ethernet physical
port.
If a UNI or NNI logical

port of the 802.1ad
bridge is added to a
split horizon group
member, the physical
port that is mounted
with the logical port is
automatically added to
the split horizon group
member.
A.8.5 Parameter Description: E-LAN Service

This topic describes the parameters that are related to E-LAN services.
Navigation Path
Service Management > E-LAN Service from the Function Tree.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID
1 to 4294967294
This parameter
E-LAN service.
The supports
simultaneous creation
of an E-LAN service
only.
A-132

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service Name

the name of the E-LAN
service.
BPDU
This parameter
indicates the
transparent
BPDU packets.
In the case of an ELAN service, this

parameter supports
only transparent
transmission of the
BPDU packets and
Not Transparently
Transmitted indicates
that the BPDU packets
of the network.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-133
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tag Type
C-Awared
C-Awared
C-Awared indicates
learnt according to CTag (the VLAN tag on
the client-side). To
create the 802.1q
bridge, set this
parameter to CAwared.
S-Awared indicates
learnt according to STag (the VLAN tag at
the carrier service
layer). To create the
802.1ad bridge, set this
Tag-Transparent
indicates that only the
Ethernet packets that
do not contain VLAN
tags are accessed. To
create the 802.1d
bridge, set this
This parameter
indicates whether to
enable the MAC
address self-learning
function.

Ethernet LAN is
enabled, the Ethernet
LAN learns an MAC
address according to
the original MAC
address in the packet
and automatically
refreshes the MAC
address forwarding
table.
S-Awared
Tag-Transparent
Self-Learning MAC
Address
A-134
Enabled
Enabled

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MAC Address Learning

Mode
This parameter
indicates the mode used
to learn an MAC
address.
When the bridge uses

the SVL mode, all the
VLANs share one
MAC address table. If
the bridge uses the IVL
mode, each VLAN has
an MAC address table.
MTU(byte)

not support this
parameter.
Service Tag Role

not support this
parameter.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

the UNI port.
SVLAN
1 to 4094
This parameter
ID of the UNI port.

set to S-Awared.

according to the
Parameters for UNIs
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-135
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLANs/CVLAN
1 to 4094
This parameter
of the UNI port.

the comma (,) to
numbers, or use the
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.

to null, the E-LAN
service exclusively
uses the corresponding
UNI physical port. That
is, the entire port is
mounted to the bridge.

to a non-null value,
only the corresponding
UNI port whose service
packets contain this
VLAN ID works as the
logical port and is
mounted to the bridge.
Parameters for NNIs

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
This parameter

set to S-Awared.
A-136

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SVLANs
This parameter
ID of the UNI port.

set to S-Awared.

the comma (,) to
numbers, or use the
For example, the
numbers 1, and 3-6
6.
Parameters for Static MAC Addresses

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
This parameter is
invalid if MAC
Address Learning
Mode is SVL. That is,
the preset static MAC
address entries are
valid for all VLANs.
If MAC Address
Learning Mode is set
to IVL, the preset static
MAC address entries
are valid for only the
VLANs whose VLAN
ID is equal to the preset
VLAN ID.

according to the
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-137
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MAC Address
This parameter
the static MAC
address.
A static MAC address

is an address that is set
manually. It is not aged
automatically and
needs to be deleted
manually.
Generally, a static
MAC address is used
for the port that
receives but does not
forward Ethernet
service packets or the
port whose MAC
address need not be
aged automatically.
This parameter
specifies the Ethernet
port that corresponds to
the MAC address.

according to the
Egress Interface
A-138

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters for Self-Learning MAC Address

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID
This parameter is
invalid if MAC
Address Learning
Mode is SVL. That is,
the preset self-learning
MAC address entries
are valid for all
VLANs.
If MAC Address
Learning Mode is set
to IVL, the preset selflearning MAC address
entries are valid for
only the VLANs whose
VLAN ID is equal to
the preset VLAN ID.

according to the
This parameter
the self-learning MAC
address. A selflearning MAC address
is also called a dynamic
MAC address.
A self-learning MAC
address is an entry
obtained by a bridge in
SVL or IVL learning
mode. A self-learning
MAC address can be
aged.
This parameter
specifies the Ethernet
port that corresponds to
the MAC address.

according to the
MAC Address
Egress Interface
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-139
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters Associated with MAC Address Learning

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Aging Ability
Enabled
Enabled
The OptiX RTN 910

supports enabling/
disabling of the aging
function and aging time
for the MAC address
table.
If one routing entry is not
updated in a certain
period, that is, if no new
packet from this MAC
address is received to
enable the re-learning of
this MAC address, this
routing entry is
automatically deleted.
This mechanism is called
aging, and this period is
called aging time. The
aging time of a MAC
address table is 5 minutes
by default.
Disabled
Aging Time(min)
Parameters for Disabled MAC Addresses

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN ID

or specifies the VLAN ID
of the service. A disabled
MAC address is valid for
the VLAN whose VLAN
ID is equal to the preset
VLAN ID.
A-140

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MAC Address
This parameter
specifies or indicates
the disabled MAC
address. A disabled
MAC address is also
called a blacklisted
MAC address.

for discarding an entry,
also called a black hole
entry, whose data
frame that contains a
specific destination
MAC address. A
disabled MAC address
needs to be set
manually and cannot be
aged.
Parameters for Unknown Frame Processing

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Frame Type
Unicast

the type of the received
unknown frame.
Broadcast
Selects the method of

processing the unknown
frame. If this parameter is
set to Discard, the
unknown frame is directly
discarded. If this
parameter is set to
Broadcast, the unknown
frame is broadcast at the
forwarding port.
Multicast
Handing Mode
Discard
Broadcast
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-141
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters for the Split Horizon Group

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Split Horizon Group ID
This parameter
split horizon group.
The default split

horizon group ID is 1
and cannot be set
manually.
A split horizon group

member indicates the
logical port member in
the split horizon group.
The port members that

are added to different
split horizon groups
cannot communicate
with each other.
The supports only the

division of the split
horizon group
members according to
the Ethernet physical
port.
If a UNI or NNI logical

port of the 802.1ad
bridge is added to a
split horizon group
member, the physical
port that is mounted
with the logical port is
automatically added to
the split horizon group
member.
Split Horizon Group

Member
Maintenance Association Parameters

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Domain Name
This parameter indicates the maintenance

domain of the created maintenance
association.
A-142

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Association Name
This parameter specifies the name of the

maintenance association, which is a
domain related to a service. Through
maintenance association division, the
connectivity check (CC) can be
performed on the network that transmits
a service instance.
This parameter can contain a maximum

of eight bytes.
This parameter specifies the interval for

transmitting packets in the CC test.
The CC is performed to check the

availability of the service.
CC Test Transmit
Period
1s
1s
10s
1m
10m
Parameters for the MEP

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Domain Name

domain of the created MEP.
Maintenance
Association Name

association of the created MEP.
Node
This parameter indicates the MEP node.
VLAN
This parameter indicates the VLAN ID of

the current service.
MP ID
1 to 2048
This parameter specifies the MEP ID.
Each MEP needs to be configured with

an MEP ID, which is unique in the
maintenance association. The MEP ID is
required in the OAM operation.
This parameter specifies the direction of

the MEP.
"Ingress" indicates the direction in which

the packets are transmitted to the port,
and "Egress" indicates the direction in
which the packets are transmitted from
the port.

enable the CC function of the MEP.
In the case of the tests based on the MP

IDs, CC Status must be set to Active.
Direction
Ingress
Ingress
Egress
CC Status
Active
Active
Inactive
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-143
OptiX RTN 910

A.8.6 Parameter Description: QinQ Link_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a QinQ link.
Navigation Path
1.
Service Management > QinQ Link from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Parameters for the General Attributes

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
QinQ Link ID
1 to 4294967295

the ID of the QinQ link.
NOTE
The OptiX RTN 910
supports 1024 QinQ links,
whose IDs must be different
from each other.
Board

the board where the QinQ
link is located.
Port

the port where the QinQ
link is located.
S-Vlan ID
1 to 4094
This parameter
(at the network
operator side) for the
QinQ link.

according to the
A.9 Ethernet Protocol Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet protocol.
A.9.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.
A.9.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)
management.
A.9.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating MSTP port groups.
A-144

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

A.9.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group Configuration

A.9.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to MSTP bridges.
A.9.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST.
A.9.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running Information About the CIST
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTP
CIST.
A.9.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Protocol Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IGMP snooping protocol.
A.9.9 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Adding Port to Be Quickly
Deleted
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding a port to be quickly deleted.
A.9.10 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for IGMP Snooping protocol route
management.
A.9.11 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuraiton_Static Router Port Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static router ports.
A.9.12 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Route Member Port
Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the route member ports of the
IGMP Snooping protocol.
A.9.13 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Static Multicast Group Member
Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static multicast groups.
A.9.14 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping Configuration_Data Statistics
This topic describes the parameters that are used for collecting the data statistics of the IGMP
Snooping protocol.
A.9.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation Management_LAG Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).
A.9.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Port Priority
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the port priority of a LAG.
A.9.17 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating LPT management.
A.9.18 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port mirroring tasks.
A.9.1 Parameter Description: ERPS Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating ERPS management tasks.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-145
OptiX RTN 910

Navigation Path
1.
Protection > ERPS Management.
2.
Click New.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ERPS ID
1 to 8
This parameter
specifies the ID of the
Ethernet ring
protection switching
(ERPS) instance.
The IDs of ERPS

instances on an NE
must be different from
each other.
East Port

the east port of the ERPS
instance.
West Port

the west port of the ERPS
instance.
RPLOwner Ring Node

Flag
Yes
No
This parameter
specifies whether the
node on the ring is the
ring protection link
(RPL) owner.
Only one node on the

ring can be set as the
RPL owner for each
Ethernet ring.
This parameter
specifies the RPL port.
There is only one RPL

port and this RPL port
must be the east or west
port on the RPL owner
node.
RPL Port
A-146
No

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Control VLAN
1 to 4094
This parameter
of Control VLAN.
Each node on the

Ethernet ring transmits
the R-APS packets on
the dedicated ring APS
(R-APS) channel to
ensure consistency
between the nodes
when the ERPS
switching is performed.
Control VLAN is used
for isolating the
dedicated R-APS
channel. Therefore, the
VLAN ID in Control
VLAN cannot be
duplicate with the
VLAN IDs that are
contained in the service
packets or inband DCN
packets.
The Control VLAN

must be set to the same
value for all the NEs on
an ERPS ring.
Destination Node
01-19-A7-00-00-01
01-19-A7-00-00-01

the MAC address of the
destination node. The
default destination MAC
address in the R-APS
packets is always 01-19A7-00-00-01.
A.9.2 Parameter Description: ERPS Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)
management.
Navigation Path
Protection > ERPS Management from the Function Tree.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-147
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ERPS ID
1 to 8

the ID of the ERPS
instance.
East Port

the east port of the ERPS
instance.
West Port

the west port of the ERPS
instance.
RPL Owner Ring Node

Flag
Yes

whether a node on the ring
is the ring protection link
(RPL) owner.
RPL Port

the RPL port.
Control VLAN
1 to 4094
This parameter
the VLAN ID of
Control VLAN.
Each node on the

Ethernet ring transmits
the R-APS packets on
the dedicated ring APS
(R-APS) channel to
ensure consistency
between the nodes
when the ERPS
switching is performed.
Control VLAN is used
for isolating the
dedicated R-APS
channel. Therefore, the
VLAN ID in Control
VLAN cannot be
duplicate with the
VLAN IDs that are
contained in the service
packets or inband DCN
packets.
The Control VLAN

must be set to the same
value for all the NEs on
an ERPS ring.
A-148
No

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination Node
01-19-A7-00-00-01

destination node. The
default destination MAC
address in the R-APS
packets is always 01-19A7-00-00-01.
Hold-Off Time(ms)
0 to 10000, in step of 100
This parameter
the hold-off time of the
ERPS hold-off timer.
The hold-off timer is

used for negotiating the
sequence when the
ERPS coexists with
other protection
schemes so that the
fault can be rectified in
the case of other
(such as LAG
protection) before the
ERPS occurs. When a
node on the ring detects
one or more new faults,
it starts up the hold-off
timer if the preset holdoff time is set to a value
that is not 0. During the
hold-off time, the fault
is not reported to
trigger an ERPS. When
the hold-off timer times
out, the node checks the
link status regardless
whether the fault that
triggers the startup of
the timer exists. If the
fault exists, the node
reports it to trigger an
ERPS. This fault can be
the same as or different
from the fault that
triggers the initial
startup of the hold-off
timer.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-149
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Guard Time(ms)
10 to 2000, in step of 10
This parameter
the guard time of the
ERPS guard timer.
The nodes on the ring

continuously forward
the R-APS packets to
the Ethernet ring. As a
result, the outdated RAPS packets may exist
on the ring network.
After a node on the ring
receives the outdated
R-APS packets, an
incorrect ERPS may
occur. The ERPS guard
timer is an R-APS timer
used for preventing a
node on the ring from
receiving outdated RAPS packets. When a
faulty node on the ring
detects that the
switching condition is
cleared, the node starts
up the guard timer and
starts to forward the RAPS (NR) packets.
During this period, the
R-APS packets
received by the node
are discarded. The
received R-APS
packets are forwarded
only after the time of
the guard timer expires.
A-150

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
WTR Time(min)
This parameter
the WTR time of the
WRT timer in the case
of ERPS protection.
The WTR time refers to

the duration from the
time when the working
channel is restored to
the time when the
switching is released.
When the working
channel is restored, the
WTR timer of the RPL
owner starts up. In
addition, a signal that
indicates the operation
of the WTR timer is
continuously output in
the timing process.
When the WTR timer
times out and no
switching request of a
higher priority is
received, the signal
indicating the
operation of the WTR
timer is not transmitted.
In addition, the WTR
release signal is
continuously output.
The WTR timer is used

to prevent frequent
switching caused by the
unstable working
channel.
Packet Transmit
Interval(s)
1 to 10
This parameter displays or

specifies the interval for
sending R-APS packets
periodically.
Entity Level
0 to 7

or specifies the level of the
maintenance entity.
Last Switching Request

the last switching request.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-151
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
RB Status

the RB status of the
packets received by the
working node.
DNF Status
A-152

noRB: The RPL is not

blocked.
RB (RPL Blocked):
The RPL is blocked.

the DNF status of the
packets received by the
working node.
l
noDNF: The R-APS

packets do not contain
the DNF flag. In this
case, the packets are
forwarded by the node
that detects the fault on
a non-RPL link, and the
node that receives the
packets is requested to
clear the forwarding
address table.
DNF: The R-APS

packets contain the
DNF flags. In this case,
the packets are
forwarded by the node
that detects the fault on
an RPL link, and the
node that receives the
packets is informed not
to clear the forwarding
address table.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Status of State Machine

the status of the state
machine at the working
node.
Node Carried with

Current Packet
Idle: The Ethernet ring

is in normal state. For
example, no node on
the Ethernet ring
detects any faults or
receive the R_APS
(NR, RB) packets.
Protection: The
Ethernet ring is in
protected state. For
example, a fault on the
node triggers the
ERPS, or a node on the
ring is in the WTR
period after the fault is
rectified.

the MAC address carried
in the R-APS packets
received by the current
node. The MAC address
refers to the MAC address
of the source node that
initiates the switching
request.
A.9.3 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group

Creation
Navigation Path
1.
Protocol Configuration > MSTP Configuration from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Port Group Parameters tab.
3.
Click Create. The Create Port Group dialog box is displayed.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-153
OptiX RTN 910


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Protocol Type
MSTP
MSTP

the protocol type.
STP
Enable Protocol
Enabled
Disabled
MSTP: stands for

Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 910
supports the CIST
MSTP only.
STP: stands for

Spanning Tree
Protocol.
This parameter
enable the protocol of
the port group or a
member port in the port
group.
If the STP or MSTP is

enabled, the spanning
tree topology is
automatically reconfigured. As a result,
the services are
interrupted.
Disabled
Parameters for Application Ports

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board

the board where the
member of port group is
located.
Available Port List

the available port list in
which a port can be added
to the port group.
Selected Port List

the selected ports that can
be added to the port group.
A-154

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

A.9.4 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Port Group

Configuration
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Port Group Parameters tab.
3.
On the main interface, select the port group to be configured.
4.
Click Config. The Configure Port Group dialog box is displayed.
Parameters for the Added Port

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board

the board where the
member of port group is
located.
Available Port List

the available port list in
which a port needs to be
added to the port group.
Selected Port List

the selected ports that
need to be added to the
port group.
A.9.5 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_ Bridge

Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to MSTP bridges.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Bridge Parameters tab.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-155
OptiX RTN 910


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Group ID
This parameter
port group.

set to only the port
group ID that is
automatically
allocated.
MST Domain Name

not support this
parameter.
Redaction Level

not support this
parameter.
Mapping List

not support this
parameter.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Group ID
This parameter
port group.

set to only the port
Group ID that is
automatically
allocated.
Bridge Parameters
A-156

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Network Diameter
2 to 7
This parameter
specifies the MSTP
network diameter.
Network Diameter is
related to the link
whose number of
switches is the most
and is indicated by the
number of switches that
are connected to the
link. When you set
Network Diameter for
the switches, the MSTP
automatically sets Max
Age(s), Hello Time(s),
and Forward Delay(s)
to the more appropriate
values for the switches.
If the value of Network

Diameter is greater,
the network is in a
larger scale.
This parameter
specifies the interval
for transmitting the
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.
The greater the value of

this parameter, the less
the network resources
that are occupied by the
spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.
Hello Time(s)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-157
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Max Age(s)
6 to 40
20
This parameter
specifies the maximum
age of the CBPDU
packet that is recorded
by the port.
The greater the value,

the longer the
transmission distance
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater. When the value
of this parameter is
greater, it is less
possible that the bridge
detects the link fault in
a timely manner and
thus the network
adaptation ability is
reduced.
This parameter
specifies the holdoff
time of a port in the
listening state and in
the learning state.

the longer the delay of
the network state
change. Hence, the
topology changes are
slower and the recovery
in the case of faults is
slower.
Forward Delay(s)
4 to 30
15
Port Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

the port in the port group.
A-158

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable Edge Attribute
Disabled
Disabled
This parameter
specifies the
management edge
attributes of the port.
This parameter
specifies whether to set
the port as an edge port.
The edge port refers to
the bridge port that is
connected to the LAN.
In normal cases, this
port does not receive or
transmit BPDU
messages.

set to Enabled only
when the port is
directly connected to
the data
communications
terminal equipment,
such as a computer. In
other cases, it is
use the default value.
Enabled
Actual Edge Attribute
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


the actual management
edge attributes of the port.
A-159
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Point-to-Point Attribute
false
auto
This parameter
specifies the point-topoint attribute of the
port.
false: forced nonpoint-to-point link

attribute
true: forced point-topoint link attribute
auto: automatically
detected point-to-point
link attribute

to auto, the bridge
determines Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute of the port
working mode. If the
actual working mode is
full-duplex, the actual
point-to-point attribute
is true. If the actual
working mode is halfduplex, Actual Pointto-Point Attribute is
false.
Only the designated

port whose Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute is "True" can
transmit the rapid state
migration request and
response.
you use the default
value.
true
auto
Actual Point-to-Point
Attribute
A-160


the actual point-to-point
attribute of the port.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Max Transmit Packet

Count
1 to 255
This parameter
number of packets to be
transmitted.
The maximum number

of packets to be
transmitted by the port
refers to the maximum
number of MSTP
packets that the port
can transmit within 1s.

A.9.6 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_CIST

Parameters
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the MSTP CIST.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the CIST&MSTI Parameters tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Group

the port group.
MSTI ID

the MSTI ID. The value 0
indicates common and
internal spanning tree
(CIST). TheOptiX RTN
910 supports only the
MSTP that uses CIST.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-161
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bridge Priority
0 to 61440, in step of 4096
32768
The most significant 16

bits of the bridge ID
indicates the priority of
the bridge.
When the value is

smaller, the priority is
higher. As a result, the
bridge is more possible
to be selected as the
root bridge.
If the priorities of all

the bridges in the STP
network use the same
value, the bridge whose
MAC address is the
smallest is selected as
the root bridge.
Port Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

Priority
128
The most significant

eight bits of the port ID
indicate the port
priority.
When the value is

higher.
This parameter
indicates the status of
the network that the
port is connected to.
In the case of the

bridges on both ends of
the path, set this
parameter to the same
value.
Path Cost
A-162
1 to 200000000
200000

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

A.9.7 Parameter Description: MSTP Configuration_Running

Information About the CIST
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the running information about the MSTP
CIST.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the CIST Running Information tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Group ID

the ID of the port group.
Protocol Running Mode
MSTP
Disabled
This parameter
indicates the running
mode of the protocol.
MSTP: stands for

Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 910
supports only the
CIST-based MSTP.
STP: stands for

Spanning Tree
Protocol.
STP
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-163
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bridge Priority
0 to 61440, in step of 4096
32768
This parameter
the bridge.

the bridge.
When the value is

root bridge.

MAC address is the
the root bridge.
Bridge MAC Address

bridge.
Root Bridge MAC

Address

root bridge.
External Path Cost

ERPC

not support this
parameter.
Domain Root Bridge

Priority

not support this
parameter.
Domain Root Bridge

MAC Address

not support this
parameter.
Internal Path Cost IRPC

not support this
parameter.
A-164

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Root Port Priority
128
This parameter
the root port.

eight bits of the ID of
the root port indicate
the priority of the root
port.
When the value is

higher.
Root Port

the root port.
Hello Time(s)
This parameter
indicates the interval
for transmitting
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.

spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.
This parameter
age of the CBPDU
by the port.

the longer the
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater, it is less
a timely manner and
thus the network
reduced.
Max Age(s)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
6 to 40
20

A-165
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Forward Delay(s)
4 to 30
15
This parameter
specifies the holdoff
the learning state.

the network state
change. Hence, the
slower.
MST Domain Max Hop

Count

not support this
parameter.
Topology Change Count

the identifier of the
topology change.
Last Topology Change

Time(s)

the duration of the last
topology change.
Topology Change Count

the count of the topology
changes.
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

Enable Protocol
Enabled
Disabled

whether the protocol of
the port group or a
member of the port group
is enabled.

the role of a port.
Port Parameters
Disabled
Port Role
A-166

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Status
Discarding
Discarding

the state of a port.
Learning
Forwarding
Priority
Path Cost
Bridge Priority
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
1 to 200000000
0 to 61440, in step of 4096
128
200000
32768

Discarding: receives
only BPDU packets
Learning: only receives

or transmits BPDU
packets
Forwarding: forwards
user traffic, and
transmits/receives
BPDU packets

indicate the port
priority.
When the value is

higher.
This parameter
indicates the status of
the network that the
port is connected to.
In the case of the

bridges on both ends of
the path, set this
parameter to the same
value.

the bridge.
When the value is

root bridge.

MAC address is the
the root bridge.
A-167
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bridge MAC Address

bridge.
Designated Port Priority
128

indicate the port
priority.
When the value is

higher.
Design Port

the designated port.
Edge Port Attribute
Disabled
Enabled
This parameter
specifies the
management edge
attributes of the port.
This parameter
specifies whether to set
the port as an edge port.
The edge port refers to
the bridge port that is
connected to the LAN.
In normal cases, this
port does not receive or
transmit BPDU
messages.

set to Enabled only
when the port is
directly connected to
the data
communications
terminal equipment,
such as a computer. In
other cases, it is
Enabled
Actual Edge Port

Attribute
A-168


the actual management
edge attributes of the port.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Point to Point
false
auto
This parameter
specifies the point-topoint attribute of the
port.
false: forced nonpoint-to-point link

attribute
true: forced point-topoint link attribute
auto: automatically
detected point-to-point
link attribute

to auto, the bridge
determines Actual
Point to Point
Attribute of the port
working mode. If the
actual working mode is
full-duplex, the actual
point-to-point attribute
is true. If the actual
working mode is halfduplex, Actual Point
to Point Attribute is
false.
Only the designated

port whose Actual
Point-to-Point
Attribute is "True" can
transmit the rapid state
migration request and
response.
you use the default
value.
true
auto
Actual Point to Point
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


the actual point-to-point
attribute of the port.
A-169
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Max Count of
Transmitting Message
1 to 255
This parameter
indicates the maximum
number of packets to be
transmitted.
The maximum number

of packets to be
transmitted by the port
refers to the maximum
number of MSTP
packets that the port
can transmit within 1s.
This parameter
indicates the running
mode of the protocol.
MSTP: stands for

Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol. The
OptiX RTN 910
supports only the
CIST-based MSTP.
STP: stands for

Spanning Tree
Protocol.
This parameter
indicates the interval
for transmitting the
CBPDU packets
through the bridge.

spanning tree. The
topology stability,
however, decreases.
Protocol Running Mode
STP
MSTP
Hello Time(s)
A-170
1 to 10

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Max Age(s)
6 to 40
20
This parameter
age of the CBPDU
by the port.

the longer the
of the CBPDU, which
indicates that the
network diameter is
greater, it is less
a timely manner and
thus the network
reduced.
This parameter
specifies the holding
the learning state.

the network state
change. Hence, the
slower.
4 to 30
Forward Delay(s)
Remain Hop
15

not support this
parameter.
A.9.8 Parameter Description: IGMP Snooping

Configuration_Protocol Configuration
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the IGMP snooping protocol.
Navigation Path
1.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Protocol Configuration > IGMP Snooping Configuration from the Function Tree.
A-171
OptiX RTN 910

2.
Click the Protocol Configuration tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID

the service ID.
Enabled Protocol
Enabled
Disabled
This parameter
enable the IGMP
Snooping protocol.
If the bridge accesses a

LAN where the IGMP
multicast server exists,
you can enable the
IGMP Snooping
protocol according to
the requirement.
If an entry is not
updated in a certain
period (that is, no
IGMP query packet is
received), this entry is
automatically deleted.
This mechanism is
called aging, and this
period is called aging
time.

to a very large value,
the bridge stores
excessive multicast
entries that are
outdated.
Consequently, the
resources of the
multicast table are
exhausted.

to a very small value,
the bridge may delete
the multicast entry that
is required.
Consequently, the
forwarding efficiency
decreases.
Disabled
Router Port Aging Time

(min)
A-172
1 to 120

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maximum Times of No
Response from Multicast
Members
1 to 4
This parameter
number of multicast
group members who do
not respond.
If the IEEE 802.1q

bridge transmits an
IGMP group query
packet to the multicast
member ports, the
IEEE 802.1q bridge
starts the timer for the
query of the maximum
number of responses. If
no IGMP report
packets are received
within the query time,
the IEEE 802.1q bridge
adds one to the number
of no responses at the
port. When the number
of no responses
exceeds the preset
value of Maximum
Times of No Response
from Multicast
Members, the IEEE
802.1q bridge deletes
the additional multicast
members from the
multicast group.
This parameter
number of allowable
multicast groups.
The multicast group

records the mapping
relations between the
ports on the router,
MAC multicast
addresses, and member
ports in the multicast
group.
Maximum Number of
Multicast Groups
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-173
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maximum Number of
Multicast Group
Members
This parameter
number of allowable
multicast group
members.
A multicast group
member refers to the
host that is added to a
multicast group.
Actual Multicast Count

the number of actually
used multicast groups.
Actual Multicast
Members Count

the number of actually
used multicast group
members.

Configuration_Adding Port to Be Quickly Deleted
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding a port to be quickly deleted.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Protocol Configuration tab.
3.
Click Add.
Parameters for Fast Leave Ports

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID

the service ID.
VLAN ID
1 to 4094
This parameter
specifies the VLAN
where the port to be
quickly deleted is
located.

A-174

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Type
V-UNI
V-UNI
This parameter
specifies the type of the
port to be quickly
deleted.

V-NNI
Port

the port to be quickly
deleted.

Configuration_Route Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for IGMP Snooping protocol route
management.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Router Port Management tab.
Parameters for Router Port Management

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID

the ID of the created ELAN service.
VLAN ID
1 to 4094

the VLAN ID of the router
port.
Port Type

the type of the router port.
Port

the router port.
Port Status

the status of the router
port.
Port Creating Time

the time when the router
port is created.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-175
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port Remainder Aging

Time(min)

the remaining aging time
of the router port.

Configuraiton_Static Router Port Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static router ports.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Router Port Management tab.
3.
Click New.
Parameters for Router Port Creation

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID

VLAN ID
1 to 4094

the VLAN ID of the router
port.
Available Port

the available ports.
Selected Port

the specified router port.

Configuration_Route Member Port Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing the route member ports of the
IGMP Snooping protocol.
Navigation Path
A-176
1.
2.
Click the Route Member Port Management tab.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters for Multicast Groups Information

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID

VLAN ID
1 to 4094

the VLAN ID of the
multicast group.
Multicast MAC Address

the multicast MAC
address.
Multicast Groups Type

the type of the multicast
group.
Multicast Group
Creating Time

the time when the
multicast group is set up.
Parameters for Multicast Group Members Information

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID

VLAN ID
1 to 4094

the VLAN ID of the
multicast group member.
Port Type

the type of the multicast
group member.
Port

the multicast group
member port.
Port Remainder Aging

Times

the remaining nonresponse times of the
multicast group member
port.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-177
OptiX RTN 910


Configuration_Static Multicast Group Member Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for adding static multicast groups.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Route Member Port Management tab.
3.
Click New.
Parameters for Router Port Creation

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID

VLAN ID
1 to 4094

the VLAN ID of the
multicast group.
Multicast MAC Address

the multicast MAC
address.
Available Port

the available interfaces.
Selected Port

the preset port of the
multicast group members.

Configuration_Data Statistics
This topic describes the parameters that are used for collecting the data statistics of the IGMP
Snooping protocol.
Navigation Path
A-178
1.
2.
Click the Packet Statistics tab.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters for Routing Member Interface Management

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Service ID

the service ID.
VLAN ID

the VLAN ID of the
service.
Port Type

the port type.
Port

the port.
Packet Statistics Status
Clear
Clear

or specifies the status of
collecting the packet
statistics.
Start
Stop
IGMPv1 Query Packet
Count

the number of received
IGMPv1 query packets.
IGMPv2 Query Packet

Count

IGMPv3 Query Packet

Count

IGMP Leaving Packet

Count
This parameter displays

the number of leaving
packets that are received.
IGMPv1 Member
Report Packet Count

packets that are reported
by the IGMPv1 members.
IGMPv2 Member
Report Packet Count

IGMPv3 Member
Report Packet Count

Unrecognized or
Unprocessed Packet
Count

the number of packets that
cannot be recognized or
processed.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-179
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Discarded Incorrect
Packet Count

the number of discarded
error packets.
A.9.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation

Management_LAG Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a link aggregation group (LAG).
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Interface
Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Link Aggregation Group Management tab.
3.
Click New.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAG No.
1 to 16
This parameter
specifies the LAG
number to be set
manually.

only when
Automatically Assign
is not selected.
This parameter
indicates whether LAG
No. is allocated
automatically.
When Automatically
Assign is selected,
LAG No. cannot be set.
Selected
Selected
Deselected
LAG Name
A-180


the LAG name.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
LAG Type
Static
Static
Static: You can create a

LAG. When you add or
delete a member port to
or from the LAG, the
Link Aggregation
Control Protocol
(LACP) protocol is
required. In a LAG, a
port can be in the
Selected or Standby
state. The aggregation
information is
exchanged among
different equipment
through the LACP
protocol to ensure that
the aggregation
information is the same
among all the nodes.
Manual: You can

manually create a LAG.
When you add or delete
a member port, the
LACP protocol is not
required. The port can
be in the up or down
state. According to the
physical up or down
state, the port
determines whether to
perform an
aggregation.
Manual
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-181
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Revertive Mode
Revertive
Non-Revertive

set only when Load
Sharing is set to NonSharing.
When a LAG is set to

Revertive, the services
are switched back to the
former working
channel after this
normal.
When a LAG is set to

Non-Revertive, the
status of the LAG does
not change after the
former working
normal. That is, the
services are still
transmitted on the
protection channel.
Sharing: Each member

link of a LAG
processes traffic at the
same time and shares
the traffic load. The
sharing mode can
increase a bandwidth
utilization for the link.
When the LAG
members change, or
certain links fail, the
system automatically
re-allocates the traffic.
Non-Sharing: Only one

member link of a LAG
carries traffic, and the
other link is in the
standby state. In this
case, a hot backup
mechanism is
provided. When the
active link of a LAG is
faulty, the system
activates the standby
link, thus preventing
link failure.
Non-Revertive
Load Sharing
Sharing
Non-Sharing
Non-Sharing
A-182

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Load Sharing Hash

Algorithm
Source MAC
Source MAC

only when Load
Sharing of a LAG is set
to Sharing.
The load sharing

computation methods
include: MAC address
specific allocation
(based on the source
MAC address,
destination MAC
address, and XOR
between source MAC
address and source
MAC address), IP
address specific
allocation (based on the
source IP address,
destination IP address,
and XOR between
source IP address and
source IP address).
Destination MAC
Source and Destination
MAC
Source IP
Destination IP
Source and Destination IP
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-183
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
System Priority
0 to 65535
32768
This parameter
a LAG. The smaller the
value of System
Priority, the higher the
priority.
When a local LAG

negotiates with an
opposite LAG through
LACP packets, both
LAGs can obtain the
system priorities of
each other. Then, the
LAG of the higher
system priority is
considered as the
comparison result of
both LAGs so that the
aggregation
information is
consistent at both
LAGs. If the priorities
of both LAGs are the
same, the system MAC
addresses are
compared. Then, the
comparison result
based on the LAG with
smaller system MAC
address is considered as
the result of both LAGs
and is used to ensure
that the aggregation
information is
consistent at both
LAGs.
Port Settings Parameters

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Main Board
This parameter
specifies the main
board in a LAG.

according to the
A-184

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Main Port
This parameter
specifies the main port
in a LAG.
After a LAG is created,

you can add Ethernet
services to the main
port only. Services
cannot be added to a
slave port. When Load
Sharing is set to NonSharing, the link
connected to the main
port is used to transmit
the services, and the
link connected to the
slave port is used for
protection.
This parameter
specifies the slave
board in a LAG.

according to the
This parameter
specifies the salve port
in a LAG.
The slave ports in a

LAG are fixed. Unless
they are manually
modified, the system
does not automatically
add them to or delete
them from the LAG.
Board (Available Slave

Ports)
Port (Available Slave

Ports)
Selected Slave Ports

the selected slave ports.
A.9.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Link Aggregation_Port

Priority
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the port priority of a LAG.
Navigation Path
1.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Management > Link Aggregation Group Management from the Function Tree.
A-185
OptiX RTN 910

2.
Click the Port Priority tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

the port whose priority can
be set.
Port Priority
0 to 65535
32768
This parameter
indicates the priorities
of the ports in a LAG as
defined in the LACP
protocol. The smaller
the value, the higher the
priority.
When ports are added

into a LAG, the port of
the highest priority is
preferred for service
transmission.
A.9.17 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation

This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating LPT management.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > LPT
2.
Click New.
Parameters for Convergence Points

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
This parameter specifies the board at the

convergence point.
Port
This parameter specifies the port on the

board of the convergence point.
NOTE
One port can be in an LPT only.
A-186

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters for Access Points

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board
This parameter specifies the board at the

access point.
Port
This parameter specifies the port on the

board of the access point.
NOTE
The access point supports selection of multiple
ports on different boards.
A.9.18 Parameter Description: Port Mirroring_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port mirroring tasks.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > Port
Mirroring from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New. The Port Mirror Management dialog box is displayed.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Mirror Name

mirroring task.
After the mirroring function of the port is

enabled, you can monitor all the mirrored
ports by analyzing the packets at the
mirroring port only. As a result, you can
easily manage the ports.
This parameter specifies the direction in

which the service to be monitored.
Ingress indicates that the Listened Port

copies the received packets to the Mirror
Listener Port and sends the packets out
of the Mirror Listener Port.
Egress indicates that the Listened Port

copies the transmitted packets to the
Mirror Listener Port and sends the
packets out of the Mirror Listener
Port.
This parameter specifies the mirroring

listener port and the listened port.
Direction
Ingress
Ingress
Egress
Mirror Listener
Port
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-187
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Listened Port
l
l
Listened Port indicates the source port

of the mirrored packets.
Mirror Listener Port indicates the port
from which the packets copied from the
Listened Port are sent out.
Mirror Listener Port: The port where
services are available cannot be selected.
Otherwise, the creation fails.
A.10 Parameters for the Ethernet OAM

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Ethernet operation, administration and
maintenance (OAM).
A.10.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Domain
Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains.
A.10.2 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Maintenance Association
Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations.
A.10.3 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MEP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association end
point (MEP).
A.10.4 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_Remote MEP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP.
A.10.5 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_MIP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association
intermediate point (MIP).
A.10.6 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LB Enabling
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB.
A.10.7 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM Management_LT Enabling
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT.
A.10.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Parameter
This topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.
A.10.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring
This topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at the
Ethernet port.
A.10.1 Parameter Description: Ethernet Service OAM

Management_Maintenance Domain Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance domains.
A-188

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Navigation Path
1.
OAM Management > Ethernet Service OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Maintenance Association tab.
3.
Choose New > New Maintenance Domain.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Domain Name

maintenance domain.
The maintenance domain refers to the

network for the Ethernet OAM.

of eight bytes.

maintenance domain.
The values 0-2 indicate the carrier level,

the values 3-4 indicate the supplier level,
and the values 5-7 indicates the user level.
When the value is set to 0, the

maintenance domain is at the lowest
level. The values 1-7 indicate that the
level increases in a sequential order.
The OAM packets whose level is higher

than the preset value are transparently
transmitted by the MEPs. The OAM
packets whose level is lower than the
preset value are directly discarded by the
MEPs. The OAM packets whose level is
the same as the preset value are responded
to or terminated by the MEPs according
to the message type.
Maintenance
Domain Level
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Management_Maintenance Association Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating maintenance associations.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-189
OptiX RTN 910

3.
Select the maintenance domain in which a maintenance association needs to be created.

Choose New > New Maintenance Association.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Domain Name

domain of the created maintenance
association.
Maintenance
Association Name

maintenance association, which is a
domain related to a service. Through
maintenance association division, the
connectivity check (CC) can be
performed on the network that transmits
a service instance.

of eight bytes.
Relevant Service
This parameter specifies the service

instance that is related to the maintenance
association.
CC Test Transmit
Period
1s
1s
This parameter specifies the interval for

transmitting packets in the CC.
The CC is performed to check the

availability of the service.
10s
1 min
10 min

Management_MEP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association end
point (MEP).
Navigation Path
A-190
1.
2.
3.
Select the maintenance association in which an MEP needs to be created. Choose New >
New MEP Point.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Domain Name

domain of the created MEP.
Maintenance
Association Name

Board
This parameter specifies the board where

the MEP is located.
Port
This parameter specifies the port where the

MEP is located.
VLAN
This parameter indicates the VLAN ID of

the current service.
MP ID
1 to 2048
This parameter specifies the MEP ID.
Each MEP needs to be configured with

an MEP ID, which is unique in the
maintenance association. The MEP ID is
This parameter specifies the direction of

the MEP.
Ingress indicates the direction in which

the packets are transmitted to the port,
and Egress indicates the direction in
which the packets are transmitted from
the port.

enable the CC function of the MEP.
In the case of the tests based on the MP

IDs, CC Status must be set to Active.
Direction
Ingress
Ingress
Egress
Active
CC Status
Active
Inactive

Management_Remote MEP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a remote MEP.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
3.
Choose OAM > Manage Remote MEP Point. Then, the Manage Remote MEP Point
dialog box is displayed.
4.
Click New.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-191
OptiX RTN 910


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Domain Name

domain of the MEP.
Maintenance
Association Name

Remote
Maintenance Point
ID(_e.g:1,3-6)
1 to 2048
This parameter specifies the ID of the

remote MEP.
If other MEPs may initiate OAM

operations to an MEP in the same MA,
set the other MEPs to be the remote
MEPs.

Management_MIP Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating a maintenance association
intermediate point (MIP).
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the MIP Point tab.
3.
Select the maintenance domain in which an MIP needs to be created, and then click New.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Maintenance
Domain Name

domain of the MIP.
Board
This parameter specifies the board where

the MIP is located.
Port
This parameter specifies the port where the

MIP is located.
A-192

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MP ID
1 to 2048
This parameter specifies the MIP ID.
Each MIP needs to be configured with an

MIP ID, which is unique in the
maintenance domain. The MIP ID is
NOTE
To create MEPs and MIPs in a service at a
port, ensure that only one MIP can be created
and the level of the MIP must be higher than
the level of the MEP.

Management_LB Enabling
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LB.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
3.
Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LB test.
4.
Choose OAM > Start LB.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MP ID
Selected
Deselected
This parameter needs to be selected if the

LB test is performed on the basis of MP IDs.
Selected
This parameter needs to be selected if the

LB test is performed on the basis of MAC
addresses.
Deselected
Sink Maintenance
Point MAC
Address
Selected
Maintenance
Domain Name

maintenance domain for the LB test.
Maintenance
Association Name

maintenance association for the LB test.
Source
Maintenance Point
ID
This parameter specifies the source

maintenance point in the LB test.
Only the MEP can be set to the source

maintenance point.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Deselected

A-193
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Destination
Maintenance Point
ID

maintenance point in the LB test.
Only the MEP can be set to the

destination maintenance point.
Destination Maintenance Point ID can

be set only when MP ID is selected.
This parameter specifies the MAC

address of the port where the destination
maintenance point is located in the LB
test.
Only the MAC address of the MEP can

be set to the MAC address of the
Destination Maintenance Point MAC

Address can be set only when Sink
Maintenance Point MAC Address.

packets transmitted each time in the LB
test.
When the value is greater, the required

duration is longer.
This parameter specifies the length of a

transmitted LBM packet.
If the packet length is different, the test

result may be different. In normal cases,
it is recommended that you use the
default value.
This parameter specifies the priority of

transmitting packets.
0 indicates the lowest priority, and 7

indicates the highest priority. In normal
cases, this parameter is set to the highest
priority.
Destination
Maintenance Point
MAC Address
Transmitted
Packet Count
Transmitted
Packet Length
Transmitted
Packet Priority
Detection Result
1 to 255
64 to 1400
0 to 7
00-00-00-00-00-00
64
This parameter indicates the relevant

information and result of the LB test.

Management_LT Enabling
This topic describes the parameters that are used for enabling the LT.
A-194

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Navigation Path
1.
2.
3.
Select the maintenance domain and maintenance association for the LT test.
4.
Choose OAM > Start LT.
Test Node Parameters

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MP ID
Selected
Deselected
This parameter needs to be selected if the LT

test is performed on the basis of MP IDs.
Selected
This parameter needs to be selected if the LT

test is performed on the basis of MAC
addresses.
Deselected
Sink Maintenance
Point MAC
Address
Selected
Maintenance
Domain Name

maintenance domain for the LT test.
Maintenance
Association Name

maintenance association for the LT test.
Source
Maintenance Point
ID
This parameter specifies the source

maintenance point in the LT test.
Only the MEP can be set to the source

maintenance point.
Destination
Maintenance Point
ID

Only the MEP can be set to the

Destination Maintenance Point ID can

be set only when MP ID is selected.
This parameter specifies the MAC

address of the port where the destination
maintenance point is located in the LT
test.
Only the MAC address of the MEP can

be set to the MAC address of the
Destination Maintenance Point MAC

Address can be set only when Sink
Maintenance Point MAC Address.
Destination
Maintenance Point
MAC Address
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Deselected
00-00-00-00-00-00

A-195
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters for the Detection Result

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Source
Maintenance Point
ID
This parameter indicates the source

Destination
Maintenance Point
ID/MAC
This parameter indicates the MAC address

of the port where the destination
maintenance point is located in the LT test.
Response
Maintenance Point
ID/MAC
This parameter indicates the MAC address

of the port where the responding
maintenance point is located in the LT test.
Hop Count
1 to 64
This parameter indicates the number of

hops from the source maintenance point
to the responding maintenance point or to
the destination maintenance point in the
LT test.
The number of hops indicates the

adjacent relation between the responding
maintenance point to the source
maintenance point. The number of hops
increases by one when a responding point
occurs on the link from the source
maintenance point to the destination
maintenance point.
Test Result
This parameter indicates the result of the LT

test.
A.10.8 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM

Management_OAM Parameter
This topic describes the OAM parameters that are related to Ethernet ports.
Navigation Path
1.
OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the OAM Parameter tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
This parameter indicates the corresponding

port.
A-196

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Enable OAM
Protocol
Enabled
Disabled

whether to enable the OAM protocol.
After the OAM protocol is enabled, the

current Ethernet port starts to use the
preset mode to create the OAM
connection with the opposite end.

working mode of the OAM.
The port whose OAM working mode is

set to Active can initiate the OAM
connection.
The port whose OAM working mode is

set to Passive can only wait for the
opposite end to send the OAM
connection request.
The OAM working mode of the

equipment at only one end can be
Passive.

whether the local link events can be
notified to the opposite end.
If the alarms caused by link events can be

reported, that is, if the number of
performance events (for example, error
frame period, error frame, error frame
second, and error frame signal cycle) at
the local end exceeds the preset
threshold, these performance events are
notified to the port at the opposite end
through the link event notification
function.

OAM Working
Mode
Link Event
Notification
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Disabled
Active
Active
Passive
Enabled
Enabled
Disabled

A-197
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Remote Side
Loopback
Response
Disabled
Disabled

whether the port responds to the remote
loopback.
Remote loopback indicates that the local

OAM entity transmits packets to the
remote OAM entity for loopback. The
local OAM entity can locate the fault and
test the link performance through
loopback data analysis.
If a port does not support remote

loopback response, this port does not
respond to the loopback request from the
remote port regardless of the OAM port
status.
Loopback Status
Enabled
Non-Loopback
Initiate Loopback at
Local
NOTE
Loopback Status is valid only after you choose
OAM > Enable Remote Loopback.
Respond Loopback
of Remote
OAM Discovery
Status
FAULT
This parameter indicates the loopback status

at the local end.
This parameter indicates the OAM

discovery status at the local end.
This parameter indicates the status of

transmitting packets at the local end.
When a port is in the FWD state, the port

forwards the non-OAM packets. When a
port is in the DISCARD state, the port
discards the non-OAM packets.
This parameter indicates the status of

receiving packets at the local end.
In the FWD state, the port forwards the

non-OAM packets. In the LB state, the
port loopback the non-OAM packets. In
the DISCARD state, the port discards the
non-OAM packets.
ACTIVE_SEND_L
OCAL
PASSIVE_WAIT
SEND_LOCAL_R
EMOTE
SEND_LOCAL_R
EMOTE_OK
SEND_ANY
Port Transmit
Status
Port Receive Status
FWD
DISCARD
FWD
DISCARD
LB
A-198

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

A.10.9 Parameter Description: Ethernet Port OAM

Management_OAM Error Frame Monitoring
This topic describes the parameters that are used for monitoring the OAM error frames at the
Ethernet port.
Navigation Path
1.
OAM Management > Ethernet Port OAM Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the OAM Error Frame Monitor tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

port.
Error Frame
Monitor Window
(ms)
1000 to 60000, in
step of 100
1000

monitoring error frames.
Error Frame
Monitor Threshold
(frame)
1 to 4294967295, in
step of 1
This parameter specifies the threshold of

monitoring error frames.
Within the specified value of Error

Frame Monitor Window(ms), if the
number of error frames on the link
exceeds the preset value of Error Frame
Monitor Threshold(frame), an alarm is
reported.
Error Frame
Period Window
(frame)
1488 to 892800000,
in step of 1
892800000
This parameter specifies the window of

monitoring the error frame period.
Error Frame
Period Threshold
(frame)
1 to 892800000, in
step of 1

monitoring the error frame period.

Frame Period Window(frame), if the
Period Threshold(frame), an alarm is
reported.
Error Frame
Second Window(s)
10 to 900, in step of
1
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
60
This parameter specifies the time window of

monitoring the error frame second.

A-199
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Error Frame
Second Threshold
(s)
10 to 900, in step of
1

monitoring error frame seconds.
If any error frame occurs in one second,

this second is called an errored frame
second. Within the specified value of
Error Frame Second Window(s), if the
Second Threshold(s), an alarm is
reported.
Error Frame
Signal Periodic
Monitor Window
(Entries)
This parameter specifies the window of

monitoring the error frame signal period.
Error Frame
Signal Periodic
Monitor Threshold
(Entries)
1 to 7500000000, in
step of 1

monitoring the error frame signal period.

Frame Signal Periodic Monitor
Window(Entries), if the number of error
signals exceeds the preset value of Error
Frame Signal Periodic Monitor
Threshold(Entries), an alarm is
reported.
A.11 QoS Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to QoS.
A.11.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management
This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains.
A.11.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Management_Create
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains.
A.11.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied Port_Modification
This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing DiffServ (DS) domain applied
ports.
A.11.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management
This topic describes the parameters that are related to port policies.
A.11.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port policies.
A.11.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification Configuration
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification.
A.11.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation
This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.
A-200

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

A.11.1 Parameter Description: Diffserv Domain Management

This topic describes the parameters that are used for managing DiffServ domains.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > QoS
Management > Diffserv Domain Management from the Function Tree.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Mapping Relation ID
1 to 8

the ID of the mapping
relation between DiffServ
domains.
Mapping Relation Name
Default Map

the name of the mapping
relation between DiffServ
domains.
NOTE
If one default DiffServ domain exists on the OptiX RTN equipment, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and
Mapping Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to the domain.
The default Diffserv domain cannot be modified and deleted.
Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CVLAN
0 to 7
This parameter
the C-VLAN of the
ingress packets.
C-VLAN indicates the

client-side VLAN, and
the value 7 indicates the
highest priority.
This parameter
the S-VLAN of the
ingress packets.
S-VLAN indicates the

server-side VLAN, and
highest priority.
SVLAN
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
0 to 7

A-201
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
IP DSCP
0 to 63
This parameter
indicates the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the ingress
packets.
The differentiated
services code point
(DSCP) refers to bits
0-5 of the differentiated
services (DS) field in
the packet and indicates
the service class and
discarding priority of
the packet.
A-202

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PHB
BE
This parameter
indicates the per-hop
behavior (PHB) service
class of the DiffServ
domain.
The PHB service class

refers to the forwarding
behavior of the
DiffServ node on the
behavior aggregate
(BA) operation. The
forwarding behavior
can meet the specific
requirements.
The PHB service

classes are BE, AF1,
AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, and DSCP
value) contained in the
packets of the DiffServ
domain and the eight
PDB service classes
meet the requirements
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
AF1
AF2
AF3
AF4
EF
CS6
CS7
NOTE
The AF1 is classified into
three sub service classes,
namely, AF11, AF12, and
AF13, only one of which is
valid. It is the same case
with the AF2, AF3, and
AF4.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-203
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PHB
BE
This parameter
indicates the PHB
service class of the
DiffServ domain.

behavior of the
DiffServ node on the
behavior aggregate
(BA) operation. The
forwarding behavior
requirements.
The PHB service

AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, and DSCP
packets of the DiffServ
PDB service classes
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
AF1
AF2
AF3
AF4
EF
CS6
CS7
NOTE
AF4.
CVLAN
A-204
0 to 7

This parameter
the C-VLAN of the
egress packets.

highest priority.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SVLAN
0 to 7
This parameter
the S-VLAN of the
egress packets.

highest priority.
This parameter
indicates the DSCP
priority of the IP
packets.
The DSCP refers to bits

0-5 of the DS field in
the packet.
IP DSCP
0 to 63

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

the port that uses the
DiffServ domain.
Packet Type
CVLAN
CVLAN
The packets trusted by the

OptiX RTN 910 are the
C_VLAN, S_VLAN and
IP DSCP packets that
contain the C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, or DSCP value.
By default, the untrusted
packets are mapped to the
BE service class for besteffort forwarding.
SVLAN
IP-DSCP
NOTE
The E-Line point-to-point
transparent transmission
service supports only the
mapping from DSCP
packets to the PHB service
class.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-205
OptiX RTN 910

A.11.2 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain

Management_Create
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating DiffServ (DS) domains.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click Create.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Mapping Relation ID
2 to 8

the ID of the mapping
relation of a DS domain.

Packet Type
cvlan
cvlan
This parameter
packet.
The packets trusted by

the OptiX RTN 910 are
the C_VLAN,
S_VLAN and IP DSCP
packets that contain the
C_VLAN priority,
S_VLAN priority, or
DSCP value. By
default, the untrusted
packets are mapped to
the BE service class for
best-effort forwarding.
svlan
ip-dscp
NOTE
mapping from DSCP
class.
NOTE
If one default DS domain exists on the OptiX RTN equipment, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, Mapping
Relation Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to the domain. The
default DS domain cannot be modified and deleted.
A-206

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters for Ingress Mapping Relation

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CVLAN
0 to 7
This parameter
specifies the C-VLAN
priority of the ingress
packets.

highest priority.
This parameter
priority of the ingress
packets.

highest priority.
This parameter
specifies the DSCP
priority of the IP
packets.
The differentiated
services code point
the packet.
SVLAN
IP DSCP
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
0 to 7
0 to 63

A-207
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PHB
BE
This parameter
indicates the PHB
service class of the DS
domain.

behavior of the DS
node on the behavior
aggregate (BA)
operation. The
forwarding behavior
requirements.
The PHB service

AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, and DSCP
packets of the DS
PDB service classes
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
AF1
AF2
AF3
AF4
EF
CS6
CS7
NOTE
AF4.
A-208

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters for Egress Mapping Relation

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PHB
BE
This parameter
indicates the PHB
service class of the DS
domain.

behavior of the DS
node on the behavior
aggregate (BA)
operation. The
forwarding behavior
requirements.
The PHB service

AF2, AF3, AF4, EF,
CS6, and CS7. The
priorities (C_VLAN
priority, S_VLAN
priority, and DSCP
packets of the DS
PDB service classes
of the specified or
default mapping
relation.
AF1
AF2
AF3
AF4
EF
CS6
CS7
NOTE
AF4.
CVLAN
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
0 to 7

This parameter
specifies the C-VLAN
priority of the egress
packets.

highest priority.
A-209
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
SVLAN
0 to 7
This parameter
priority of the egress
packets.

highest priority.
This parameter
specifies the DSCP
priority of the IP
addresses of the egress
packets.
The differentiated
services code point
the packet.
IP DSCP
0 to 63

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board

the board that uses the
mapping relations
between DS domains.
Available Port

the available port list from
which you can select the
port that uses the mapping
relations between DS
domains.
Selected Port

the selected port list. The
ports in the list use the
mapping relations
between DS domains.
A-210

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

A.11.3 Parameter Description: DiffServ Domain Applied

Port_Modification
This topic describes the parameters that are used for changing DiffServ (DS) domain applied
ports.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Select the DS domain to be changed in the main interface.
3.
Click the Apply Port tab.
4.
Click Modify.
Parameters for Configuring the Applied Ports

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-211
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Packet Type
CVLAN
CVLAN
This parameter
packet.
The packets trusted by

the OptiX RTN 910 are
the C-VLAN, S-VLAN
and IP-DSCP packets
that contain the CVLAN priority, SVLAN priority, or
DSCP value. By
default, the untrusted
packets are mapped to
the BE service class for
best-effort forwarding.
When the OptiX RTN

910 receives services
and identifies service
types based on VLAN
priorities, the trusted
packets at a UNI ports
carry C-VLAN
priorities, and the
trusted packets at an
NNI port carry SVLAN priorities.
When the OptiX RTN
910 receives services
and identifies service
types based on DSCP
values, the trusted
packets at a port carry
IP-DSCP values.
SVLAN
IP-DSCP
NOTE
mapping from DSCP
class.
Board

the board where the port is
located.
Available Port

the available port.
A-212

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Selected Port

the selected port.
The selected port is
applied to the DS domain.
NOTE
If one default DS domain exists on the OptiX RTN 910, Mapping Relation ID is set to 1, and Mapping Relation
Name is set to Default Map. If these parameters are not set, all the ports belong to the domain. The port applied
to the default DS domain cannot be modified.
A.11.4 Parameter Description: Policy Management

This topic describes the parameters that are related to port policies.
Navigation Path
Management > Policy Management from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Policy ID
1 to 36
This parameter
indicates the policy ID
of the port.
The OptiX RTN 910

supports a maximum
number of 36 policies.
Policy Name
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


or specifies the policy
name of the port.
A-213
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS
CS7
The BE, AF1, AF2,

AF3, AF4, EF, CS6,
and CS7 service classes
respectively map eight
queuing entities. The
OptiX RTN 910
provides different QoS
policies for the queues
at different service
classes.
CS6-CS7: indicates the

highest service grade,
which is mainly
involved in signaling
transmission.
EF: indicates fast

forwarding. This
service class is
applicable to the traffic
whose delay is small
and packet loss ratio is
low, for example, voice
and video services.
AF1-AF4: indicates
assured forwarding.
This service class is
that requires rate
guarantee but does not
require delay or jitter
limit.
BE: indicates that the

traffic is forwarded in
best-effort manner
without special
processing.
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
A-214

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Grooming Police After

Reloading
SP
CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP
WRR
AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1:

WRR
The strict priority (SP)

scheduling algorithm is
designed for the key
services. One
important
characteristic of the key
services is that higher
priorities are required
to minimize the
response delay in the
case of congestion
events.
The weighted round

robin (WRR)
scheduling algorithm
divides each port into
multiple output subqueues. The polling
scheduling is
performed among the
output sub-queues to
ensure that each subqueue has a certain
period of service time.
The OptiX RTN 910

supports the setting of
the SP+WRR
of the CoS queue
according to the
requirement, and
provides one or more
queues that comply
with the SP algorithm.
Except for the default
value, however, the
value of the WRR
and the value of the SP
cannot be interleaved.
That is, except for the
default value,
Grooming Police
After Reloading can
be changed from SP to
WRR according to the
queue priorities in a
descending order
(CS7-BE).
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-215
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Policy Weight(%)
Bandwidth Limit
Value Range
1 to 100
Disabled
Default Value
25
Disabled
Description
l

according to the
This parameter
specifies the weight of
the policy in the WRR
queue. The weight
indicates the
percentage of the
bandwidth resources
obtained by the WRR
queue.

set only when
Grooming Police
After Reloading is set
to WRR.

according to the
This parameter
whether traffic shaping
is enabled for an egress
queue corresponding to
a PHB service class.
CIR (kbit/s), PIR

(kbit/s), CBS (byte),
and PBS (byte) can be
set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.

according to the
Enabled
CIR(kbit/s)
A-216

Traffic shaping for an

egress queue uses the
single token bucket two
color marker algorithm.
The value of the CIR must
be equal to the value of the
PIR. In actual traffic
shaping processing, only
the PIR is valid.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PIR(kbit/s)
When the buffer queue

is empty, the packets
are processed as
follows: If the rate of a
packet is equal to or
lower than the PIR, it is
directly forwarded; if
the rate of a packet is
higher than the PIR, it
enters the buffer queue
and then is forwarded at
a rate equal to the PIR.

is not empty, the
packets whose rate
passes the restriction of
the PIR directly enter
the buffer queue and
then are forwarded at a
rate equal to the PIR.

according to the
you set the value of the
CBS equal to the value
of the PIR. In actual
traffic shaping
processing, only the
PBS is valid.

according to the

is empty, certain burst
packets can be
forwarded if the rate of
the packets is equal to
or lower than the PIR in
a certain period. The
maximum traffic of the
burst packets is
determined by the PBS.

according to the
CBS(byte)
PBS(byte)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-217
OptiX RTN 910

A.11.5 Parameter Description: Port Policy

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port policies.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the CoS Queue Configuration tab.
3.
Click New. The Create Port Policy dialog box is displayed.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Policy ID
1 to 36
This parameter
specifies the policy ID
of the port.
The OptiX RTN 910

supports a maximum
number of 36 policies.
Selected
Deselected

whether to automatically
allocate the policy ID of
the port policy. After this
parameter is selected, the
system automatically
allocates the policy ID,
and then the policy ID

the policy name of the
port.
Deselected
Policy Name
A-218

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS
CS7
The BE, AF1, AF2,

AF3, AF4, EF, CS6,
and CS7 service classes
respectively map eight
queuing entities. The
OptiX RTN 910
provides different QoS
policies for the queues
at different service
class.
CS6-CS7: indicates the

highest service grade,
which is mainly
involved in signaling
transmission.
EF: indicates fast

forwarding. This
service class is
whose delay is small
and packet loss ratio is
low, for example, voice
and video services.
AF1-AF4: indicates
assured forwarding.
This service class is
that requires rate
guarantee but does not
require delay or jitter
limit.
BE: indicates that the

traffic is forwarded in
best-effort manner
without special
processing.
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-219
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Grooming Police After

Reloading
SP
CS7, CS6, EF, BE: SP
WRR
AF4, AF3, AF2, AF1:

WRR
The strict priority (SP)

scheduling algorithm is
designed for the key
services. One
important
characteristic of the key
services is that higher
priorities are required
to minimize the
response delay in the
case of congestion
events.
The weighted round

robin (WRR)
divides each port into
multiple output subqueues. The polling
scheduling is
performed among the
output sub-queues to
ensure that each subqueue has a certain
period of service time.
The OptiX RTN 910

the SP+WRR
of the CoS queue
according to the
requirement, and
provides one or more
queues that comply
with the SP algorithm.
Except for the default
value, however, the
value of the WRR
and the value of the SP
cannot be interleaved.
That is, except for the
default value,
Grooming Police
After Reloading can
be changed from SP to
WRR according to the
queue priorities in a
descending order
(CS7-BE).
A-220

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Policy Weight(%)
Bandwidth Limit
Value Range
1 to 100
Disabled
Default Value
25
Disabled
Description
l

according to the
This parameter
specifies the weight of
the policy in the WRR
queue. The weight
indicates the
percentage of the
bandwidth resources
obtained by the WRR
queue.

set only when
Grooming Police
After Reloading is set
to WRR.

according to the
This parameter
whether traffic shaping
is enabled for an egress
queue corresponding to
a PHB service class.
CIR (kbit/s), PIR

set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.

according to the
Enabled
CIR(kbit/s)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)


the PIR is valid.
A-221
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PIR(kbit/s)

are processed as

is not empty, the
packets whose rate

according to the
you set the value of the
CBS equal to the value
of the PIR. In actual
traffic shaping
processing, only the
PBS is valid.

according to the

packets can be
burst packets is

according to the
CBS(byte)
PBS(byte)
A-222

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

A.11.6 Parameter Description: Port Policy_Traffic Classification

Configuration
This parameter describes the parameters that are used for creating traffic classification.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Traffic Classification Configuration tab.
3.
Click New. The Create Traffic Classification dialog box is displayed.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Traffic Classification ID
1 to 1024

the ID of the traffic
classification.
ACL Action
Permit
Permit
The access control list

(ACL) determines
whether to forward or
discard the packets that
enter the port according
to the specified
matching rules.

set to Permit, the ACL
on the ingress side
filters the packets that
enter the port. Only the
packets that match the
specified rules can be
received by the port.

set to Deny, ACL
processing is not
performed for the
packets over the ingress
port.
Deny
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-223
OptiX RTN 910

Ingress Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Logical Relation
Between Matched Rules
And
And
This parameter
specifies the logical
relationship between
the traffic classification
matching rules.
The OptiX RTN 910

the logical AND
between multiple
matching rules.
After you click Add or

Delete, complex traffic
classification can be
performed on the traffic
that enters the ingress
port according to the
preset matching rules.
In the case a specific

service, complex traffic
classification can be
divided into basic
traffic types according
to the DSCP value,
C_VLAN ID,
C_VLAN priority,
S_VLAN ID, or
S_VLAN priority.
Traffic type is based on
the associated Ethernet
packets. Therefore, this
parameter is set
according to the packet
type and the planning
information.
If the matching value of

the packets is the same
as the preset Match
Value, the packets
match the rules of
complex traffic
classification.

according to the
Match Type
DSCP Value
CVlan ID
CVlan priority
SVlan ID
SVlan priority
Match Value
DSCP Value: 0 to 63
CVlan ID: 1 to 4094

CVlan priority: 0 to 7
SVlan ID: 1 to 4094
SVlan priority: 0 to 7
A-224

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CoS
This parameter
specifies the PHB
service class queue
mapped by the traffic
classification packets.

to empty (-), the traffic
classification packets
map the PHB service
class queue according
the mapping relation
specified in the topic
about Diffserv domain
management.

according to the
This parameter
whether the CAR
operation is performed
for the flow in the
ingress direction.
CIR (kbit/s), PIR

set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.

according to the
CS7
CS6
EF
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-225
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CIR(kbit/s)
When the rate of the

packets is not more
than the CIR, the
packets are marked
blue and pass the CAR
policing. These packets
are first forwarded in
the case of network
congestion.

packets is more than the
CIR but not more than
the PIR, the packets
whose rate is more than
the CIR can pass the
restriction of the CAR
and are marked yellow.
The processing method
of the packets marked
yellow can be set to
"Pass" or "Remark".
"Remark" indicates
mapped into another
specified queue of a
higher priority (this is
equal to changing the
priority of the packets)
and then forwarded to
the next port. If a
network congestion
event occurs again, the
packets marked yellow
can be processed
according to the new
priority.

according to the
A-226

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PIR(kbit/s)

PIR, the packets that
exceed the rate
restriction are marked
red and directly
discarded.

the PIR, the packets
whose rate is more than
the CIR can pass the
restriction of the CAR
and are marked yellow.
The processing method
of the packets marked
yellow can be set to
"Pass" or "Remark".
"Remark" indicates
mapped into another
the next port. If a
network congestion
event occurs again, the
packets marked yellow
can be processed
according to the new
priority.

according to the
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-227
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
CBS(byte)
During a certain period,

if the rate of the packets
whose processing
method is marked
"Pass" is not more than
the CIR, certain burst
packets are allowed and
can be first forwarded
in the case of network
congestion. The
burst packets is
determined by the
CBS.

according to the
During a certain period,

if the rate of the packets
whose processing
method is marked
"Pass" is more than the
the PIR, certain burst
packets are allowed and
marked yellow. The
burst packets is

according to the
This parameter
specifies the CAR
operation performed by
the equipment on the
packets. The packets
are dyed according to
the result of the CAR
operation. The dying
rule is determined by
the comparison
between the rate of the
packets and the preset
CAR value.
The OptiX RTN 910

supports Color
Blindness only.
PBS(byte)
Coloration Mode
A-228
Color Blindness
Color Blindness

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Packet Color
Red
Packets can be dyed in

three colors: red, yellow,
and green. The packets in
red are first discarded.
This parameter
specifies the method of
handling the packets.
Discard: The packets

are discarded.
Pass: The packets are

forwarded.
Remark: The packets

are remarked.
"Remark" indicates
mapped into another
the next port.
Yellow
Green
Handling Mode
Discard
Pass
Remark
Relabeled CoS
CS7
CS6
EF
If the handling method is

set to "Remark", you can
reset the CoS of the
packets.
AF4
AF3
AF2
AF1
BE
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-229
OptiX RTN 910

Egress Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Bandwidth Limit
Disabled
Enable
This parameter
whether the traffic
shaping is performed in
the egress function.
CIR (kbit/s), PIR

set only when
Bandwidth Limit is
set to Enabled.

according to the
In the case that no

packets exist in the
egress queue: When the
rate of the packets is not
more than the CIR,
these packets directly
enter the egress queue.
In the case that certain

egress queue: The
packets whose rate
the egress queue, which
forwards the packets to
the next port at the CIR.

according to the
Enable
CIR(kbit/s)
A-230

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PIR(kbit/s)
In the case that no

egress queue: If the rate
of the packets is more
than the CIR but is not
more than the PIR, the
packets whose rate is
more than the CIR enter
If the rate of the packets
is more than the PIR,
the packets are directly
discarded.
In the case that certain

egress queue: The
packets whose rate

according to the

is not more than the
CIR during a certain
period, the burst
packets are directly
transmitted. The
burst packets is
determined by the
CBS.

according to the
CBS(byte)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-231
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PBS(byte)

is more than the CIR
but is not more than the
PIR during a certain
period, the burst
packets enter the egress
queue. The maximum
traffic of the burst
packets is determined
by the PBS.

according to the
A.11.7 Parameter Description: Port Shaping Management_Creation

This topic describes the parameters that are used for creating port shaping management tasks.
Navigation Path
1.
Management > Port Shaping Management from the Function Tree.
2.
Click New.
Parameters for Port Shaping Management

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Slot No.

the slot ID.
Port

the port.
CIR (kbit/s)
CBS (byte)
PIR (kbit/s)

the PIR is valid.
If the traffic shaping
function is enabled, OptiX
RTN 910 processes the
packets in the buffer
queue through the
A-232

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
PBS (byte)
following methods when

no packets are available in
the queue.
l When the buffer queue
are processed as
packets can be
burst packets is
is not empty, the
packets whose rate
A.12 RMON Parameters

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON performances.
A.12.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics Group
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-233
OptiX RTN 910

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups.
A.12.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history groups.
A.12.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Control Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups.
A.12.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.
A.12.1 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_Statistics

Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON statistics groups.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the corresponding board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Performance > RMON Performance from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Statistics Group tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
This parameter specifies the object to be

monitored.
Sampling Period
5 to 150
This parameter specifies the duration of the

monitoring period.
Display
Accumulated
Value
Selected
Deselected

displaying the performance events.
If this parameter is not selected, the

displayed value is an increment
compared to the value that is collected in
last sampling period and stored in the
register.
If this parameter is selected, the displayed

value is an absolute value that is currently
stored in the register.

If this parameter is set to Graphics, the

number of performance events to be
monitored at each time cannot be more
than 10, and the unit should be the same.
Display Mode
Deselected
Graphics
List
List
A-234

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Legend
Color
This parameter indicates the description

of different colors.

Display Mode is set to Graphics.
This parameter indicates the queried

performance events.

Display Mode is set to List.
Description
Event
A.12.2 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History Group

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history groups.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the History Group tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
The parameter indicates the object to be

monitored.
Ended
This parameter specifies the start time and

end time of the monitoring period.
History Table
Type
30-Second
30-Second
This parameter specifies the monitoring

period.
List

If this parameter is set to Graphics, the

number of performance events to be
monitored at each time cannot be more
than 10, and the unit should be the same.
This parameter indicates the description

of different colors.

Display Mode is set to Graphics.
30-Minute
Custom Period 1
Custom Period 2
Display Mode
Graphics
List
Legend
Color
Description
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-235
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Event
This parameter indicates the queried

performance events.

Display Mode is set to List.
Statistical Item
This parameter indicates the performance

items to be monitored.
Statistical Value
This parameter indicates the statistical value

of the monitored performance items.
Time Flag
This parameter indicates the time point of

each performance event.
A.12.3 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_History

Control Group
This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON history control groups.
Navigation Path
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Performance > RMON History
Control Group.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
30-Second
Enabled
Disabled

whether to enable the 30-Second
monitoring function.
Enabled

whether to enable the 30-Minute
Disabled

whether to enable Custom Period 1.
Disabled

whether to enable Custom Period 2.
16
6(Custom Period 2)

quantity of the history registers.
900

monitoring period in Custom Period 1.
The value must be an integer multiple of

30.
Disabled
30-Minute
Enabled
Disabled
Custom Period 1
Enabled
Disabled
Custom Period 2
Enabled
Disabled
History Register
Count(1-50)
1 to 50
Period Length(300
to 43200 seconds, a
multiple of 30)
300 to 43200
A-236

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Period Length(300
to 86400 seconds, a
multiple of 30)
300 to 86400
86400

monitoring period in Custom Period 2.
The value must be an integer multiple of

30.
A.12.4 Parameter Description: RMON Performance_RMON Setting

This topic describes the parameters that are related to RMON setting.
Navigation Path
l
Click the RMON Setting tab.
Object Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
This parameter indicates the object to be

collected.
30-Second
Enabled

whether to enable the 30-Second
Disabled
NOTE
In the case of Object, 30-Second cannot be set.
30-Minute
Enabled
Disabled

In RMON History Control Group of

the NE, if 30-Minute is set to Disabled,
Not Supported is displayed for this
parameter.

whether to enable the monitoring
function based on Custom Period 1.

the NE, if Custom Period 1 is set to
Disabled, Not Supported is displayed
for this parameter.
Disabled
Custom Period 1
Enabled
Disabled
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-237
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Custom Period 2
Enabled

whether to enable the monitoring
function based on Custom Period 2.

the NE, if Custom Period 2 is set to
Disabled, Not Supported is displayed
for this parameter.
Disabled
Event Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Event
This parameter indicates the performance

event to be monitored.
30-Second
Enabled
Disabled

whether to enable the monitoring function
based on 30-Second.

Disabled

based on Custom Period 1Custom Period
1 Monitor.
Disabled

based on Custom Period 2Custom Period
2 Monitor.
Report All

threshold detection method.
If the number of detected events reaches

the preset threshold, the events are
reported to the NMS. Otherwise, the
events are not reported to the NMS.
If an event does not support this

parameter, Not Supported is displayed.
Disabled
30-Minute
Enabled
Disabled
Custom Period 1
Enabled
Disabled
Custom Period 2
Enabled
Disabled
Threshold Detect
Report All
Do Not Detect
Report Only the
Upper Threshold
Report Only the
Lower Threshold
Upper Threshold
A-238

upper threshold. If the number of
performance events exceeds the preset
upper threshold, the corresponding
performance events are reported.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Lower Threshold

lower threshold. If the number of
performance events is less than the preset
lower threshold, the corresponding
performance events are reported.
Threshold Unit
This parameter indicates the unit of each

threshold of the performance events.
A.13 Parameters for the Orderwire and Auxiliary Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the orderwire and auxiliary interfaces.
This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.
A.13.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced
This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.
This topic describes the parameters that are used for F1 data ports.
This topic describes the parameters that are used for broadcast data ports.
This topic describes the parameters that are used for environment monitoring interfaces.

This topic describes the parameters that are used for general orderwire features.
Navigation Path
1.
Select the NE from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration >
Orderwire from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the General tab.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-239
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Call Waiting Time

(s)
1 to 9
This parameter indicates the waiting time

after the local station dials the number. If
the calling station does not receive the
response message from the called station
within the call waiting time, it
automatically removes the
communication connection.
If less than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire

subnet, it is recommended that you set
this parameter to five seconds. If more
than 30 nodes exist in the orderwire
subnet, it is recommended that you set
this parameter to nine seconds.
The call waiting time should be set to the

same for all the NEs.
Dialling Mode
Pulse
Dual-Tone
Frequency
Conference Call
A-240
Dual-Tone
Frequency
This parameter indicates the dialling mode

of the orderwire phone.
888
This parameter indicates the telephone

number of the network-wide orderwire
conference call.
When a OptiX RTN 910 dials the

telephone number 888, the orderwire
phones of all the NEs on the orderwire
subnet ring. When a OptiX RTN 910
receives the call, the orderwire phones on
the other NEs do not ring. In this case, the
orderwire point-to-multipoint group call
changes to a point-to-point call between
two NEs.
The telephone number of the orderwire

conference call should be the same for all
the nodes on the same subnet.
The telephone number of the orderwire

conference call must have the same
length as the telephone number of the
orderwire phone (phone 1) at the local
site.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Phone 1
100 to 99999999
101
This parameter specifies the orderwire

phone number of the local station. An
addressing call refers to a point-to-point
call.
The length of the orderwire phone

number of each NE should be the same.
It is recommended that you set the phone
number to a three-digit number.
The orderwire phone number of each NE

should be unique. It is recommended that
the phone numbers are allocated from
101 for the NEs in a sequential order
according to the NE IDs.
The orderwire phone number cannot be

set to the group call number 888 and
cannot start with 888.
Available
Orderwire Port
This parameter indicates the available port

for the orderwire phone.
Selected
Orderwire Port
This parameter indicates the selected port

for the orderwire phone.
A.13.2 Parameter Description: Orderwire_Advanced

This topic describes the parameters that are used for advanced orderwire features.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Advanced tab.
Parameters for Bytes Occupied by Orderwire Phones

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Orderwire
Occupied Bytes
E1
E1
This parameter specifies the overhead

byte that is used to transmit the orderwire
signals.
Regardless the parameter value, the radio

link always uses a customized overhead
byte to transmit the orderwire signals.
Hence, this parameter should be set
according to the occupied SDH overhead
bytes in the ordinary SDH.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
E2

A-241
OptiX RTN 910


This topic describes the parameters that are used for F1 data ports.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the F1 Data Port tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Available Data
Channel
This parameter indicates the available F1

data channel.
Two data channels should be selected for

the configuration.
No.

F1 data port.
Data Channel 1
Data Channel 2
l
If an SDH optical or electrical line port is

selected, this parameter corresponds to
the F1 byte in the SDH frame at the line
port.
If an IF port is selected, this parameter
corresponds to the customized F1 byte in
the microwave frame at the IF port.
If F1 is selected, this parameter
corresponds to the F1/S1 interface on the
SCC, Cross-Connect and Clock Board.
The F1/S1 interface complies with ITUT G.703 and operates at the rate of 64
kbit/s.

This topic describes the parameters that are used for broadcast data ports.
Navigation Path
A-242
1.
2.
Click the Broadcast Data Port tab.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters for Broadcast Data Ports

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Overhead Byte
SERIAL1 to
SERIAL4
SERIAL1
In the case of an SDH optical/electrical

line, the preset overhead byte is used to
transmit the asynchronous data services.
In the case of a radio link, a customized

serial overhead byte in the microwave
frame is used to transmit the
asynchronous data services.
When this parameter is set to the

SERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on the
corresponding SCC, Cross-Connect and
Clock Board is used.
When this parameter is set to the SDH

optical/electrical line port, the value of
Overhead Byte of this port is used.
When this parameter is set to the IF port,

the customized Serial byte in the
microwave frame of this port is used.
Broadcast Data
Source
No Data
Available
Broadcast Data
Sink
This parameter indicates the available

broadcast data sink.
Selected Broadcast
Data Sink

SERIAL1, the F1/S1 interface on the
corresponding SCC, Cross-Connect and
Clock Board is used.
When this parameter is set to the SDH

optical/electrical line port, the value of
Overhead Byte of this port is used.
When this parameter is set to the IF port,

the customized Serial byte in the
microwave frame of this port is used.

This topic describes the parameters that are used for environment monitoring interfaces.
Navigation Path
Select the AUX logical board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Environment Monitor Configuration > Environment Monitor Interface
from the Function Tree.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-243
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters for the Basic Attributes

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Operation Object
This parameter indicates the operation

object.
Relay Control
Mode
Auto Control
Auto Control
Auto Control: If an alarm is reported, the

alarming relay is started up
automatically. Otherwise, the alarming
relay is shut down.
Manual Control: Relay Status in Major

Alarm(K0) and Relay Status in Critical
Alarm(K1) need to be set.
This parameter indicates that the status of

the relay is set manually for major alarms.
Enable: The relay is set to the "0N" status

for major alarms.
Disabled: The relay is set to the "OFF"

status for major alarms.
This parameter is valid only when Relay

Control Mode is set to Manual
Control.
This parameter indicates that the status of

the relay is set manually for critical
alarms.
Enable: The relay is set to the enabled

status for critical alarms.
Disabled: The relay is set to the disabled

status for critical alarms.
This parameter is valid only when Relay

Control Mode is set to Manual
Control.
Relay Status in
Major Alarm(K0)
Relay Status in
Critical Alarm(K1)
Manual Control
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Parameters for the Input Relay

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Operation Object

object.
Path Name

name of the channel.
Using Status
Unused
Unused
This parameter specifies whether the alarm

interface of the input relay is used.
Used
A-244

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Alarm Mode
Relay Turns Off/

High Level
Relay Turns Off/

High Level
If this parameter is set to Relay Turns

Off/High Level, an alarm is generated
when the relay is turned off.
If this parameter is set to Relay Turns

On/Low Level, an alarm is generated
when the relay is turned on.
This parameter is valid only when Using

Status is set to Used.
Relay Turns On/

Low Level
Alarm Severity
Critical Alarm
Critical Alarm
This parameter specifies the severity of the

alarm that is generated at the input relay.
Major Alarm
Minor Alarm
Warning Alarm
Parameters for the Output Relay

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Operation Object

object.
Output Path Name

name of the output channel.
Use or Not
Unused
Unused
This parameter specifies whether the alarm

interface of the output relay is used.
Used
Parameters for the Temperature Attributes

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Operation Object

object.
Temperature
Upper Threshold
(Deg.C)
-40.0 to 80.0
This parameter specifies the upper

temperature threshold of the board. When
the actual temperature is higher than the
preset value, an alarm is generated.
Temperature
Lower Threshold
(Deg.C)
-40.0 to 80.0
This parameter specifies the lower

temperature threshold of the board. When
the actual temperature is lower than the
preset value, an alarm is generated.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-245
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters for the Alarm Relay

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Alarm Severity
Critical Alarm
Critical Alarm
Major Alarm
Major Alarm
This parameter indicates the severity of the

alarm.
Minor Alarm
Minor Alarm
Warning Alarm
Warning Alarm
CSK-1
CSK-1
Alarm Output
Channel
CSK-2
This parameter specifies the channel of the

output alarm relay.
CSK-3
CSK-4
A.14 Parameters for Board Interfaces

This topic describes the parameters that are related to board interfaces.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the Hybrid/AM function.
A.14.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records
This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records.
A.14.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS)
test.
A.14.6 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency Attribute
This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU.
A.14.7 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of the
ODU.
A.14.8 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment Information
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information of
the ODU.
A.14.9 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of the
ODU.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces.
A.14.11 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown
A-246

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS)
function.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH interfaces.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control.
A.14.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2 Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes.
A.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwave
interfaces.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwave
interfaces.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwave
interfaces.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to IF attributes.
Navigation Path
l
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
Click the IF Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

IF interface.
Radio Link ID
1 to 4094

ID of a radio link. As the identifier of a
radio link, this parameter is used to
prevent incorrect connections of radio
links between sites.
Each radio link of an NE should have a

unique link ID, and the link IDs at both
ends of a radio link should be the same.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-247
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Received Radio
Link ID
1 to 4094
This parameter indicates the received ID

of the radio link.

does not match the preset value of Radio
Link ID at the local end, the local end
inserts the AIS signal to the downstream
direction of the service. At the same time,
the local end reports an alarm to the NMS,
indicating that the link IDs do not match.

loopback status of the IF interface.
Non-Loopback indicates that the

loopback is cancelled or not performed.
Inloop indicates that the IF signals

transmitted to the opposite end are looped
back.
Outloop indicates that the received SDH

signals are looped back.
Generally, this parameter is used to locate

the faults that occur at each IF interface.
The IF loopback is used for diagnosis. If
this function is enabled, the services at the
related ports are affected. In normal
cases, this parameter is set to NonLoopback.

whether the radio link transmits the
wayside E1 service.
The wayside E1 service can be supported

by the IF1 board in the 7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM, 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or
9,E3,14MHz,16QAM mode.

slot in which the 2M wayside service is
accessed.
This parameter can be set only when 2M

Wayside Enable Status is set to
Enabled.
The wayside E1 service can be supported

by the IF1 board in the 7,STM-1,28MHz,
128QAM, 8,E3,28MHz,QPSK, or
9,E3,14MHz,16QAM mode.
IF Port Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
2M Wayside
Enable Statusa
2M Wayside Input
Boarda
A-248
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
350 MHz
Consecutive Wave
Status
Stop
Stop

status of transmitting the 350 MHz carrier
signals at the IF interface.
This parameter can be set to Start in the

commissioning process only. In normal
cases, this parameter is set to Stop.
Otherwise, the services are interrupted.

whether the XPIC function of the IFX2
board is enabled.
If the IFX2 board does not perform the

XPIC function, this parameter should be
set to Disabled. In this case, the XPIC
cable is required to perform self-loop for
the XPIC port on the IFX2 board.
Start
Enabled
XPIC Enabledb
Enabled
Disabled
Enable IEEE-1588
Timeslotc
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
If the OptiX RTN 910 is interconnected with

the packet radio equipment, this parameter
should be set to Enabled. Otherwise, this
parameter should be set to Disabled.
NOTE
a. The IFU2 and IFX2 boards do not support the 2M wayside service.
b. The IFU2 and IF1 boards do not support the XPIC function.
c. The IF1 board does not support the IEEE-1588 timeslot function.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the ATPC attributes.
Navigation Path
l
Configuration > IF Interface from the Function Tree.
Click the ATPC Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

IF interface.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-249
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ATPC Enable
Status
Disabled
Disabled

When this parameter is set to Enabled

and if the RSL at the receive end is 2 dB
higher or lower than the central value
the ATPC lower threshold at the receive
end, the receiver notifies the transmitter
to decrease or increase the transmit power



attributes.

receive power.
(dBm) is set to Disabled.
Enabled
ATPC Upper
Threshold(dBm)
-75.0 to -20.0
-45.0
ATPC Lower
Threshold(dBm)
-35.0 to -90.0
-70.0
l
A-250

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
ATPC Automatic
Threshold Enable
Status
Enabled
Disabled

enabled.

link.

Threshold(dBm).
This parameter indicates that the
ATPC upper and lower thresholds.
This parameter is valid only when ATPC
Automatic Threshold Enable Status is
set to Enabled.
Disabled
ATPC Upper
Automatic
Threshold(dBm)
ATPC Lower
Automatic
Threshold(dBm)

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the Hybrid/AM function.
Navigation Path
In the NE Explorer, select a Hybrid IF board from the Object Tree and then choose
Configuration > Hybrid/AM Configuration from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

IF port.
IF Channel
Bandwidth
7M
7M
IF Channel Bandwidth indicates the

channel spacing of the corresponding radio
link. This parameter is set according to the
14M
28M
56M
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-251
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
AM Enable Status
Disable
Disable
When this parameter is set to Disable, the

radio link uses only the specified
Modulation Mode.
When this parameter is set to Enable, the

radio link uses the corresponding
channel conditions.
Enable

enabled.
Modulation Mode
of the Guaranteed
AM Capacity
QPSK
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM
This parameter specifies the lowest-gain

service transmission bandwidth that the
Hybrid radio must ensure and the
Enable Status is set to Enable.
Modulation Mode
of the Full AM
Capacity
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
128QAM
256QAM

NOTE

Enable Status is set to Enable.
Manually
Specified
Modulation Mode
QPSK
16QAM
32QAM
64QAM
QPSK

transmission.
Enable Status is set to Disable.
128QAM
256QAM
A-252

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Guaranteed E1
Capacity

Enable, this parameter depends on IF
Channel Bandwidth and Modulation
Mode of the Guaranteed AM
Capacity and is not configurable.

Disable, this parameter depends on IF
Channel Bandwidth and Manually
Specified Modulation Mode and is not
configurable.
E1 Capacity

services that can be transmitted in the
Hybrid work mode. The value of this
parameter cannot exceed the Guaranteed
E1 Capacity.
A.14.4 Parameter Description: ATPC Adjustment Records

This topic describes the parameters that are related to ATPC adjustment records.
Navigation Path
Configuration > ATPC Adjustment Records from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
This parameter indicates the port for the

ATPC adjustment.
Event NO.

ATPC adjustment event.
Adjustment Time
This parameter indicates the time of the

ATPC adjustment.
Adjustment
Direction
This parameter indicates the direction of the

adjustment at the port.
Switchover

operation at the port.
Transmitted
Power(dBm)
This parameter indicates the transmitted

power of the port to be switched.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-253
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Received Power
(dBm)
This parameter indicates the received power

of the port to be switched.
A.14.5 Parameter Description: PRBS Test

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the pseudorandom binary sequence (PRBS)
test.
Navigation Path
Configuration > PRBS Test from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port
This parameter indicates the port for the

PRBS test.
Direction
Cross
Cross

direction of the PRBS test.
In the tributary direction, the PRBS test

is performed to check the connectivity of
the cable from the tributary board to the
DDF.
In the cross-connect direction, the PRBS

test is performed to check the processing
of the service from the tributary board to
the NE at the remote end.
Tributary
Duration
1 to 255

duration of the PRBS test.
Measured Time

time unit used for the PRBS test.
10min
h
Start Time
This parameter indicates the start time of the

PRBS test.
Progress
This parameter indicates the progress

percentage of the PRBS test.
Total PRBS
This parameter indicates the number of bit

errors that occur in the PRBS test.
A-254

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Accumulating
Mode
Selected
Deselected
This parameter specifies whether to display

the values in accumulative mode. If
Accumulating Mode is selected, it
indicates that the values are displayed in
accumulative mode.
Deselected
A.14.6 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Radio Frequency

Attribute
This topic describes the parameters that are related to radio frequency attributes of an ODU.
Navigation Path
l
Select the ODU from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose Configuration > ODU
Interface from the Function Tree.
Click the Radio Frequency Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board

ODU.
Transmit
Frequency(MHz)

the central frequency of the channel.

less than the sum of the minimum
transmit frequency supported by the
ODU and a half of the channel spacing,
and must not be more than the difference
between the maximum transmit
frequency supported by the ODU and a
half of the channel spacing.

frequencies at both ends of a radio link
should be one T/R spacing.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-255
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
T/R Spacing(MHz)

spacing between the transmit frequency
and receive frequency of the ODU to
prevent mutual interference of the
transmitter and receiver.
If the ODU is a Tx high station, the

higher than the receive frequency. If the
ODU is a Tx low station, the transmit
frequency is one T/R spacing lower than
the receive frequency.

spacing, this parameter is set to 0,
by the ODU is used.


radio link.
Actual Transmit
Frequency(MHz)

Actual Receive
Frequency(MHz)

Actual T/R
Spacing(MHz)
This parameter indicates the actual T/R

spacing of the ODU.
The Range of
frequency Point
(MHz)
This parameter indicates the working range

of the frequency of the ODU.
A.14.7 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Power Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the power attributes of the
ODU.
Navigation Path
A-256
Click the Power Attributes tab.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board

ODU.
Maximum
Transmit Power
(dBm)

modulation module..


exceed this value.

This parameter specifies the transmit

power of the ODU. This parameter
cannot be set to a value that exceeds the
nominal power rang of the ODU or a
value that exceeds Maximum Transmit
Power(dBm).

radio link.


Transmit Power
(dBm)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-257
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Power to Be
Received(dBm)

used in the antenna alignment stage. After
this parameter is set, the NE




value of TX High Threshold(dBm), the
system separately records the duration
when the value of the actual transmit
power of the ODU is greater than the
preset value of TX High Threshold
(dBm) and the duration when the value
of the actual transmit power of the ODU
is greater than the preset value of TX Low
Threshold(dBm) in the performance
events.
value of TX Low Threshold(dBm) and
is lower than the preset value of TX High
transmit power of the ODU is greater than
the preset value of TX Low Threshold
of the ODU is lower than the preset value
of TX Low Threshold(dBm), the system
does not record it.
TX High
Threshold(dBm)
A-258

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TX Low Threshold
(dBm)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
TX High Threshold(dBm) and TX Low

Threshold(dBm) are valid only when the

A-259
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
RX High
Threshold(dBm)

the ODU is lower than the preset value of
RX Low Threshold(dBm), the system
records the duration when the value of the
actual receive power of the ODU is lower
than the preset value of RX Low
Threshold(dBm) and duration when the
value of the actual transmit power of the
ODU is lower than the preset value of RX
High Threshold(dBm)in the
performance events.

of RX Low Threshold(dBm) and is
lower than the preset value of RX High
receive power of the ODU is Lower than
the preset value of RX High Threshold

of RX High Threshold(dBm), the
system does not record it.
This parameter indicates the actual

If the ATPC function is enabled, the

queried actual transmit power may be
different from the preset value.
Actual Transmit
Power(dBm)
Actual Received
Power(dBm)

power of the ODU.
Actual range of
Power(dBm)

actual transmit power of the ODU.
Equip Information
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Frequency(GHz)

Equip Type

type of the ODU.

A-260

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Station Type
Tx Low

station.

Tx High
Produce SN

the ODU.
Transmission
Power Type
Standard Power
Output

High Power Output
A.14.8 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Equipment

Information
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the equipment information of
the ODU.
Navigation Path
l
Configuration > ODU Interface from the Function Tree.
Click the Equipment Information tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board

ODU.
Frequency(GHz)

Equipment Type
PDH

type of the ODU.

SDH
T/R Spacing(MHz)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
This parameter indicates the T/R spacing of

the ODU.

A-261
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Intermediate
Frequency
Bandwidth (MHz)
This parameter indicates the IF frequency

bandwidth of the ODU.
Station Type

station.

Transmission
Power Type

Produce Time

time of the ODU.
Produce SN

the ODU.
A.14.9 Parameter Description: ODU Interface_Advanced Attributes

This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes of the
ODU.
Navigation Path
l
Click the Advanced Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Board

ODU.
A-262

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
RF Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback

loopback status of the RF interface of the
ODU.

loopback is canceled or not performed.
Inloop indicates that the RF signals

back.
This function is used for fault locating for

the RF interfaces. The RF Loopback
function is used for diagnosis and may
affect the services that are transmitted
over the interfaces. Hence, exercise
precaution before starting this function.

Non-Loopback.

If this parameter is set to mute, the

If this parameter is set to unmute, the

ODU can normally transmit and receive
microwave signals.

unmute.
Inloop
unmute
Configure
Transmission
Status
unmute
mute
Actual
Transmission
Status
unmute
Factory
Information

status of the ODU.
This parameter indicates the manufacturer

information about the ODU.
mute

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the SDH interfaces.
Navigation Path
l
Configuration > SDH Interface from the Function Tree.
Select By Board/Port(Channel), and select Port or VC4 Channel from the list box.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-263
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

SDH interface.
Optical Interface
Namea

name of the optical interface.
Laser Switcha
Open
Open

on/off state of the laser.
This parameter is set for SDH optical

interfaces only.

Open.

loopback status on the SDH interface.

Inloop indicates that the SDH signals

back.


the SDH interfaces. The Optical
(Electrical) Interface Loopback

Non-Loopback.
Close
Optical(Electrical)
Interface
Loopbacka
A-264
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VC4 Loopbackb
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback

loopback status in the VC-4 path.

Inloop indicates that the VC-4 signals

back.
Outloop indicates that the received VC-4


the VC-4 paths. The VC4 Loopback

Non-Loopback.
Inloop
Outloop
NOTE
a: Indicates the parameters that are supported when Port is selected from the list box.
b: Indicates the parameters that are supported when VC4 Channel is selected from the list box.
A.14.11 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the automatic laser shutdown (ALS)
function.
Navigation Path
Configuration > Automatic Laser Shutdown from the Function Tree.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Optical Interface

optical interface.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-265
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Automatic
Shutdown
Disabled
Disabled

whether the Automatic Laser
Shutdown function is enabled or
disabled for the laser.
The ALS function allows the laser to shut

down automatically when an optical port
does not carry services, an optical fiber is
broken, or no optical signal is received.
You can set On Period(ms), Off Period

(ms), and Continuously On-test Period
(ms) only when this parameter is set to
Enabled.
Enabled
On Period(ms)
1000 to 3000
2000

period when a shutdown laser automatically
starts up and tests whether the optical fiber
is normal.
Off Period(ms)
2000 to 300000
60000

period when the laser does not work (with
the ALS function being enabled).
Continuously Ontest Period(ms)
2000 to 300000
90000

period when a shutdown laser is manually
started up and tests whether the optical fiber
is normal.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the PDH interfaces.
Navigation Path
l
Configuration > PDH Interface from the Function Tree.
Select By Board/Port(Channel).
Select Port from the list box.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

port.
Port Name

name of the port.
A-266

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tributary
Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback

loopback status in the associated path of
the tributary unit.

Inloop indicates that the PDH signals

back.
Outloop indicates that the received PDH


the paths of the tributary unit. The
Tributary Loopback function is used for
diagnosis and may affect the services that
are transmitted over the interfaces.
Hence, exercise precaution before
starting this function.

Non-Loopback.
Inloop
Outloop
Port Impedance
This parameter indicates the impedance of a

path, which depends on the tributary unit.
Service Load
Indication
Load
Load

service loading status in a specific path.
When this parameter is set to Load, the

board detects whether alarms exist in the
path.
When this parameter is set to NonLoaded, the board does not detect
whether there are alarms in the path.
If a path does not carry any services, you

can set this parameter to Non-Loaded for
the path to mask all the alarms. If a path
carries services, you need to set this
parameter to Load for the path.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Non-Loaded

A-267
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Retiming Mode
Normal
Normal

retiming mode of a specific path.
By using the retiming function, the

retiming reference signal from the SDH
network and the service data signal are
combined and then sent to the client
equipment, thus decreasing the output
jitter in the signal. In this way, the
retiming function ensures that the service
code flow can normally transfer the
retiming reference signal.
When this parameter is set to Normal, the

retiming function is not used.
When this parameter is set to Retiming

Mode of Tributary Clock, the retiming
function is used with the clock of the
upstream tributary unit traced.

retiming function is used with the clock
of the upstream tributary unit traced.,
the retiming function is used with the
clock of the cross-connect unit traced.
It is recommended that the external clock,

instead of the retiming function, should
be used to provide reference clock signals
for the equipment.
If the retiming function is required, it is

recommended that you set this parameter
to Retiming Mode of Cross-connect
Clock.
Retiming Mode of
Tributary Clock
Retiming Mode of
Cross-Connect
Clock
Port Service Type
This parameter indicates the type of services

that are processed in a path. It depends on
the services that are transmitted in a path.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of an Ethernet interface.
Navigation Path
A-268
1.
Management > Ethernet Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the General Attributes tab.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910


Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

the port name.
Name

the port name.
Enable Port
Enabled
Enabled

the working mode of the
port.
This parameter
specifies the method of
the port to process the
received packets.
If you set this

parameter to Null, the
port transparently
transmits the received
packets.
If you set this

parameter to 802.1Q,
the port identifies the
packets that comply
with the IEEE 802.1q
standard.
If you set this

parameter to QinQ, the
port identifies the
packets that comply
with the IEEE 802.1ad
QinQ standard.
Disabled
Encapsulation Type
Null
802.1Q
QinQ
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-269
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation
Auto-Negotiation
The Ethernet ports of

different types support
different working
modes.
When the equipment on

the opposite side works
in auto-negotiation
mode, set the working
mode of the equipment
on the local side to
Auto-Negotiation.

in full-duplex mode, set
the working mode of
local side to 10M FullDuplex, 100M FullDuplex, or 1000M
Full-Duplex
depending on the port
rate of the equipment
on the opposite side.

in half-duplex mode,
set the working mode
of the equipment on the
local side to 10M HalfDuplex, 100M HalfDuplex, or AutoNegotiation depending
on the port rate of the
equipment on the
opposite side.
The GE optical
interface supports the
1000M full-duplex
mode only.
10M Half-Duplex
10M Full-Duplex
100M Half-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex
1000M Full-Duplex
Max Frame Length

(byte)
A-270
1518 to 9600
1522

The value of this

parameter should be
greater than the length of
any frame to be
transported.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Auto-Negotiation
Enable
Auto-Negotiation
100M Full-Duplex
This parameter
specifies the autonegotiation capability
of the Ethernet port.

only when Working
Mode is set to AutoNegotiation.
This parameter
specifies the attribute
of the logical port.
The SFP on the EM6F

board supports the
optical port and
electrical port.
10M Half-Duplex
10M Full-Duplex
100M Half-Duplex
100M Full-Duplex
1000M Full-Duplex
Optical Port
Logical Port Attribute
Optical Port
Electrical Port
Physical Port Attribute

the attribute of the
physical port.

This topic describes the parameters that are related to flow control.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Flow Control tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

the port name.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-271
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
Disabled
Disabled

only when Working
Mode is not set to
Auto-Negotiation.
The nonautonegotiation flow

control mode of the
equipment on the local
side must be consistent
with the nonautonegotiation flow
control mode of the
equipment on the
opposite side

only when Working
Mode is set to AutoNegotiation.
The auto-negotiation
flow control mode of
local side must be
consistent with the
auto-negotiation flow
control mode of the
equipment on the
opposite side
Enabled
Auto-Negotiation Flow
Control Mode
Disabled
Disabled
Enable Symmetric Flow

Control
A.14.15 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Layer 2

Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

the port name.
A-272

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
QinQ Type Domain
This parameter
specifies the QinQ type
domain.
When Encapsulation
Type in the General
Attributes tab page is
set to QinQ, you need
to set QinQ Type
Domain. The default
value is 88A8.
When Encapsulation
Type in the General
Attributes tab page is
set to Null or 802.1Q,
you cannot set QinQ
Type Domain. In this
case, QinQ Type
Domain is displayed as
FFFF and cannot be
changed.
QinQ Type Domain

should be set to the
same value for all the
ports on the EM6T/
EM6F boardor the
EM4T/EM4F logical
board.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-273
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
TAG
Tag Aware
Tag Aware
This parameter
specifies the TAG flag
of a port. For details
about the TAG flags
and associated frameprocessing methods,
see Table A-1.
If all the accessed

services are frames
with the VLAN tag
(tagged frames), this
parameter is set to Tag
Aware.
If all the accessed

services are frames
without the VLAN tag
(untagged frames), this
parameter is set to
Access.
If the accessed services

contain tagged frames
and untagged frames,
Hybrid.

only when TAG is set
to Access or Hybrid.
For details about the

functions of this
parameter, see Table
A-1.

situations.
Access
Hybrid
Default VLAN ID
A-274
1 to 4094

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
VLAN Priority
0 to 7

only when TAG is set
to Access or Hybrid.
For details about the

functions of this
parameter, see Table
A-1.
When the VLAN

priority is required to
divide streams or to be
used for other
purposes, this
parameter is set
according to the
In normal cases, it is
Table A-1 Methods used by Ethernet interfaces to process data frames

Port
Ingress UNI
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
The port receives the

frame.
The port discards

the frame.
The port receives

the frame.
Untagged frame
The port discards the

frame.
The ports add the

VLAN tag, to which
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority
correspond, to the
frame and receives
the frame.
The ports add the

VLAN tag, to which
Default VLAN ID
and VLAN
Priority
correspond, to the
frame and receives
the frame.

A-275
OptiX RTN 910

Port
Egress UNI
Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
The port transmits

the frame.
The port strips the

VLAN tag from the
frame and then
transmits the frame.
If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
Default VLAN
ID, the port strips
the VLAN tag
from the frame
and then
transmits the
frame.
If the VLAN ID
in the frame is not
Default VLAN
ID, the port
directly transmits
the frame.
A.14.16 Parameter Description: Ethernet Interface_Advanced

Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are used for configuring the advanced attributes.
Navigation Path
1.
2.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

the port name.
Port Physical
Parameters

the physical parameters of
the port.
A-276

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
MAC Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
This parameter
specifies the loopback
state at the MAC layer.
set to Inloop, the
Ethernet signals
transmitted to the
opposite end are looped
back.
This parameter
specifies the loopback
state at the PHY layer.
set to Inloop, the
Ethernet physical
signals transmitted to
the opposite end are
looped back.
Inloop
PHY Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
Inloop
Loopback Check

whether to enable loop
detection, which is used to
check whether a loop
exists on the port.
Loopback Port
Shutdown

whether to enable the loop
port shutdown function.
Egress PIR Bandwidth

(kbit/s)

the egress PIR bandwidth.
Enabling Broadcast
Packet Suppression
Disabled
Disabled

whether to limit the traffic
rate of the broadcast
packets according to the
proportion of the
broadcast packets in the
total packets. When the
equipment at the opposite
end may encounter a
broadcast storm, this
parameter is set to
Enabled.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Enabled

A-277
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Broadcast Packet
Suppression Threshold
0 to 100
30
When the proportion of

the broadcast packets in
the total packets exceeds
the value of this
parameter, the received
broadcast packets are
discarded. The value of
this parameter should be
more than the proportion
of the broadcast packets in
the total packets before
the broadcast storm
occurs. In normal cases,
30% or higher.
A.14.17 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Basic

Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the basic attributes of microwave
interfaces.
Navigation Path
1.
Management > Microwave Interface from the Function Tree.
2.
Click the Basic Attributes tab.
Parameters
Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

IF port.
Name

customized port name.
Port Mode
Layer 2
Layer 2
This parameter indicates the working mode

of the Ethernet name.
A-278

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Encapsulation
Type
Null
802.1Q

the port to process the received packets.
If this parameter is set to Null, the port

transparently transmits the received
packets.
If this parameter is set to 802.1Q, the port

identifies the packets that comply with
the IEEE 802.1Q standard.
If this parameter is set to QinQ, the port

identifies the packets that comply with
the IEEE 802.1 QinQ standard.
802.1Q
QinQ
A.14.18 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Layer 2

Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the Layer 2 attributes of microwave
interfaces.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Click the Layer 2 Attributes tab.
Parameters for Layer 2 Attributes

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

IF port.
QinQ Type
Domain
This parameter specifies the QinQ type

domain.
This parameter can be set only when

Encapsulation Type in General
Attributes is set to QinQ.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-279
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Tag
Tag Aware
Tag Aware
This parameter specifies the TAG flag of

a port. For details about the TAG flags
and associated frame-processing
methods, see Table A-2.
If all the accessed services are frames that

contain the VLAN tag (tagged frames),
set this parameter to "Tag Aware".
If all the accessed services are frames that

do not contain the VLAN tag (untagged
frames), set this parameter to "Access".
If the accessed services contain tagged

frames and untagged frames, set this
parameter to "Hybrid".
This parameter is valid only when TAG

is set to Access or Hybrid.
For details about the functions of this

parameter, see Table A-2.

to the actual situations.
This parameter is valid only when TAG

is set to Access or Hybrid.
For details about the functions of this

parameter, see Table A-2.
When the VLAN priority is required to

divide streams or to be used for other
purposes, this parameter needs to be set
according to the planning information. In
normal cases, it is recommended that you
Access
Hybrid
Default VLAN ID
VLAN Priority
1 to 4094
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Table A-2 Data frame processing

Status
Ingress Port
A-280
Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Tagged frame
The port receives the

frame.
The port discards

the frame.
The port receives

the frame.

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Status
Egress Port
Type of Data
Frame
Processing Method
Tag Aware
Access
Hybrid
Untagged frame
The port discards the

frame.
The port receives

the frame after the
VLAN tag that
corresponds to
"Default VLAN ID"
and "VLAN
Priority" are added
to the frame.
The port receives

the frame after the
VLAN tag that
corresponds to
"Default VLAN ID"
and "VLAN
Priority" are added
to the frame.
Tagged frame
The port transmits

the frame.
The port strips the

VLAN tag from the
frame and then
transmits the frame.
If the VLAN ID
in the frame is
"Default VLAN
ID", the port
strips the VLAN
tag from the
frame and then
transmits the
frame.
If the VLAN ID
in the frame is not
"Default VLAN
ID", the port
directly transmits
the frame.
A.14.19 Parameter Description: Microwave Interface_Advanced

Attributes
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the advanced attributes of microwave
interfaces.
Navigation Path
1.
2.
Parameters for Advanced Attributes

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Port

IF port.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-281
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Radio Link ID
1 to 4094
This parameter specifies the ID of the

radio link. As the identifier of a radio link,
this parameter is used to prevent incorrect
connections of radio links between sites.
The ID of each radio link of an NE must

be unique, and the link IDs at both ends
of a radio link must be the same.
This parameter indicates the received ID

of the radio link.

does not match with the preset value of
Radio Link ID at the local end, the local
end inserts the AIS signal to the
downstream direction of the service. At
the same time, the local end reports an
alarm to the NMS, indicating that the link
IDs do not match.

loopback status of the IF interface.

Inloop indicates that the IF signals

back.

Generally, this parameter is used to locate

the faults that occur at each IF interface.
The IF loopback is used for diagnosis. If
this function is enabled, the services at the
related ports are affected. In normal
cases, this parameter is set to NonLoopback.

loopback status on the composite
interface.

Inloop indicates that the composite

signals transmitted to the opposite end are
looped back.
Outloop indicates that the received

composite signals are looped back.

Non-Loopback.
Received Radio
Link ID
IF Port Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
Composite Port
Loopback
Non-Loopback
Inloop
Outloop
A-282
Non-Loopback

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Error Frame
Discard Enabled
Enabled
Enabled

whether to discard the Ethernet frame
when a CRC error occurs in an Ethernet
frame.
If the Ethernet service transmitted on the

IF_ETH port is a voice service or a video
service, you can set this parameter to
Disabled.
The IF1 board does not support this

parameter.
This parameter indicates the MAC

address of the port.

parameter.
This parameter indicates the transmit rate

of the local port.

parameter.
This parameter indicates the receive rate

of the local port.

parameter.
This parameter specifies the loopback

state at the MAC layer. When this
parameter is set to Inloop, the Ethernet
signals transmitted to the opposite end are
looped back.

you use the default value.

parameter.
Disabled
MAC Address
Transmitting Rate
(Kbit/s)
Receiving Rate
(Kbit/s)
MAC Loopback
Non-Loopback
Non-Loopback
Inloop
Non-Loopback
PHY Loopback
Non-Loopback
The IF port on the OptiX RTN 910 does not

support the setting of this parameter.
A.15 Parameters for Overhead

This topic describes the parameters that are related to overhead.
This topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads
(RSOHs).
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-283
OptiX RTN 910

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the VC-4 path overheads (POHs).

This topic describes the parameters that are related to the regenerator section overheads
(RSOHs).
Navigation Path
1.
Select an SDH interface board in the NE Explorer Choose Configuration > Overhead
Management > Regenerator Section Overhead from the Function Tree.
2.
Choose Display in Text Format or Display in Hexadecimal.
Parameters for Setting the Display Format

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Display in Text
Format
Selected
Selected
This parameter specifies the display in the

text format.
Display in
Hexadecimal
Selected
Deselected

hexadecimal format.
Deselected
Deselected

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
J0 to be Sent
([Mode]Content)
[16 Bytes]HuaWei
SBS
If the NE at the opposite end reports the

J0_MM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the J0 byte to be received at the
opposite end.
J0 to be Received
([Mode]Content)
[Disabled]
This parameter specifies the J0 byte to be

received.
If this parameter is set to [Disabled], the

board does not monitor the received J0
byte.

default value.

A-284

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Navigation Path
1.
Select SDH interface board from the Object Tree in the NE Explorer. Choose
Configuration > Overhead Management > VC4 Path Overhead from the Function Tree.
2.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Display in Text
Format
Selected
Selected

text format.
Display in
Hexadecimal
Selected
Deselected

hexadecimal format.
Deselected
Deselected
Parameters for the Trace Byte J1

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
J1 to be Sent
([Mode]Content)
[16 Bytes]HuaWei
SBS

LP_TIM or LP_TIM_VC3 alarm, this
parameter is set according to the J1 byte to
be received at the opposite end.
J1 to be Received
([Mode]Content)
[Disabled]

byte.

default value.
Parameters for the Signal Flag C2

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
C2 to be Sent
(0x00)Unequipped

HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the C2 byte to be received at the
opposite end.
C2 to be Received
(0x00)Unequipped
If the NE at the local end reports the

HP_SLM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the C2 byte to be sent at the
opposite end.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-285
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters for Overhead Termination

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
VC4 Overhead
Termination
Termination
Auto
If this parameter is set to Pass-Through,

the NE forwards the original overhead
after monitoring the VC-4 path overhead
regardless of the C2 byte.
If this parameter is set to Termination,

the NE generates the new VC-4 path
overhead according to the board setting
after monitoring the VC-4 path overhead
regardless of the C2 byte.
If this parameter is set to Auto, the VC-4

path overhead in the VC-4 pass-through
service is passed through, and the VC-4
path overhead in the VC-12 service is
terminated.

value.
Pass-Through
Auto

Navigation Path
1.
Configuration > Overhead Management > VC12 Path Overhead from the Function
Tree.
2.

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Display in Text
Format
Selected
Selected

text format.
Display in
Hexadecimal
Selected
Deselected

hexadecimal format.
A-286
Deselected
Deselected

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Parameters for the Trace Byte

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
J2 to be Sent
[16 Bytes]HuaWei
SBS

HP_TIM alarm, this parameter is set
according to the J2 byte to be received by
the NE at the opposite end.
J2 to be Received
[Disabled]

byte.

default value.
J2 Received
This parameter displays the J2 byte that is

actually received.
Parameters for the Signal Flag

Parameter
Value Range
Default Value
Description
Object
Signal Label
(L1,L2,L3 of V5) to
be Sent

LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm, this
parameter is set according to the V5 byte to
be received at the opposite end.
Signal Label
(L1,L2,L3 of V5) to
be Received
If the NE at the local end reports the

LP_SLM or LP_SLM_VC3 alarm, this
parameter is set according to the V5 byte to
be sent at the opposite end.
Signal Label
(L1,L2,L3 of V5)
Received
This parameter displays the V5 byte that is

actually received.
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

A-287
OptiX RTN 910

B Board Loopback Types
Board Loopback Types
Different service interface boards support different loopback types.

Table B-1 Loopback types supported by different service interface boards
Board
Loopback Type
SL1D
Supports the optical

interface inloop
Supports the optical

interface outloop
Supports the VC-4 path

inloop
Supports the VC-4 path

outloop
Supports the tributary

inloop
Supports the tributary

outloop
Supports the Ethernet port

inloop at the MAC layer
Supports the Ethernet port

inloop at the PHY layer
The EM4T/EM4F is the logical

Ethernet board mapping the
physical Ethernet board CSHA/
CSHB/CSHC.
Supports the IF port inloop
Supports the IF port outloop
Supports the composite port

inloop

outloop
SP3S and SP3D
EM4T and EM4F

EM6T and EM6F
IF1
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

Remarks
The SL1D boards described in
this topic include the physical
SL1D board and the logical
SL1D board that the physical
CSTA/CSHC board maps.
The SP3S and SP3D boards

described in this topic include
the physical SP3S and SP3D
boards and the logical SP3S and
SP3D boards that the physical
CSTA, CSHA, CHSB, and
CHSC boards map.
B-1
OptiX RTN 910

B Board Loopback Types
Board
Loopback Type
IFU2

inloop

outloop
Supports the MAC inloop at

IFETH ports

inloop

outloop
Supports the MAC inloop at

IFETH ports
IFX2
B-2

Remarks
-
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

C Indicators, Weight, and Power Consumption of Boards
Indicators, Weight, and Power

Consumption of Boards
Indicators of Boards
Table C-1 Description of the indicators on the CSTA
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off

board.
PROG
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)




BIOS boot state.
On (green)

initialized.


fails.

C-1
OptiX RTN 910

Indicator
State
Meaning
On (red)

SYNC
SRV
LOS1
LOS2
Off
On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
On (red)

board.
On (yellow)

system.
Off
On (red)

Off

On (red)

Off

Table C-2 Description of the indicators on the CSHA/CSHB

Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off

board.
PROG
C-2



Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Indicator
State
Meaning


BIOS boot state.
On (green)

initialized.


fails.
On (red)

SYNC
SRV
Off
On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
On (red)

board.
On (yellow)

system.
Off
Table C-3 Description of the indicators on the CSHC

Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off

board.
PROG
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)



C-3
OptiX RTN 910

Indicator
State
Meaning


BIOS boot state.
On (green)

initialized.


fails.
On (red)

SYNC
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2
LOS1
C-4
Off
On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
On (red)

board.
On (yellow)

system.
Off
On (green)
Off
Off
On (green)
Off
Off
On (red)

Off


Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Indicator
State
Meaning
LOS2
On (red)

Off

Table C-4 Description of the indicators on the IF1

Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)

normally.
On (red)
Off

to the board.
SRV
LINK
ODU
RMT
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
On (green)
On (red)

service.
On (yellow)

Off

configured.
On (green)
On (red)
On (green)
On (red)

added on the NMS

major alarms.
On (yellow)

On (yellow)


C-5
OptiX RTN 910

Indicator
ACT
State
Meaning
Off

an RDI.
On (green)

system.

activated in the
unprotected system.

system.

Off
Table C-5 Description of the indicators on the IFU2

Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)

normally.
On (red)
Off

to the board.
SRV
LINK
ODU
C-6
On (green)
On (red)

service.
On (yellow)

Off

configured.
On (green)
On (red)
On (green)

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Indicator
RMT
ACT
State
Meaning
On (red)

added on the NMS

major alarms.
On (yellow)

On (yellow)

Off

an RDI.
On (green)

system.

activated in the
unprotected system.

system.

Off
Table C-6 Description of the indicators on the EM6T/EM6F

Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off
There is no power supplied to the board.
SRV
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
On (green)
On (red)
A critical or major alarm occurs in the

system.
On (yellow)
A minor alarm occurs in the system.

C-7
OptiX RTN 910

Indicator
PROG
State
Meaning
Off


being reset, the software is being loaded to
the flash memory.


being reset, the board software is in BIOS
boot state.
On (green)
The upper layer software is being initialized.
On for 100 ms (red) and off for

100 ms repeatedly

fails.
On (red)

being reset, the memory self-check fails or
loading the upper layer software fails.
When the board is running, the logic file or
upper layer software is lost.
LINK1a
LINK2a
Off
On (green)

Blinking (yellow)

transmitting data.
Off

On (green)

Flashing (green)

transmitting data.
Off

NOTE
a: The LINK1 and LINK2 indicators are available only on the EM6F and indicate the states of the
corresponding GE optical interfaces.
C-8

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Table C-7 Description of the indicators on the SL1D

Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)

normally.
On (red)
Off

to the board.
SRV
LOS1
LOS2
On (green)
On (red)

service.
On (yellow)

Off

configured.
On (red)

the SL1D reports the R_LOS
alarm.
Off

the SL1D does not report the
R_LOS alarm.
On (red)

of the SL1D reports the
R_LOS alarm.
Off

of the SL1D does not report
the R_LOS alarm.
Table C-8 Description of the indicators on the SP3S/SP3D
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)

normally.
On (red)

C-9
OptiX RTN 910

Indicator
SRV
State
Meaning
Off

to the board.
On (green)
On (red)

service.
On (yellow)

Off

configured.
Table C-9 Description of the indicators on the AUX

Indicator
State
Meaning
STAT
On (green)
On (red)
Off

board.
SRV
On (green)
On (red)

board.
On (yellow)

system.
Off
Table C-10 Description of the power status indicators
C-10
Indicator
Status
Description
PWRA
On (green)
Off


Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

Indicator
Status
Description
PWRB
On (green)
Off

Table C-11 Description of the fan status indicators

Indicator
State
Meaning
FAN
On (green)
The fan is running normally.
On (red)
The fan is faulty.
Off
The fan is not powered on or is not installed.
Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Table C-12 Weight and power consumption of boards
Boards
Weight (kg)
Power consumption (W)
CSTA
1.08 kg
< 13.6 W
CSHA
1.11 kg
< 18.0 W
CSHB
1.16 kg
< 22.7 W
CSHC
1.13 kg
< 19.6 W
IF1
0.72 kg
< 12 W
IFU2
0.79 kg
< 23 W
IFX2
0.80 kg
< 33 W
EM6T
0.37 kg
< 10.4 W
EM6F
0.38 kg
< 11.3 W
SL1D
0.30 kg
< 3.4 W
SP3S
0.54 kg
< 5.7 W
SP3D
0.64 kg
< 9.6 W
PIU
0.12 kg
< 0.5 W
FAN
0.20 kg
< 2.3 W (room temperature)

< 17 W (high temperature)
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

C-11
OptiX RTN 910

D Glossary
Glossary
Terms are listed in an alphabetical order.

Number
1U
The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/
1.75 in.)
1+1 protection
A radio link protection system composed of one working channel and one
protection channel. Two ODUs and two IF boards are used at each end of
a radio link.
A
Adaptive
modulation
A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode

based on the channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the
equipment adopts a high-efficiency modulation mode to improve the
transmission efficiency and the spectrum utilization of the system. When
the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adopts the low-efficiency
modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the link
that carries high-priority services.
Add/Drop
multiplexer
A network element that adds/drops the PDH signal or STM-x (x < N) signal
to/from the STM-N signal on the SDH transport network.
Adjacent
channel
alternate
polarization
A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a

horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit
two signals.
Automatic
A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit
transmit power signal detected at the receiver.
control
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)

D-1
OptiX RTN 910

D Glossary
Co-channel
dual
polarization
A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization

wave and a vertical polarization wave to transmit two signals. The cochannel dual polarization is twice the transmission capacity of the single
polarization.
Cross
polarization
interference
cancellation
A technology used in the case of the co-channel dual polarization (CCDP)

to eliminate the cross-connect interference between two polarization
waves in the CCDP.
D
DC-I
A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is shortcircuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet
and is isolated from the PGND on the line between the output of the power
supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
Digital
modulation
A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and

frequency of the carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal.
In this manner, the information can be transmitted by the carrier.
Dual-polarized
antenna
An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent

radio waves orthogonally polarized.
E
Equalization
A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can

compensate for the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency
selective fading.
Bit error
A symptom that the quality of the transmitted information is degraded

because some bits of a data stream are errored after being received,
decided, and regenerated.
F
Forward error
correction
A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to

the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the
bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end.
Frequency
diversity
A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with

a certain frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal
and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact
of fading.
D-2

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

D Glossary
Gateway
network
element
A network element that is used for communication between the NE

application layer and the NM application layer.
H
Hybrid radio
The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid

radio supports the AM function.
I
Indoor Unit
The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements

accessing, multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.
Internet Group The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast
Management
groups among the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent
Protocol
multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships.
Intermediate
frequency
The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal

and an RF signal.
IGMP
snooping
A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This

protocol manages and controls the multicast group by listening to and
analyze the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packet between
hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast data
on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.
L
Layer 2 switch
A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet

switch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address.
Since the MAC address is the second layer of the OSI model, this data
forwarding method is called layer 2 switch.
LCT
The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located

on the NE management layer of the transport network.
Link
aggregation
group
An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to

form a link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link
aggregation group as if it were a single link.
Trail
A type of transport entity, mainly engaged in transferring signals from the

input of the trail source to the output of the trail sink, and monitoring the
integrality of the transferred signals.
M
Multiplex
section
protection
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
The function performed to provide capability for switching a signal

between and including two MST functions, from a "working" to a
"protection" channel.

D-3
OptiX RTN 910

D Glossary
Multiple
Spanning Tree
Protocol
MSTP is an evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol and the Rapid

Spanning Tree Protocol, and was introduced in IEEE 802.1s as amendment
to 802.1Q, 1998 edition. Standard IEEE 802.1Q-2003 now includes
MSTP.
N
N+1 protection
A microwave link protection system that employs N working channels and

one protection channel.
Network
element
A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software
running on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control board
which manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software
runs on the system control Unit.
Network
management
system
The network management system in charge of the operation,

administration, and maintenance of a network.
Non-gateway
network
element
A network element whose communication with the NM application layer

must be transferred by the gateway network element application layer.
O
Orderwire
A channel that provides voice communication between operation

engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations.
Outdoor unit
The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements

frequency conversion and amplification for RF signals.
P
Plesiochronous
Digital
Hierarchy
A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes

the minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565
Mbit/s rates.
Polarization
A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector

is fixed or rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the
electromagnetic wave is perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this
electromagnetic wave is called vertically polarized wave; if the electric
field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the plane of horizon,
this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the tip of
the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this
electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.
D-4

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

D Glossary
QinQ
A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It

encapsulates the tag of the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN)
into the tag of the public VLAN. The packet carries two layers of tags to
travel through the backbone network of the carrier. In this manner, the layer
2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user.
R
Rapid
Spanning Tree
Protocol
An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning

tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward
compatible with the STP protocol.
S
Single
polarized
antenna
An antenna that can transmit only one channel of polarized electromagnetic

waves.
Space diversity
A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a

specific distance to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then
performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently,
only receive SD is used.
Spanning Tree
Protocol
An algorithm defined in the IEEE 802.1D. It configures the active topology

of a Bridged LAN of arbitrary topology into a single spanning tree.
Subnet
A logical entity in the transmission network, which comprises a group of

network management objects. A subnet can contain NEs and other subnets.
Subnetwork
connection
protection
A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced

by a protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork
connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level.
Synchronous
Digital
Hierarchy
A hierarchical set of synchronous digital transport, multiplexing, and

cross-connect structures, which is standardized for the transport of suitably
adapted payloads over physical transmission networks.
U
U2000
A unified network management system developed by Huawei. It can

support all the NE level and network level management functions, and can
manage the transport network, access network, and MAN Ethernet in a
unified manner.
V
Virtual LAN
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
An end-to-end logical network that can travel through several network

segments or networks by using the network management software based
on the switch LAN. The IEEE 802.1Q is the main standard for the virtual
LAN.

D-5
OptiX RTN 910

Acronyms and Abbreviations
Acronyms and abbreviations are listed in alphabetical order.

A
ADC
Analog Digit Converter
AGC
Automatic Gain Control
APS
Automatic Protection Switching
ARP
Address Resolution Protocol
ASK
Amplitude Shift Keying
ATPC
Automatic Transmit Power Control
AU
Administrative Unit
B
BER
Bit Error Rate
BIOS
Basic Input Output System
BIP
Bit-Interleaved Parity
BPDU
Bridge Protocol Data Unit
BSC
Base Station Controller
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
CAR
Committed Access Rate
CBS
Committed Burst Size
CCDP
Co-Channel Dual Polarization
CF
Compact Flash card
CGMP
Cisco Group Management Protocol

E-1
OptiX RTN 910

CIR
Committed Information Rate
CIST
Common and Internal Spanning Tree
CoS
Class of Service
CPU
Central Processing Unit
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check
CVLAN
Customer VLAN
C-VLAN
Customer VLAN
D
DC
Direct Current
DCC
Data Communications Channel
DCN
Data Communication Network
DSCP
Differentiated Services Code Point
DVMRP
Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
E
ECC
Embedded Control Channel
E-LAN
Ethernet-LAN
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMI
Electromagnetic Interference
ERPS
Ethernet Ring Protection Switching
ES-IS
End System to Intermediate System
ETSI
European Telecommunications Standards Institute
E-2
FCS
Frame Check Sequence
FD
Frequency Diversity
FE
Fast Ethernet
FEC
Forward Error Correction
FIFO
First In First Out
FLP
Fast Link Pulse
FPGA
Field Programmable Gate Array

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

FTP
File Transfer Protocol
G
GE
Gigabit Ethernet
GFP
Generic Framing Procedure
GTS
Generic Traffic Shaping
GUI
Graphical User Interface
H
HDB3
High Density Bipolar Code 3
HDLC
High level Data Link Control procedure
HSB
Hot Standby
HSM
Hitless Switch Mode
I
ICMP
Internet Control Message Protocol
IDU
Indoor Unit
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF
The Internet Engineering Task Force
IF
Intermediate Frequency
IGMP
Internet Group Management Protocol
IP
Internet Protocol
IPv6
Internet Protocol version 6
IS-IS
Intermediate System to Intermediate System
ISO
International Standard Organization
ITU-T
International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication

Standardization Sector
IVL
Independence VLAN learning
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
LAN
Local Area Network
LAPD
Link Access Procedure on the D channel

E-3
OptiX RTN 910

LAG
Link Aggregation Group
LAPS
Link Access Procedure-SDH
LB
LoopBack
LCT
Generation-Local Craft Terminal
LDPC
Low-Density Parity Check code
LMSP
Linear Multiplex Section Protection
LPT
Link State Pass Through
M
MA
Maintenance Association
MAC
Medium Access Control
MADM
Multi Add-Drop Multiplexer
MBS
Maximum Burst Size
MD
Maintenance Domain
MDI
Medium Dependent Interface
MEP
Maintenance End Point
MIB
Management Information Base
MP
Maintenance Point
MSP
Multiplex Section Protection
MSTP
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MTBF
Mean Time Between Failure
MTTR
Mean Time To Repair
MTU
Maximum Transmission Unit
N
NE
Network Element
NLP
Normal Link Pulse
NMS
Network Management System
NNI
Network-to-Network Interface or Network Node Interface
NSAP
Network Service Access Point
E-4

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

OAM
Operations, Administration and Maintenance
ODU
Outdoor Unit
OSI
Open Systems Interconnection
OSPF
Open Shortest Path First
P
PDH
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PIM-DM
Protocol Independent Multicast-Dense Mode
PIM-SM
Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode
PIR
Peak Information Rate
PPP
Point-to-Point Protocol
PRBS
Pseudo-Random Binary Sequence
Q
QinQ
802.1Q in 802.1Q
QoS
Quality of Service
QPSK
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
R
RF
Radio Frequency
RFC
Request For Comment
RIP
Routing Information Protocol
RMON
Remote Monitoring
RNC
Radio Network Controller
RS
Reed-Solomon encoding
RSL
Received Signal Level
RSSI
Received Signal Strength Indicator
RSTP
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RTN
Radio Transmission Node
S
SD
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
Space Diversity

E-5
OptiX RTN 910

SDH
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SFP
Small Form-Factor Pluggable
SNC
SubNetwork Connection
SNCP
Sub-Network Connection Protection
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
SNR
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
SP
Strict Priority
SSM
Synchronization Status Message
STM
Synchronous Transport Module
STM-1
SDH Transport Module -1
STM-1e
STM-1 Electrical Interface
STM-1o
STM-1 Optical Interface
STM-N
SDH Transport Module -N
STP
Spanning Tree Protocol
SVL
Shared VLAN Learning
T
TCI
Tag Control Information
TCP
Transfer Control Protocol
TDM
Time Division Multiplex
TMN
Telecommunication Management Network
TU
Tributary Unit
U
UDP
User Datagram Protocol
UNI
User-Network Interface
E-6
VC
Virtual Container
VC12
Virtual Container -12
VC-12
VC3

Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
OptiX RTN 910

VC-3
VC4
VC-4
VCG
Virtual Concatenation Group
VLAN
Virtual LAN
VoIP
Voice over IP
VPN
Virtual Private Network
W
WAN
Wide Area Network
WRR
Weighted Round Robin
WTR
Wait to Restore Time
Issue 03 (2010-01-30)
XPD
Cross-Polarization Discrimination
XPIC
Cross-polarization Interference Cancellation

E-7

Idu Hardware Description: Optix RTN 910 Radio Transmission System V100R002C00

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Idu Hardware Description: Optix RTN 910 Radio Transmission System V100R002C00

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiX RTN 910 Radio Transmission System

IDU Hardware Description

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Industrial Base

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX RTN 910

About This Document

About This Document

OptiX RTN 910

Network planning engineer

Hardware installation engineer

Installation and commissioning engineer

Field maintenance engineer

Data configuration engineer

System maintenance engineer

Basics of digital microwave communication

Basics of the OptiX RTN 910

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX RTN 910

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

Updates in Issue 03 (2010-01-30) Based on Product Version V100R002C00

3.3.5 DIP Switches and CF Card

Modifies the sequence of high-order bits and

3.5.2 Functions and Features

Deletes specifications for VC-4 loopbacks on

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX RTN 910

5.6.1 E1 Cable to the External Equipment

Adds descriptions of requirements for the

Fixes known bugs.

Updates in Issue 02 (2009-10-30) Based on Product Version V100R002C00

Adds certain terms.

E Acronyms and Abbreviations

Adds certain abbreviations and acronyms.

Updates in Issue 01 (2009-06-30) Based on Product Version V100R002C00

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX RTN 910

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX RTN 910

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX RTN 910

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX RTN 910

5.8 Network Cable...............................................................................................................................................5-17

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX RTN 910

A.5.2 Parameter Description: Linear MSP...................................................................................................A-79

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX RTN 910

A.9.17 Parameter Description: LPT Management_Creation.....................................................................A-186

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX RTN 910

A.14.11 Parameter Description: Automatic Laser Shutdown....................................................................A-265

B Board Loopback Types............................................................................................................B-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX RTN 910

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX RTN 910

Figure 3-27 Front panel of the IF1.....................................................................................................................3-66